(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Lycoming College catalog"




Lycoming College 

FOUNDED 1812 

Liberal Arts & Sciences 



B 
H 









KR 



\tm 



m 













Catalog 1983-84 



Communicating with Lycoming College 

Please address specific inquiries as follows: 

Dean of Admissions and Financial Aid 
Admissions; requests for publications; financial assistance. 

Treasurer: 

Payment of bills; expenses. 

Director of Financial Aid: 
Scholarships and loan funds; financial assistance. 

Dean of the College: 
Academic programs; faculty; faculty activities. 

Dean of Student Services: 
Student activities; residence halls; religious life; health services; academic 
support services. 

Registrar: 
Student records; transcript requests; academic policies. 

Career Development Center: 

Career counseling; employment opportunities. 

Executive Director of Institutional Advancement 
Institutional relations; annual fund; gift programs. 

Director of Alumni Relations 
Alumni information. 

Director of Public Relations: 

Public information; publications; sports information. 

All correspondence should be addressed to: 
Lycoming College 
Williamsport, Pennsylvania 17701-5192 

The College telephone number is (717) 326-1951. 



Visitors 

Lycoming welcomes visitors to the campus. If you would like a guided tour, call 
the Office of Admissions before your visit to arrange a mutually convenient time. 



Lycoming College welcomes applications from prospective students regardless of age, sex, race, relig- 
ion, handicap, finances, national or ethnic origin, or color. Lycoming does not discriminate on the 
basis of age, sex, race, religion, handicap, finances, national or ethnic origin, or color in the adminis- 
tration of any of its policies and programs. 




LYCOMING COLLEGE 

Catalog 1983-84 



Contents 

Welcome to Lycoming 3 

The Academic Program 5 

The Curriculum 20 

Student Services 58 

Admission 60 

Financial Matters 61 

The Campus 65 

Academic Calendar, 1983-1984 67 

Directory 68 

The Alumni Association 75 

Index 76 



Welcome to Lycoming 



Lycoming is an independent, coeduca- 
tional college dedicated to providing 
the type of learning that can be used 
for a lifetime — the liberal arts and 
sciences. 

Lycoming's academic relevance de- 
rives from its enduring commitment to 
the value of this type of education, as 
offered by a superior teaching faculty. 
The College's principal aim is to help 
students develop a central core of inte- 
grated values, skill, information, and 



are interested in teaching, medicine, 
law, dentistry, or the ministry, they can 
take courses needed to enter their ad- 
vanced study. 

Students also can study engineering, 
forestry or environmental studies, po- 
diatric medicine, optometry, medical 
technology, and sculpture through co- 
operative programs operated by Ly- 
coming with other colleges and univer- 
sities. Or, they can study abroad or in 
Harrisburg, Pa., Washington, D.C., 




strategies while they learn to commu- 
nicate, reason, make decisions, under- 
stand, and use their imagination. This 
type of education can lead to produc- 
tive and fulfilling lives in many fields 
while allowing lifelong growth and de- 
velopment. 

Lycoming awards bachelor of arts 
degrees in 30 major fields, a bachelor 
of fine arts degree in sculpture, and a 
bachelor of science degree in nursing. 
The curriculum is challenging. Because 
it is built upon the two principles of 
the liberal arts known as distribution 
and concentration, it allows students 
to study in breadth and depth. 

Students who have special interests 
not met entirely by a major field can 
design their own majors. Or, if they 



or New York City through other off- 
campus study programs. 

Most students complete their pro- 
gram of study in four years, usually by 
taking four courses each fall and spring 
semester. But students also can take 
one course during Lycoming's May 
term, or two courses during the sum- 
mer term. 

Recognizing students' concerns about 
careers, Lycoming offers extensive 
counseling through the Career Devel- 
opment Center and advisory commit- 
tees for prelaw, prehealth professions, 
and premedical students. The College 
also operates a wide-ranging intern- 
ship program that allows students to 
earn academic credit while working at 
area businesses, government offices, 



and nonprofit organizations. 

Lycoming's ratio of faculty to stu- 
dents is 15 to one, which means that 
most classes are small and there is 
abundant opportunity for individual 
attention. All faculty members teach. 
More than 70 percent of Lycoming's 
faculty hold the highest degrees in 
their fields from the nation's outstand- 
ing colleges and universities. And, fac- 
ulty members take their advising seri- 
ously. They care about students, and 
encourage and guide them so they re- 
ceive the education they want. 

Eighteen buildings sit on Lycoming's 
main campus. Most of them have been 
built since 1950. The modern buildings 
include the eight residence halls, the li- 
brary, Arena Theatre, planetarium, 
student union, computer center, elec- 
tronic-music studio, photography lab- 
oratory, art gallery, and physical edu- 
cation/recreation center. 

Lycoming houses approximately 900 
of its 1,250 students in the residence 
halls, which include double and single 
rooms. Most students find the campus 
friendly and comfortable, with all of 
the buildings easy to reach from any- 
where on campus. Students come from 
a variety of economic classes, religious 
beliefs, and geographic areas, although 
most students call Pennsylvania, New 
Jersey, or New York their home. They 
work and play together in an atmos- 
phere of respect and tolerance. 

The College offers a variety of ex- 
tracurricular activities. Student gov- 
ernment groups help to plan campus 
activities and social events. Numerous 
clubs, honor societies, social fraterni- 
ties and sororities, the yearbook and 
literary magazine, and the band and 
widely acclaimed choir meet other stu- 
dent interests. Students who like to 
perform or compete can act on the 
Arena Theatre stage or play on inter- 
collegiate or intramural sports teams. 
Intercollegiate teams for men include 
football, soccer, basketball, wrestling, 
tennis, golf, swimming, track and field, 
and cross country. Intercollegiate 
teams for women include basketball, 
tennis, field hockey, swimming, track 
and field, and cross country. 



In addition, students who like hik- 
ing, backpacking, skiing, camping, 
fishing, hunting, kayaking, spelunk- 
ing, and other outdoor sports will find 
Lycoming's location ideal. 

Lycoming is situated on a slight 
prominence near downtown Williams- 
port, a small city nestled along the 
West Branch of the Susquehanna River 
in northcentral Pennsylvania's rolling 
hills and valleys. Yet, the College is on- 
ly a three or four hour drive away from 
metropolitan centers such as New York 
City, Philadelphia, Pittsburgh, Wash- 
ington, D.C., Baltimore, Syracuse, 
Rochester, and the New Jersey shore 
points. The Williamsport-metro area is 
home to about 75,000 persons. 



Lycoming enjoys a relationship with 
The United Methodist Church. It sup- 
ports the Methodist tradition of pro- 
viding an education for persons of all 
faiths. 

Fully accredited, Lycoming is a 
member of the Middle States Associa- 
tion of Colleges and Schools, and the 
University Senate of The United Meth- 
odist Church. It is a member of the 
Association of American Colleges, the 
Pennsylvania Association of Colleges 
and Universities, the Commission for 
Independent Colleges and Universi- 
ties, the National Commission on Ac- 
crediting, and the National Associa- 
tion of Schools and Colleges of The 
United Methodist Church. 



HISTORY 

Lycoming College was founded in 1812 
as the Williamsport Academy, an ele- 
mentary and secondary school. Thirty- 
six years later, the academy became the 
Williamsport Dickinson Seminary un- 
der the patronage of The Methodist 
Episcopal Church. The seminary oper- 
ated as a private boarding school until 
1929, when a college curriculum was 
added and it became the Williamsport 
Dickinson Seminary and Junior Col- 
lege. In 1947, the junior college became 
a four-year degree-granting college of 
liberal arts and sciences. It adopted the 
name Lycoming, derived from the In- 
dian word "lacomic," meaning "Great 
Stream." The word Lycoming has been 
common to northcentral Pennsylvania 
since colonial days. 




Academic Program 



THE BACHELOR OF ARTS 
DEGREE 

Lycoming is committed to the princi- 
ple that a liberal arts education is the 
best hope for an enlightened citizenry. 
Consequently, the bachelor of arts de- 
gree is conferred upon the student who 
has completed an educational program 
incorporating the two principles of the 
liberal arts known as distribution and 
concentration. The objective of the dis- 
tribution principle is to insure that the 
student achieves breadth in learning 
through the study of the major dimen- 
sions of human inquiry: the humani- 
ties, the social sciences, and the natu- 
ral sciences. The objective of the con- 
centration principle is to provide depth 
of learning through completion of a 
program of study in a given discipline 
or subject area known as the major. 



REQUIREMENTS FOR THE 
BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE 

Every degree candidate is expected to 
complete the following requirements 
in order to qualify for graduation: 

— complete the 'distribution pro- 
gram. 

— complete a major consisting of at 
least eight courses while achiev- 
ing a minimum grade point aver- 
age of 2.0 in those courses. 

— earn one year of credit in physi- 
cal education. All students must 
demonstrate competence in swim- 
ming. (Medical exemptions may 
be granted by the College physi- 
cian after an examination and re- 
view of the student's medical his- 
tory and family physician's re- 
port.) 

— pass a minimum of 128 semester 
hours (32 unit courses) with a 
minimum cumulative average of 
2.0. Additional credits beyond 
128 semester hours may be com- 
pleted provided the minimum 2.0 
cumulative average is maintained. 

— complete in residence the final 
eight courses offered for the de- 



gree at Lycoming. 

— satisfy all financial obligations 
incurred at the College. 

— complete the above requirements 
within seven years of continuous 
enrollment following the date of 
matriculation. 

All exemptions or waivers of specif- 
ic requirements are made by the Com- 
mittee on Academic Standing. 



THE BACHELOR OF FINE ARTS 
DEGREE 

The bachelor of fine arts degree is spe- 
cifically designed to train professional 
artists. The BFA in sculpture is a syn- 
thesis of three diverse forms of educa- 
tion: a studio art program that em- 
phasizes the skills and concepts of the 
visual language; an apprenticeship that 
takes technical expertise as the depar- 
ture point, and the scholastic method 
employed in both art history and the 
general-education component. 



REQUIREMENTS FOR THE 
BACHELOR OF FINE ARTS 
DEGREE 

Every BFA degree candidate is expect- 
ed to complete the following require- 
ments in order to qualify for gradua- 
tion: 

— complete the 12-course Art De- 
partment course of study. 

— complete the distribution pro- 
gram. 

— complete a total of 32 course 
units achieving a minimum grade 
point average of 2.0 in those 
courses taken within the College. 

— complete one of the field speciali- 
zation apprenticeships at the 
Johnson Atelier Technical Insti- 
tute of Sculpture. 

— earn one year of credit in physi- 
cal education. All students must 
demonstrate competence in swim- 
ming. (Medical exemptions may 
be granted by the College physi- 



cian after an examination and re- 
view of the student's medical his- 
tory and family physician's re- 
port.) 

— complete in residence the final 
eight courses offered for the de- 
gree at Lycoming. 

— satisfy all financial obligations 
incurred at the College. 

— have a public exhibition of origi- 
nal art work and make an oral 
defense. 



THE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN 
NURSING DEGREE 

The program of study leading to the 
bachelor of science in nursing degree is 
designed to prepare men and women 
as beginning practitioners of profes- 
sional nursing, qualified for first-level 
positions in a variety of health settings 
or for graduate study in nursing. Upon 
satisfactory completion of the pro- 
gram, a graduate is eligible to write the 
State Board of Nursing examination 
for licensure as a registered nurse. The 
goal of the program is to develop a lib- 
erally educated and self-directed indi- 
vidual who is prepared to contribute to 
the welfare of the nation through the 
practice of professional nursing which 
supports the promotion and restora- 
tion of health of individuals and fami- 
lies in a variety of settings. 



REQUIREMENTS FOR THE 
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN 
NURSING DEGREE 

Every BSN degree candidate is expect- 
ed to complete the following require- 
ments in order to qualify for gradua- 
tion: 

— complete the 13 course major with 
a minimum cumulative average of 
2.0, including the required May 
term following the junior year. 

— complete the distribution require- 
ment as modified for the BSN 
degree. 



— complete a minimum of 128 se- 
mester hours (32 units) with a 
minimum cumulative average of 
2.0. 

— earn one year of credit in physical 
education. All students must de- 
monstrate competence in swim- 
ming. (Medical exemption may be 
granted by the College physician 
after an examination and review 
of the student's medical history 
and family physician's report.) 

— complete in residence the final 
eight courses offered for the de- 
gree at Lycoming. 

— satisfy all financial obligations 
incurred at the College. 

— complete the degree requirements 
within a five-year period after 
admission to the nursing major. 
Candidates who are unable to 
meet this requirement must peti- 
tion for an extension. 



THE DISTRIBUTION PROGRAM 

A course can be used to satisfy only 
one distribution requirement. Courses 
for which a grade of "S" is recorded 
may not be used toward the fulfillment 
of the distribution requirements. (Re- 
fer to page 10 for an explanation of the 
grading system.) A course in any of 
the following distribution require- 
ments refers to a full-unit (four semes- 
ter hours) course taken at Lycoming, 
any appropriate combination of frac- 
tional unit courses taken at Lycoming 
which accumulate to four semester 
hours, or any single course of three or 
more semester hours transferred from 
another institution. For the BSN de- 
gree, see special modified distribution 
requirements as listed below. 

English — All students are required 
to pass English 6 and one other Eng- 
lish course, excluding English 3 and 5. 
English 6 should be taken during the 
freshman year and must be taken no 
later than the second semester (usually 
the spring semester) of the sophomore 
year. In addition, all students who 



have not been exempted from English 
5 must receive a mark of "Satisfacto- 
ry" in English 5 before being permitted 
to enroll in English 6. Students are 
placed in English 5 or 6 on the basis of 
their performance on the Achievement 
Examination in English Composition. 
English 3 may not be used to satisfy 
the distribution requirement in Eng- 
lish. 

Foreign Language or Mathematics — 

Students are required to meet a mini- 
mum basic requirement in either a for- 
eign language or the mathematical sci- 
ences. 

Foreign Language. Students may 
choose from among French, German, 
Greek, Hebrew, or Spanish and are re- 
quired to pass two courses on the inter- 
mediate or higher course level. Place- 
ment at the appropriate course level 
will be determined by the faculty of 
the Department of Foreign Languages 
and Literatures. Students who have 
completed two or more years of a giv- 
en language in high school are not ad- 
mitted for credit to the elementary 
course in the same foreign language 
except by written permission of the 
chairman of the department. French 
28 and Spanish 32 will meet part of this 
requirement only if the section taught 
in the language is completed. 

Mathematics. Students are required 
to demonstrate competence in basic al- 
gebra and to pass three units of mathe- 
matical science other than Mathemat- 
ics 5. Competence in basic algebra 
may be demonstrated either by passing 
the basic algebra section of the Mathe- 
matics Placement Examination or by 
passing Mathematics 5. By demon- 
strating higher competence on the 
Mathematics Placement Examination, 
students may reduce the requirement 
to two units of mathematical science. 
No more than one unit may be taken 
in computer science. 

Religion or Philosophy — Students 
are required to pass two courses in 
either religion or philosophy. Any two 
religion courses may be used to fulfill 
the philosophy/religion distribution 



requirement, with this exception: only 
one course from the combination Re- 
ligion 20-21 may be selected for distri- 
bution. 

Fine Arts — Students are required to 
pass two courses as indicated in art, 
literature, music, or theatre. 

Art. Any two courses. 

Literature. Any two literature cours- 
es selected from the offerings of the 
Departments of English and Foreign 
Languages and Literatures (French, 
German, or Spanish). 

Music. Any of the following combi- 
nations of music offerings totaling the 
equivalent of eight semester hours: 

— two courses from those numbered 
Music 10 through Music 46. 

— eight semesters of applied music 
(private lessons) and/or ensemble 
(choir, band) from courses num- 
bered 60 through 69, earned frac- 
tionally as follows: 

— (1) for private lessons (Music 60 
through 66), a one-half hour les- 
son per week earns one-half hour 
of credit; a one-hour lesson earns 
one hour of credit. Note: There 
are extra fees for these lessons. 
(For details see Department of 
Music course offerings described 
elsewhere in this catalog.) 

— (2) credit may be earned for par- 
ticipation in the College choir 
(Music 68) and/or band (Music 
69); however, a student may earn 
no more than one hour each se- 
mester even though participating 
in both band and choir. (For fur- 
ther details, please see the De- 
partment of Music offerings else- 
where in this catalog.) 

Theatre. The fine arts distribution 
requirement may be satisfied by select- 
ing any two of the following recom- 
mended courses: Theatre 10, 11, 14, 18, 
32, 33, or other courses with the con- 
sent of the instructor. 

Natural Science — Students are re- 
quired to pass any two courses in one 



of the following disciplines: astrono- 
my and physics, biology, or chemistry. 

History and Social Science — Stu- 
dents are required to pass two courses 
as indicated in economics, history, po- 
litical science, psychology, or sociology 
/anthropology. 

Economics. Any two courses. 

History. Any two courses, except 
History 31. 

Political Science. Any two courses. 

Psychology. Psychology 10 and one 
other course. 

Sociology/ A nthropology. Sociology 
/Anthropology 10 plus another course. 



THE DISTRIBUTION PROGRAM 
FOR THE BSN DEGREE 

English — standard requirement as 

shown above 
Mathematical Sciences — compe- 
tence in basic algebra as demon- 
strated by completion of, or ex- 
emption from, Math 5, Mathe- 
matics 13, and Computer Science 
15 
Religion and Philosophy — Relig- 
ion 20 and Philosophy 19 
Fine Arts/Foreign Language — 
two courses from one department 
as follows: 

Art — any two (2) courses 
Literature — any two literature 
courses selected from the de- 
partments of English and For- 
eign Languages and Literatures 
Music — any two (2) courses (8 
credits) including Applied Mu- 
sic, if enough credits are ac- 
cumulated 
Theatre — any two (2) courses 
from among Theatre 10, 11, 14, 
18, 32, 33, or other courses with 
the consent of the instructor. 
Language — any two (2) courses 
at the intermediate or higher 
level. No student who has had 
two or more years of a given 
foreign language in high school 
shall be admitted to the elemen- 
tary courses in that same lan- 
guage for credit, except by writ- 



ten permission of the chairman 
of the department. 
Natural Science — Chemistry 8, 15 
Social Science — Psychology 10 and 
17; Sociology and Anthropology 
— one from among Soc 10, 14, 
20, 28, and 29. 
Physical Education — standard re- 
quirement as shown on page 6. 



THE MAJOR 

Students are required to complete a 
series of courses in one departmental 
or interdisciplinary (established or in- 
dividual) major. Specific course re- 
quirements for each major offered by 
the College are listed in the curriculum 
section of this catalog. Students must 
earn a 2.0 or higher grade-point aver- 
age in those courses stipulated as com- 
prising the major. (This requirement is 
not met by averaging the grades for all 
courses completed in the major depart- 
ment.) Students must declare a major 
by the beginning of their junior year. 
Departmental and established interdis- 
ciplinary majors are declared in the 
Office of the Registrar, whereas indi- 
vidual interdisciplinary majors must 
be approved by the Committee on 
Curriculum Development. Students 
may complete more than one major, 
each of which will be recorded on the 
transcript. Students may be removed 
from major status if they are not mak- 
ing satisfactory progress in the major. 
This action is taken by the Dean of the 
College upon the recommendation of 
the department, coordinating commit- 
tee (for established interdisciplinary 
majors), or Curriculum Development 
Committee (for individual interdisci- 
plinary majors). The decision of the 
Dean of the College may be appealed 
to the Academic Standing Committee 
by the student involved or the recom- 
mending department or committee. 

Departmental Majors — Departmen- 
tal majors are available in the follow- 
ing areas: 



Accounting 


German, 


Art 


Spanish 


Astronomy 


History 


Biology 


Mathematics 


Business 


Music 


Administration 


Nursing 


Chemistry 


Philosophy 


Computer Science 


Physics 


Economics 


Political Science 


English 


Psychology 


Foreign 


Religion 


Languages and 


Sociology/ 


Literatures 


Anthropology 


French, 


Theatre 



Established Interdisciplinary Ma- 
jors — The following established inter- 
disciplinary majors include course 
work in two or more departments: 



Accounting- 
Mathematical 
Sciences 

American 
Studies 

Criminal 
Justice 



International 

Studies 
Literature 
Mass 

Communication 
Near East Culture 

and Archaeology 



Individual Interdisciplinary Majors 

— Students may design a major which 
is unique to their needs and objectives 
and which combines course work in 
more than one department. This ma- 
jor is developed in consultation with 
the student's faculty adviser and with a 
panel of faculty members from each 
of the sponsoring departments. The 
application is acted upon by the Cur- 
riculum Development Committee. The 
major normally consists of 10 courses 
beyond those taken to satisfy the dis- 
tribution requirements. Students are 
expected to complete at least six 
courses at the junior or senior level. 
Examples of individual interdisciplin- 
ary majors are Racial and Cultural 
Minorities, Illustration in the Print 
Medium, Environmental Law, Adver- 
tising, Art/History, Art/Business, Hu- 
man Behavior, and Images of Man. 

Major in Sculpture Leading to Bache- 
lor of Fine Arts Degree — Through a 
cooperative program with the Johnson 
Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture, 
Princeton, New Jersey, students may 



earn a BFA degree in sculpture. The 
major consists of a core academic pro- 
gram, a course of study in art, elective 
courses, and an apprenticeship at the 
Johnson Atelier. 



THE MINOR 

The College awards a minor in recog- 
nition of concentrated work in an area 
other than a student's major. The re- 
quirements for a minor vary from de- 
partment to department and students 
interested in pursuing a minor in a de- 
partment should consult that depart- 
ment for its policy regarding minors. 
The minor must be approved and 
named appropriately by a major-grant- 
ing department subject to the follow- 
ing limitations: 

— a minor must consist of a mini- 
mum of four unit courses select- 
ed from among the courses that 
are offered by one department. 

— a major department may count 
no more than two elementary 
courses as part of a minor. 

— if a major department counts an 
elementary course as part of the 
minor, then the minor must con- 
sist of at least five courses; if the 
major department counts two el- 
ementary courses as part of the 
minor, then the minor must con- 
sist of at least six courses. 

— no course which is counted as 
part of a student's major may be 
counted as part of a minor. 

— only one of the four courses may 
be numbered 50 or above. 

— no student with two majors may 
receive a minor. 

— no student may receive two mi- 
nors. 

— courses offered only in May or 
summer terms may not be re- 
quired for the minor, but they 
may be used if other course op- 
tions are available. 

— a student's minor must be in an 
area different from his major 
and a student may not receive a 
minor from his major depart- 
ment unless his major department 



is foreign languages or mathe- 
matical sciences. 
— a student may not receive a mi- 
nor unless his average in the 
courses which a department 
counts for his minor is a mini- 
mum of 2.0. 

Students must declare their intention 
to minor in a department by signing a 
form available from the department's 
chairman. The name of the minor a 
student completes will be noted on the 
student's transcript. 

Departmental Minors — Depart- 
mental minors are available in the fol- 
lowing areas: 

Accounting History 

Financial American 

Accounting History 

Managerial European 

Accounting History 

Federal Income History 
Tax Mass 

Art Communication 

Art History Mathematical 

Sculpture Sciences 

Painting Computer 

Photography Science 

Biology Mathematics 

Chemistry Philosophy 

Economics Political Science 

English Political Science 

English Foreign Affairs 

Literature Legal Studies 

Writing Psychology 

Foreign Religion 

Languages and Sociology/ 
Literatures Anthropology 

Biblical Sociological & 

Languages Anthropo- 

French logical Views 

German of Religion 

Spanish Theatre 

Theatre History 

& Literature 
Performance 
Technical 
Theatre 

ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 

One advantage of a small college is the 
rich experience gained by the close as- 
sociation of students and faculty. The 



advisement program at Lycoming ena- 
bles students to discuss academic and 
other problems as well as opportunities 
with faculty advisers, instructors, and 
the staffs of the Dean of the College 
and the Dean of Student Services. 

During the summer orientation, 
freshmen are assigned a faculty adviser 
who is prepared to assist new students 
with the challenges of an unfamiliar 
social and academic environment. All 
students are required to have a faculty 
adviser. When students have declared a 
major, they are then assigned an ad- 
viser from within the major depart- 
ment or program. 

Although the advisement program is 
an important part of the Lycoming 
academic experience, students are ex- 
pected to accept full responsibility for 
their academic programs, including 
satisfactory completion of program 
and College-wide requirements. 

Special advising for selected profes- 
sions is provided by the health, legal, 
and theological professions advisory 
committees. Students interested in 
these professions should register with 
the appropriate committee during their 
first semester of enrollment at Lycom- 
ing or immediately after they decide to 
enter these professions. 

Preparation for Health Professions 

— The program of pre-professional ed- 
ucation for the health professions 
(allopathic, dental, osteopathic, podi- 
atric and veterinary medicine, optome- 
try, and pharmacy) is organized around 
a sound foundation in biology, chemis- 
try, mathematics, and physics and a 
wide range of subject matter from the 
humanities, social sciences, and fine 
arts. At least three years of undergrad- 
uate study is recommended before en- 
try into a professional school; the nor- 
mal procedure is to complete the bach- 
elor of arts degree. 

Students interested in one of the 
health professions or in an allied 
health career should make their inten- 
tions known to the admissions office 
when applying and to the Health Pro- 
fessions Advisory Committee (HPAC) 
during their first semester. The com- 
mittee advises students concerning 



preparation for and application to 
health-professions schools. All pre- 
health professions students are invited to 
join the student Pre-Health Professions 
Association. (See also descriptions of 
the nursing program and of the coop- 
erative programs in podiatric medicine, 
optometry, and medical technology.) 

Preparation for Legal Professions 

— Lycoming offers a strong academic 
preparation for students interested in 
law as a profession. Admission to law 
school is not predicated upon a partic- 
ular major or area of study; rather, a 
student is encouraged to design a course 
of study (traditional or interdisciplin- 
ary major) which is of personal interest 
and significance. While no specific 
major is recommended, there are cer- 
tain skills of particular relevance to the 
pre-law student: clear writing, analyti- 
cal thinking, and language comprehen- 
sion. These skills should be developed 
during the undergraduate years. 

Pre-law students should register 
with the Legal Professions Advisory 
Committee (LPAC) upon entering Ly- 
coming and should join the Pre-Law 
Society on campus. LPAC assists the 
pre-law student through advisement, 
compilation of recommendations, and 
dissemination of information and ma- 
terials about law and the legal profes- 
sion. It sponsors Pre-LSAT workshops 
to help prepare students for the law 
boards. The Pre-Law Society has 
sponsored films, speakers, and field 
trips, including visits to law school 
campuses. 

Preparation for Theological Profes- 
sions — The Theological Professions 
Advisory Committee (TPAC) acts as a 
"center" for students, faculty, and 
clergy to discuss the needs of students 
who want to prepare themselves for 
the ministry, religious education, ad- 
vanced training in religion, or related 
vocations. Also, it may help coordinate 
internships for students who desire 
practical experience in the parish min- 
istry or related areas. Upon entering 
Lycoming, students should register 
with TPAC if they plan to investigate 
the religious vocations. 



In general, students preparing to at- 
tend a theological seminary should ex- 
amine the suggestions set down by the 
Association of Theological Schools 
(available from TPAC). Recommend- 
ed is a broad program in the liberal 
arts, a major in one of the humanities 
(English, history, languages, literature, 
philosophy, religion) or one of the so- 
cial sciences (American studies, crimi- 
nal justice, economics, international 
studies, political science, psychology, 
sociology-anthropology), and a variety 
of electives. Students preparing for a 
career in religious education should 
major in religion and elect five or six 
courses in psychology, education, and 
sociology. This program of study will 
qualify students to work as an educa- 
tional assistant or a director of relig- 
ious education after graduate study in 
a theological seminary. 

REGISTRATION 

During the registration period, students 
file a schedule form with the Office of 
the Registrar. The filing of this form by 
students and its acceptance by the Col- 
lege is evidence of a commitment by 
students to perform in the courses list- 
ed to the best of their abilities. Any 
changes in the schedule of courses list- 
ed on the form, including changes in 
sections, without the formal approval 
of the Office of the Registrar will re- 
sult in a grade of F. Students may not 
receive credit in courses in which they 
are not registered. Registration proce- 
dures may not be initiated after the 
close of the registration period. 

During the first five days of classes, 
students may drop any course without 
any record of such enrollment appear- 
ing on the permanent record, and they 
may add any course that is not closed. 
Students wishing to drop a course be- 
tween the fifth day and the 12th week 
of classes must secure a withdrawal 
form from the Office of the Registrar, 
which is presented to the instructor of 
the course in question, who assigns a 
withdrawal grade based on the level of 
the student's performance from the be- 
ginning of the course to the date of 



withdrawal. Withdrawal grades are 
not computed in the grade point aver- 
age. Students may not withdraw from 
courses after the 12th week of a semes- 
ter and the comparable period during 
the May and summer terms. 

In two-credit (V2 unit) courses meet- 
ing only during the last half of any se- 
mester, students may drop/add for a 
period of five days, effective with the 
mid-term date shown on the academic 
calendar. Withdrawal from half-semes- 
ter courses with a withdrawal grade 
may occur within six weeks of the be- 
ginning of the course. It is understood 
that the period of time at the begin- 
ning of the semester and at the mid- 
point of the semester will be identical; 
for example, a period of five days as 
indicated above. 

THE UNIT COURSE SYSTEM 

Instruction at Lycoming College is or- 
ganized, with few exceptions, on a de- 
partmental basis. Most courses are unit 
courses, meaning that each course tak- 
en is considered to be equivalent to 
four semester hours of credit. Excep- 
tions occur in applied music courses, 
which are offered for either one-half 
or one semester hour of credit, and in 
departments that have elected to offer 
certain courses for the equivalent of 
two semester hours of credit. Further, 
independent studies and internships 
carrying two semester hours of credit 
may be designed. The normal student 
course load is four courses during the 
fall and spring semesters. Students 
who elect to attend the special sessions 
may enroll in one course during the 
May term and one or two courses in 
the summer term. A student is consid- 
ered full time when enrolled for a min- 
imum of three courses during the fall 
or spring semesters, one course for the 
May term, and two courses for the 
summer term. Students may enroll in 
five courses during the fall and spring 
semesters if they are Lycoming Schol- 
ars or were admitted to the Dean's List 
at the end of the previous semester. Ex- 
ceptions may be granted by the Dean 
of the College. Overloads are not per- 



mitted during the May and summer 
terms. 



THE SYSTEM OF GRADING AND 
REPORTING OF GRADES 

The evaluation of student perform- 
ance in credit courses is indicated by 
the use of traditional letter symbols. 
These symbols and their definitions 
are as follows: 

A Excellent — Signifies superior 
achievement through mastery of con- 
tent or skills and demonstration of cre- 
ative and independent thinking. 
B High Pass — Signifies better-than- 
average achievement wherein the stu- 
dent reveals insight and understanding. 
C Pass — Signifies satisfactory achieve- 
ment wherein the student's work has 
been of average quality and quantity. 
The student has demonstrated basic 
competence in the subject area and 
may enroll in additional course work. 
D Low Pass — Signifies unsatisfactory 
achievement wherein the student met 
only the minimum requirements for 
passing the course and should not con- 
tinue in the subject area without de- 
partmental advice. 

F Failing — Signifies that the student 
has not met the minimum require- 
ments for passing the course. 
I Incomplete Work — Assigned in ac- 
cordance with the restrictions of estab- 
lished academic policy. 
R A Repeated Course — Students 
shall have the option of repeating 
courses for which they already have re- 
ceived a passing grade in addition to 
those which they have failed. No credit 
is received for the second attempt. 
Grades will be averaged. 
S Passing Work, no grade assigned — 
Converted from traditional grade of D 
or better. 

U Failing work, no grade assigned — 
converted from traditional grade of F. 
X Audit — Work as an auditor for 
which no credit is earned. 
W Withdrawal — Signifies withdrawal 
from the course early in the term when 
it cannot be determined that the stu- 
dent is passing or failing. 



WP Withdrawal, passing — The stu- 
dent was passing at the time of with- 
drawal; no credit is earned. 
WF Withdrawal, failing — The student 
was failing at the time of withdrawal; 
no credit is earned. 

Use of the satisfactory/unsatisfacto- 
ry grading option is limited as follows 
(this does not apply to Education 5 
and English 5): 

— students may enroll on an S / U 
basis in no more than one course 
per semester and no more than 
four courses during the under- 
graduate career. 

— S / U courses completed after de- 
claration of the major may not 
be used to satisfy a requirement 
of that major, including courses 
required by the major department 
which are offered by other de- 
partments. (Instructor-designated 
courses are excepted from this 
limitation.) 

— courses for which a grade of S is 
recorded may not be used toward 
fulfillment of any distribution re- 
quirement. 

— students may not enroll in Eng- 
lish 6 on an S / U basis. 

— a course selected on an S / U ba- 
sis which is subsequently with- 
drawn will not count toward the 
four-course limit. 

— instructor-designated courses may 
be offered during the May term 
with the approval of the Dean of 
the College. Such courses are not 
counted toward the four-course 
limit. 

— S / U grades are not computed in 
the grade point average. 

— students electing the S / U option 
may designate a minimum accep- 
tance letter grade of A or B. If 
the letter grade actually earned 
by the student equals or exceeds 
this minimum, that letter grade is 
entered on the student's perma- 
nent record and is computed in 
the grade point average. In such 
a case, the course does not count 
toward the four-course limit. If 



the student does not indicate a 
minimum acceptable letter grade 
or if the letter grade actually 
earned is lower than the mini- 
mum designated by the student, 
the Registrar substitutes an S for 
any passing grade (A, B, C, or D) 
and a U for an F grade. 

— students must declare the S / U 
option before the end of the peri- 
od during which courses may be 
added during any given semester, 
half-semester, or term. 

— instructors are not notified which 
of their students are enrolled on 
an S / U basis. 

— students electing the S / U option 
are expected to perform the same 
work as those enrolled on a regu- 
lar basis. 

Incomplete grades may be given if, 
for absolutely unavoidable reasons 
(usually medical in nature), the student 
has not been able to complete the work 
requisite to the course. An incomplete 
grade must be removed within six 
weeks of the next regular semester. 

Students shall have the option of re- 
peating courses for which they already 
have received a passing grade in addi- 
tion to those which they have failed. 
Recording of grades for all repeated 
courses shall be governed by the fol- 
lowing conditions: 

— a course may be repeated only 
one time. 

— both attempts will be recorded on 
the student's transcript. 

— credit for the course will be given 
only once. 

— for the purpose of determining 
the student's G.P.A., the average 
grade received for the two at- 
tempts will be used as if it were 
the grade for a single course. 

— a repeated course will be counted 
toward the total number of un- 
successful attempts. 



ATTENDANCE 

The academic program at Lycoming is 
based upon the assumption that there 



10 



is value in class attendance for all stu- 
dents. Individual instructors have the 
prerogative of establishing reasonable 
absence regulations in any course. The 
student is responsible for learning and 
observing these regulations. 



STUDENT RECORDS 

The policy regarding student educa- 
tional records is designed to protect the 
privacy of students against unwarrant- 
ed intrusions and is consistent with 
Section 438 of the General Education 
Provision Act (commonly known as 
the Family Educational Rights and 
Privacy Act of 1974, as amended). The 
details of the College policy on student 
records and the procedures for gaining 
access to student records are contained 
in the current issue of The Pathfinder, 
which is available in the library and 
the Office of the Dean of the College. 



ACADEMIC STANDING AND 
ACADEMIC HONESTY 

Students will be placed on academic 
probation if either the number of 
hours completed or cumulative grade 
point average falls below the following 
standards: 



Semester 


Hours 


Cumulative 


(Full-time) 


Completed 


GPA 


1 


12 


1.66 


2 


24 


1.85 


3 


40 


1.90 


4 


56 


2.00 


5 


72 


2.00 


6 


88 


2.00 


7 


104 


2.00 


8 


120 


2.00 



In order to meet graduation require- 
ments, students must complete 128 cre- 
dit hours. Students who are enrolled 
part-time or for fewer than the normal 
four courses per term will be expected 
to complete an equivalent proportion 
of their program each semester. 



Students will be subject to suspension 
from the College if they: 

— are on probation for two consec- 
utive semesters; 

— achieve a grade point average of 
1.00 or below during any one se- 
mester. 

Students will be subject to dismissal 
from the College if they: 

— can not reasonably complete all 
requirements for a degree; 

— exceed 24 semester hours of un- 
successful course attempts (grades 
of F, U, W, WP, WF, and R) ex- 
cept in the case of withdrawal for 
medical or psychological reasons. 

The integrity of the academic pro- 
cess of the College requires honesty in 
all phases of the instructional pro- 
gram. The College assumes that stu- 
dents are committed to the principle of 
academic honesty. Students who fail to 
honor this commitment are subject to 
dismissal. Procedural guidelines and 
rules for the adjudication of cases of 
academic dishonesty are printed in 
The Faculty Handbook and The Path- 
finder (the student academic hand- 
book), copies of which are available in 
the library. 



CREDIT BY EXAMINATION 

Advanced Placement — Entering 
freshmen who have completed an ad- 
vanced course while in secondary 
school and who have taken the appro- 
priate advanced-placement examina- 
tion of the College Entrance Examina- 
tion Board (CEEB) are encouraged to 
apply for credit and advanced place- 
ment at the time of admission. A grade 
of three or above is considered satis- 
factory. 

College Level Examination Pro- 
gram (CLEP) — Students may earn 
college credit for superior achievement 
through CLEP. By achieving at the 
75th percentile or above on the Gener- 
al Examinations and the 65th percen- 



tile or above on approved Subject Ex- 
aminations, students may earn up to 
50 percent of the course requirements 
for a bachelor of arts degree. Although 
these examinations may be taken after 
enrollment, new students who are com- 
petent in a given area are encouraged 
to take the examinations of their choice 
during the second semester of their 
senior year so that Lycoming will have 
the test scores available for registra- 
tion advisement for the first semester 
of enrollment. Further information 
about CLEP may be obtained through 
the secondary-school guidance office 
or the Office of Admissions at Lycom- 
ing College. 



ACADEMIC HONORS 

Dean's List — Students are admitted 
to the Dean's List at the end of the fall 
and spring semesters if they have com- 
pleted at least four unit courses with 
other than S / U or R grades, and have 
a minimum grade point average of 
3.50 for the semester. 

Graduation Honors — Students are 
awarded the bachelor of arts degree, 
the bachelor of fine arts degree, or the 
bachelor of science in nursing degree 
with honors when they have earned 
the following grade point averages 
based on all courses attempted at Ly- 
coming, with a minimum of 64 credits 
(16 units) required for a student to be 
eligible for honors: 

summa cum laude 3.90-4.00 

magna cum laude 3.50-3.89 

cum laude 3.25-3.49 

Academic Honor Awards, Prizes, 
and Societies — Superior academic 
achievement is recognized through the 
conferring of awards and prizes at the 
annual Honors Day convocation and 
Commencement and through election 
to membership in honor societies. 

Societies 

Blue Key Freshmen Men 

Gold Key Freshmen Women 



11 



Beta Beta Beta Biology 

Omicron Delta Epsilon . Economics 

Phi Alpha Theta History 

Phi Sigma Tau Philosophy 

Sigma Pi Sigma Physics 

Pi Sigma Alpha. . .Political Science 

Psi Chi Psychology 

Pi Gamma Mu Social Science 

Phi Kappa Phi . . General Academic 



Prizes and Awards 

American Chemical Society Award — 
The award, sponsored by the Susque- 
hanna Valley Chapter of the society, is 
given to the outstanding senior in 
chemistry who plans to enter the pro- 
fession. 

American Institute of Chemists Prize 
— The prize, given by the Philadelphia 
section of the institute, goes to the sen- 
ior major for excellence in chemistry. 

Byron C. Brunstetter Science Award 
— The award is given for outstanding 
achievement in chemical and biologi- 
cal sciences. 

CRC Press Chemistry Achievement 
Award — The award is given to the 
freshman who has exhibited outstand- 
ing academic achievement in chemistry. 

Chieftain Award — Given by Lycom- 
ing, the College's most prestigious 
award is given to the senior who has 
contributed most to Lycoming through 
support of school activities; who has 
exhibited outstanding leadership qual- 
ities; who has worked effectively with 
other members of the College commu- 
nity; who has evidenced a good moral 
code; and whose academic rank is 
above the median for the preceding 
senior class. 

Civic Choir Award — The award, 
sponsored by the College choir, is giv- 
en to the choir member who has out- 
standing musical ability and who has 
made significant leadership contribu- 
tions to the choir. 



Class of 1907 Prize — The prize is given 
to the senior who has been outstanding 
in the promotion of College spirit 
through participation in athletics and 
other activities. 

Benjamin C Conner Prize — The prize 
is given to the graduating student who 
has done outstanding work in mathe- 
matics. 

Durkheim Award — The award is giv- 
en to the senior sociology/anthropolo- 
gy major who has done outstanding 
work in the field. 

Bishop William Perry Eveland Prize 

— Sponsored by the College, the prize 
is given to the senior who has shown 
progress in scholarship, loyalty, school 
spirit, and participation in school ac- 
tivities. 

Excellence in Two-Dimensional Art 
Award — Sponsored by the Art De- 
partment, the award is given to the 
outstanding senior art major in this 
field. 

Excellence in Three-Dimensional Art 
Award — Sponsored by the Art De- 
partment, the award is given to the 
outstanding senior art major in this 
field. 

Excellence in Theatre Performance 
Award — Sponsored by the Theatre 
Department, the award is given to the 
student who has been outstanding as a 
performer in the Arena Theatre. 

Excellence in Technical Theatre Award 

— Sponsored by the Theatre Depart- 
ment, the award is given to the student 
who has been outstanding as a techni- 
cian for the Arena Theatre. 

Excellence in Political Science Award 

— Given by the Political Science De- 
partment, the award goes to the senior 
political science major who has per- 
formed with excellence. 

J. W. Ferree Award — Given by the 
Mathematical Sciences Department in 



memory of the first mathematics pro- 
fessor at Lycoming's forerunner, the 
Dickinson Seminary, the award goes to 
the student most active in mathemati- 
cal sciences. 

Faculty Prize — Sponsored by Lycom- 
ing, the prize is given to the com- 
muting student with satisfactory schol- 
arship and who has been outstanding 
in promotion of school spirit through 
participation in school activities. 

Durant L. Furey III Memorial Prize — 
The prize is given to the senior account- 
ing major who has shown outstanding 
achievement in accounting. 

Gillette Foreign Language Prizes — 
The prizes are given to the French, 
German, and Spanish majors who 
have achieved excellence in foreign 
languages. 

John P. Graham Award — Named in 
honor of a professor emeritus, the 
award is given to the senior English 
major who achieves the highest aver- 
age in English. 

Edward J. Gray Prizes — Sponsored 
by Lycoming, the prizes are given to 
the graduating students with the high- 
est and second highest averages. 

Dan Gustafson Award — In memory 
of a former member of the English 
Department, the award is given to the 
senior English major whose analytical 
writing demonstrates the highest stan- 
dards of literary and critical excellence. 

I RUSK A Awards — The awards de- 
note membership in the society for 
juniors who are very active on cam- 
pus; they are given by the Office of 
Student Services. 

Junior Book Award — Sponsored by 
the Political Science Department, the 
award is given to the outstanding jun- 
ior political science major. 

Elisha Benson Kline Prize — The prize 
is given to the senior mathematics ma- 



12 



jor with outstanding acheivement in 
the field. 

Charles J. Kocian Awards — The 
awards are given to the accounting, 
business administration, and econom- 
ics majors who show the greatest pro- 
ficiency in statistics; the mathematics 
major who shows the greatest profi- 
ciency in applied mathematics, and the 
graduating senior who shows the great- 
est proficiency in computer science. 

Don Lincoln Larrabee Law Prize — 
The prize is given to the graduating 
student who has shown outstanding 
scholarship in legal principles. 

C. Daniel Little Award — Sponsored 
by the Political Science Department, 
the prize is given to the outstanding 
student in public administration. 

John C. McCune Memorial Prizes — 
The prizes are given to the senior ma- 
jors in mathematics, biology, chemis- 
try, physics, philosophy, and psycholo- 
gy who have attained the highest aver- 
ages. 

Walter G. Mclver Award — Named af- 
ter Lycoming's former choir director, 
the award is given to the choir member 
who has made outstanding campus 
contributions outside of choir. 

Pennsylvania Institute of Certified 
Public Accountants Award — The 
award is given to the senior accounting 
major who has demonstrated high 
scholastic standing and qualities of 
leadership. 

Pocahontas Award — Sponsored by 
the Athletics Department, the award is 
given to Lycoming's outstanding fe- 
male athlete. 

Research and Writing Prize in History 
— Sponsored by the History Depart- 
ment, the prize is given to the student 
who does the best work in History 45. 

Sadler Prize — Sponsored by the 
Mathematical Sciences Department, 



the prize is given to the student with 
the highest achievement in calculus, 
foundations of mathematics, algebra, 
and analysis. 

Senior Management Award — Spon- 
sored by the Business Administration 
Department, the award is given to the 
senior business major with the best 
senior project in Business Administra- 
tion 41. 

Senior Scholarship Prize in History — 
The prize is given to the senior major 
with the highest average. 

Service to Lycoming Award — Spon- 
sored by the Office of Student Servic- 
es, the award is given to students who 
have made outstanding contributions 
to Lycoming. 

Frances K. Skeath Award — Spon- 
sored by the Mathematical Sciences 
Department, the award is given to the 
senior with outstanding achievement 
in mathematics. 

John A. Streeter Memorial Award in 
Economics — The award is given to 
the graduating student with outstand- 
ing achievement in economics. 

Tomahawk Award — Sponsored by 
the Athletics Department, the award is 
given to the outstanding male athlete. 

Trask Chemistry Prize — The prize is 
given to the senior chemistry major 
who has done outstanding work in the 
field. 

Wall Street Journal Award — Spon- 
sored by the Business Administration 
Department, the award is given to the 
senior business major for excellence in 
the field and service to the College 
community. 

Sol "Woody" Wolf Award — Spon- 
sored by the Athletics Department, the 
award is given to the junior athlete 
who has shown the most improvement. 

Women of Lycoming Scholarship — 



The scholarship is given to the junior 
woman student who has shown satis- 
factory scholarship, outstanding school 
spirit, and who is active in campus ac- 
tivities. 

Departmental Honors — Honors pro- 
jects are normally undertaken only in a 
student's major, and are available only 
to exceptionally well-qualified stu- 
dents who have a solid background in 
the area of the project and are capable 
of considerable self-direction. The 
prerequisites for registration in an 
honors program are as follows: 

— a faculty member from the de- 
partments) in which the honors 
project is to be undertaken must 
agree to be the director and must 
secure departmental approval of 
the project. 

— the director, in consultation with 
the student, must convene a com- 
mittee consisting of two faculty 
members from the department in 
which the project is to be under- 
taken, one of whom is the director 
of the project, and one faculty 
member from each of two other 
departments related to the sub- 
ject matter of the study. 

— the honors committee must then 
certify by their signatures on the 
application that the project in 
question is academically legiti- 
mate and worthy of pursuit as an 
honors project, and that the stu- 
dent in question is qualified to 
pursue the project. 

— the project must be approved by 
the Committee on Individual 
Studies. 

Students successfully complete hon- 
ors projects by satisfying the following 
conditions in accordance with guide- 
lines established by the Committee on 
Individual Studies: 

— the student must produce a sub- 
stantial research paper, critical 
study, or creative project. If the 
end product is a creative project, 
a critical paper analyzing the 



13 



techniques and principles em- 
ployed and the nature of the 
achievement represented in the 
project shall be submitted. 

— the student must successfully ex- 
plain and defend the work in a fi- 
nal oral examination given by the 
honors committee. 

— the honors committee must certi- 
fy that the student has successful- 
ly defended the project, and that 
the student's achievement is clear- 
ly superior to that which would 
ordinarily be required to earn a 
grade of "A" in a regular inde- 
pendent-studies course. 

— the Committee on Individual Stu- 
dies must certify that the student 
has satisfied all of the conditions 
mentioned above. 

Except in unusual circumstances, hon- 
ors projects are expected to involve in- 
dependent study in two consecutive 
unit courses. Successful completion of 
the honors project will cause the desig- 
nation of honors in that department to 
be placed upon the permanent record. 
Acceptable theses are deposited in the 
College library. In the event that the 
study is not completed successfully or 
is not deemed worthy of honors, the 
student shall be re-registered in inde- 
pendent studies and given a final grade 
for the course. 



SPECIAL FEATURES 

Independent Studies — Indepen- 
dent studies are available to any quali- 
fied student who wishes to engage in 
and receive academic credit for any ac- 
ademically legitimate course of study 
for which he or she could not other- 
wise receive credit. It may be pursued 
at any level (introductory, intermedi- 
ate, or advanced) and in any depart- 
ment, whether or not the student is a 
major in that department. Studies pro- 
jects which duplicate catalog courses 
are sometimes possible, and are sub- 
ject to the same provisions which ap- 
ply to all studies projects. In order for 
a student to be registered in an inde- 



pendent-study course, the following 
conditions must be satisfied: 

— an appropriate member of the 
faculty must agree to supervise 
the project and must certify by 
signing the application form that 
the project is academically legiti- 
mate and involves an amount of 
work appropriate for the amount 
of academic credit requested, 
and that the student in question 
is qualified to pursue the project. 

— the studies project must be ap- 
proved by the chairman of the 
department in which the studies 
project is to be undertaken. 

— after the project is approved by 
the instructor and by the chair- 
man of the appropriate depart- 
ment, the studies project must be 
approved by the Committee on 
Individual Studies. 

In addition, participation in indepen- 
dent-studies projects, with the excep- 
tion of those which duplicate catalog 
courses, is subject to the following: 

— students may not engage in more 
than one independent-studies 
project during any given semester. 

— students may not engage in more 
than two independent-studies 
projects during their academic 
careers at Lycoming College. 

As with other academic policies, 
any exceptions to these two rules must 
be approved by the Academic Stand- 
ing Committee. 

Internship Program — An internship 
is a course jointly sponsored by the 
College and a public or private agency 
or subdivision of the College in which 
a student is enabled to earn college cre- 
dit by participating in some active ca- 
pacity as an assistant, aide, or appren- 
tice. At least one-half of the effort ex- 
pended by the intern should consist of 
academic work related to agency situa- 
tions. The objectives of the internship 
program are (1) to further the develop- 
ment of a central core of values, aware- 
nesses, strategies, skills, and informa- 



tion through experiences outside the 
classroom or other campus situations, 
and (2) to facilitate the integration of 
theory and practice by encouraging 
students to relate their on-campus aca- 
demic experiences more directly to so- 
ciety in general and to possible career 
and other post-baccalaureate objec- 
tives in particular. 

Any junior or senior student in 
good academic standing may petition 
the Committee on Individual Studies 
for approval to serve as an intern. A 
maximum of 16 credits can be earned 
through the internship program. 
Guidelines for program development, 
assignment of tasks and academic re- 
quirements, such as exams, papers, re- 
ports, grades, etc., are established in 
consultation with a faculty director at 
Lycoming and an agency supervisor at 
the place of internship. 

Students with diverse majors have 
participated in a wide variety of intern- 
ships, including those with the Allen- 
wood Federal Prison Camp, Lycoming 
County Commissioners Office, Depart- 
ment of Environmental Resources, 
Head Start, Lycoming County Histori- 
cal Society, business and accounting 
firms, law offices, hospitals, social 
service agencies, banks, and Congres- 
sional offices. 

May Term — The May term is a four- 
week voluntary session designed to 
provide students with courses listed in 
the catalog and experimental and spe- 
cial courses that are not normally avail- 
able during the fall and spring semes- 
ters and summer term. Some courses 
are offered on campus; others involve 
travel. A number offer interdiscipli- 
nary credit. Illustrations of the types of 
courses offered during the May term are: 
(a) Study-Travel: Cultural tours of 
Germany, Spain, and France; Archae- 
ological expeditions to the Middle 
East; Anthropological expeditions to 
study tri-cultural communities in New 
Mexico; Utopian Communities; Revo- 
lutionary and Civil War Sites; Colonial 
America on Tour; Art on the East 
Coast; The New Kingdom in Ancient 
Egypt. 



14 



(b) On-Campus: Field Geology, 
Field Ornithology, Energy Economics, 
Writer's Seminar, Psychology of Group 
Processes, Collective Bargaining, 
Aquatic Biology, Medical Genetics, 
Energy Alternatives, White Collar 
Crime, Lasers and their Applications, 
Selected Short Story Writers and their 
Works, Popular Forms of Contempo- 
rary Fiction, Administrative and 
Organizational Behavior of Police, 
Plant and Greenhouse Management, 
and Street Law. 

Although participation in the May 
term is voluntary, student response has 
been outstanding with approximately 
20 percent of the student body enroll- 
ing. In addition to the courses them- 
selves, attractions include small and 
informal classes and reduced tuition 
rates. 

Study Abroad — Students have the 
opportunity to study abroad under 
auspices of approved universities and 
agencies. While study abroad is partic- 
ularly attractive to students majoring 
in foreign languages and literatures, 
this opportunity is open to all students 
in good academic standing. Mastery of 
a foreign language is desirable but not 
required in all programs. Dr. Richard 
Barker, assistant professor of foreign 
languages and literatures, serves as 
coordinator for the Study Abroad 
Program; interested students may con- 
tact him about opportunities available 
and procedural questions. 

NOTE: Lycoming College cannot assume re- 
sponsibility for the health, safety, or welfare of 
any student engaged in or en route to or from 
any off-campus study or activity not under the 
exclusive jurisdiction of this institution. 

Auditors — Any person may audit 
courses at Lycoming at one-fourth tui- 
tion per course. Laboratory and other 
special fees must be paid in full. Ex- 
aminations, papers, and other evalua- 
tion devices are not required of audi- 
tors, but individual arrangements may 
be made to complete such exercises 
with the consent of the instructor. The 
option to audit a course must be de- 
clared during the same period (current- 



ly five days) at the beginning of each 
semester, half-semester, or term as 
drop/add and pass/fail and must be 
completed in the Registrar's Office. 

Part Time Students — Students who 
do not wish to pursue a degree at Ly- 
coming College may, if space permits, 
register for credit or audit courses on 
either a part-time or full-time basis. 
Students who register for one or two 
courses are considered to be enrolled 
part time; students who register for 
three or four courses are considered to 
be enrolled full time. 

Anyone wishing to register as a non- 
degree student must fill out an applica- 
tion form in the Admissions Office, 
pay a one-time application fee of $20, 
and pay the tuition rate in effect at the 
time of each enrollment. After a non- 
degree student has attempted four 
courses, the Dean of the College re- 
serves the right to grant or deny per- 
mission to continue to register in this 
category. 

All non-degree students are subject 
to the general laws and regulations of 
the College as stated in the College 
Catalog and the Student Handbook. 
The College reserves the right to deny 
permission to register to individuals 
who do not meet the standards of the 
College. 

Students who wish to change from a 
non-degree to a degree status must re- 
apply (with no application fee) and 
satisfy all conditions for admission 
and registration in effect at the time of 
application for degree status. 



COOPERATIVE PROGRAMS 

Lycoming has developed several coop- 
erative programs to provide students 
with opportunities to extend their 
knowledge, abilities, and talents in se- 
lected areas through access to the spe- 
cialized academic programs and facili- 
ties of other colleges, universities, aca- 
demies, and hospitals. Although thor- 
ough advisement and curricular plan- 
ning are provided for each of the co- 
operative programs, admission to Ly- 



coming and registration in the pro- 
gram of choice does not guarantee ad- 
mission to the cooperating institution. 
The prerogative of admitting students 
to the cooperative aspect of the pro- 
gram rests with the cooperating insti- 
tution. Students who are interested in 
a cooperative program should contact 
the coordinator during the first week 
of the first semester of their enroll- 
ment at Lycoming. This is necessary to 
plan their course programs in a man- 
ner that will insure completion of re- 
quired courses according to the sched- 
ule stipulated for the program. All co- 
operative programs require special co- 
ordination of course scheduling at Ly- 
coming. 

Engineering — Combining the advan- 
tages of a liberal-arts education and 
the technical training of an engineer- 
ing curriculum, this program is offered 
in conjunction with Bucknell Universi- 
ty and The Pennsylvania State Univer- 
sity. Students complete three years of 
study at Lycoming and two years at 
the cooperating university. Upon satis- 
factory completion of the first year of 
engineering studies, Lycoming awards 
the bachelor of arts degree. When stu- 
dents successfully complete the second 
year of engineering studies, the coop- 
erating university awards the bachelor 
of science degree in engineering. 

At Lycoming, students complete the 
distribution program and courses in 
physics, mathematics, and chemistry. 
Engineering specialties offered at 
Bucknell University include chemical, 
civil, electrical, and mechanical. The 
Pennsylvania State University offers 
aerospace, agricultural, chemical, civil, 
electrical, engineering science, envi- 
ronmental, industrial, mechanical, 
and nuclear engineering. 

Forestry or Environmental Studies — 

Lycoming College offers a cooperative 
program with Duke University in envi- 
ronmental management and forestry. 
Qualified students can earn the bache- 
lor's and master's degrees in five years, 
spending three years at Lycoming and 
two years at Duke. All Lycoming dis- 



15 



tribution and major requirements 
must be completed by the end of the 
junior year. At the end of the first year 
at Duke, the B. A. degree will be award- 
ed by Lycoming. Duke will award the 
professional degree of Master of For- 
estry or Master of Environmental 
Management to qualified candidates 
at the end of the second year. 

The major program emphases at 
Duke are Natural Resources Science/ 
Ecology, Natural Resources Systems 
Science, and Natural Resources Econ- 
omics/Policy. The program is flexible 
enough, however, to accommodate a 
variety of individual designs. An un- 
dergraduate major in one of the natu- 
ral sciences, social sciences, or business 
may provide good preparation for the 
programs at Duke, but a student with 
any undergraduate concentration will 
be considered for admission. All stu- 
dents need at least two courses each in 
biology, mathematics, and economics. 

Students begin the program at Duke 
in July after their junior year at Ly- 
coming with a one-month session of 
field work in natural resource measure- 
ments. They must complete a total of 
60 units which generally takes four 
semesters. 

Some students prefer to complete 
the bachelor's degree before undertak- 
ing graduate study at Duke. The mas- 
ter's degree requirements for these stu- 
dents are the same as for those stu- 
dents entering after the junior year, 
but the 60-unit requirement may be re- 
duced for completed relevant under- 
graduate work of satisfactory quality. 
All credit reductions are determined 
individually and consider the student's 
educational background and objec- 
tives. 

Medical Technology — Students de- 
siring a career in medical technology 
may either complete a bachelor of arts 
program followed by a clinical intern- 
ship at any American Medical Associ- 
ation - accredited hospital, or they 
may complete the cooperative pro- 
gram. Students electing the cooperative 
program normally study for three years 
at Lycoming, during which time they 



complete 24 unit courses, including the 
College distribution requirements, a 
major, and requirements of the Na- 
tional Accrediting Agency for Clinical 
Laboratory Sciences (NAACLS). The 
current requirements of the NAACLS 
are: four courses in chemistry (one of 
which must be either organic or bio- 
chemistry); four courses in biology (in- 
cluding courses in microbiology and 
immunology), and one course in math- 
ematics. 

Students in the cooperative program 
usually major in biology, following a 
modified major of six unit courses that 
exempts them from Ecology (Biology 
24) and Plant Sciences (Biology 25). 
Students must take either Microbiology 
(Biology 21) or Microbiology for the 
Health Sciences (Biology 26), and 
either Animal Physiology (Biology 23) 
or Cell Physiology (Biology 35). The 
cooperative program requires suc- 
cessful completion of a one-year in- 
ternship at an American Medical As- 
sociation - accredited hospital. Lycom- 
ing is affiliated with the following ac- 
credited hospitals: Williamsport, Di- 
vine Providence, Robert Packer, Lan- 
caster, and Abington. Students in the 
cooperative program receive credit at 
Lycoming for each of eight unit cours- 
es in biology and chemistry successful- 
ly completed during the clinical intern- 
ship. Successful completion of the 
Registry Examination is not consid- 
ered a graduation requirement at Ly- 
coming College. 

Students entering a clinical intern- 
ship for one year after graduation 
from Lycoming must complete all of 
the requirements of the cooperative 
program, but are not eligible for the 
biology major exemptions indicated 
above. Upon graduation, such stu- 
dents may apply for admission to a 
clinical program at any hospital. 

Optometry — Through the Acceler- 
ated Optometry Education Curriculum 
Program, students interested in a ca- 
reer in optometry may qualify for ad- 
mission to the Pennsylvania College of 
Optometry after only three years at 
Lycoming College. After four years at 



the Pennsylvania College of Optome- 
try, a student will earn a Doctor of Op- 
tometry degree. Selection of candi- 
dates for the professional segment of 
the program is completed by the ad- 
missions committee of the Pennsylva- 
nia College of Optometry during the 
student's third year at Lycoming. (This 
is one of two routes that students may 
choose. Any student, of course, may 
follow the regular application proce- 
dures for admission to the Pennsylva- 
nia College of Optometry or another 
college of optometry to matriculate 
following completion of his or her 
baccalaureate program.) During the 
three years at Lycoming College, the 
student will complete 24 unit courses, 
including all distribution require- 
ments, and will prepare for his or her 
professional training by obtaining a 
solid foundation in biology, chemistry, 
physics, and mathematics. During the 
first year of study at the Pennsylvania 
College of Optometry, the student will 
take 39 semester hours of basic science 
courses in addition to introductions to 
optometry and health care. Successful 
completion of the first year of profes- 
sional training will complete the course 
requirements for the B.A. degree at 
Lycoming College. 

Most students will find it convenient 
to major in biology in order to satisfy 
the requirements of Lycoming College 
and the Pennsylvania College of Op- 
tometry. Such students are allowed to 
complete a modified biology major 
which will exempt them from two biol- 
ogy courses: Ecology (Biology 24) and 
Plant Sciences (Biology 25). (This 
modified major requires the successful 
completion of the initial year at the 
Pennsylvania College of Optometry). 
Students desiring other majors must 
coordinate their plans with the Health 
Professions Advisory Committee in 
order to insure that they have satisfied 
all requirements. 

Podiatry' — Students interested in 
podiatry may either seek admission to 
a college of podiatric medicine upon 
completion of the bachelor of arts de- 
gree or through the Accelerated Podi- 



16 



atric Medical Education-Curriculum 
Program (APMEC). The latter pro- 
gram provides an opportunity for stu- 
dents to qualify for admission to the 
Pennsylvania College of Podiatric 
Medicine (PCPM) or the Ohio College 
of Podiatric Medicine (OCPM) after 
three years of study at Lycoming. At 
Lycoming, students in the APMEC 
program must successfully complete 
24 unit courses, including the distribu- 
tion program and a basic foundation 
in biology, chemistry, physics, and 
mathematics. During the first year of 
study at PCPM or OCPM, students 
must successfully complete a program 
of basic science courses and an intro- 
duction to podiatry. Successful com- 
pletion of the first year of professional 
training will contribute toward the ful- 
fillment of the course requirements for 
the bachelor of arts degree at Lycom- 
ing. 

Sculpture — The Art Department 
with the Johnson Atelier Technical In- 
stitute of Sculpture in Princeton, New 
Jersey, offers a BFA degree in sculp- 
ture. It uses a classical apprenticeship 
approach as its teaching method. This 
ancient method of teaching is combined 
at Johnson with the most modern and 
technically advanced foundry and fab- 
ricating techniques. 

The Art Department offers a syn- 
thesis program that interrelates the 
student experience at both institutions. 
This is achieved by having the student 
rotate between Lycoming and the ateli- 
er so that each form of education is 
preparation for the other. Lycoming 
offers a core academic program, a 
course of study in the Art Department, 
and elective course opportunities. Ly- 
coming gives eight course units of col- 
lege credit to the student for having 
successfully completed one of the ap- 
prenticeship programs at the Johnson 
Atelier. 

All work completed by the student 
at Lycoming by the end of the sopho- 
more year will be applicable to a bach- 
elor of arts degree with a major in art 
should the student decide to withdraw 
from the BFA program. If the student 



should withdraw from the cooperative 
program prior to completing the ap- 
prenticeship at the Johnson Atelier, 
Lycoming will give up to four units of 
credit or one semester's work for the 
internship. If, however, the student 
completes more work at the atelier 
than the four units, that extra work 
will not be credited to the bachelor of 
arts degree; it will only be used as part 
of the bachelor of fine arts degree, and 
then only if the course at the atelier is 
completed. 

This course of study is very rigorous. 
It will require that the student be in- 
volved almost continuously, either at 
Lycoming or at the Johnson Atelier, 
during the four years it will take to 
complete the degree. (See Art Depart- 
ment listing for specific program.) 

Reserve Officers Training Corps 
Program (R.O.T.C.) — The program 
provides a voluntary opportunity for 
Lycoming students to enroll on a non- 
credit basis in the Bucknell University 
R.O.T.C. unit. Lycoming notes enroll- 
ment in and successful completion of 
the program on student transcripts. 
Military Science is a four-year program 
divided into a basic course given dur- 
ing the freshman and sophomore years 
and an advanced course given during 
the junior and senior years. Students 
who have not completed the basic 
course may qualify for the advanced 
course by completing summer camp 
between the sophomore and junior 
years. Students enrolled in the ad- 
vanced course receive a monthly sti- 
pend of $100 for up to 10 months a 
year. Students successfully completing 
the advanced course and advanced 
summer camp between the junior and 
senior years will qualify for a commis- 
sion as a Second Lieutenant in the 
United States Army upon graduation, 
and will incur a service obligation in the 
active Army or Army Reserves. The 
only expense to the student for this pro- 
gram is the $60 basic and advanced 
course deposits payable to Bucknell. 

Student Enrichment Semester — 

This voluntary program is designed to 



expand academic and life opportunities 
for students and to provide for partici- 
pation in specialized programs and 
courses not available at Lycoming. 
Other members of the program are 
Bucknell and Susquehanna Universi- 
ties, the Williamsport Area Communi- 
ty College, and Bloomsburg, Lock 
Haven, and Mansfield State Colleges. 
Students other than freshmen enroll 
full or part time for credit, normally 
for one semester or term, at any par- 
ticipating institution in selected cours- 
es. Students in the program remain 
fully enrolled as degree candidates at 
their home institutions. A special op- 
portunity within the program is the 
cross-registration arrangement with 
the Williamsport Area Community 
College, whereby students may enroll 
for less than a full-time course load 
while remaining enrolled in courses at 
Lycoming. 

Washington, United Nations, Lon- 
don and Harrisburg Urban Semesters 

— With the consent of the Department 
of Political Science, selected students 
are permitted to study in Washington, 
D.C., at The American University for 
one semester. They may choose from 
seven different programs: Washington 
Semester, Urban Semester, Foreign 
Policy Semester, International Devel- 
opment Semester, Economic Policy 
Semester, Science and Technology Se- 
mester, American Studies Semester. 

With the consent of either the De- 
partment of History or Political Sci- 
ence, selected students may enroll at 
Drew University in Madison, New Jer- 
sey, in the United Nations Semester, 
which is designed to provide a first- 
hand acquaintance with the world or- 
ganization. Students with special inter- 
ests in world history, international re- 
lations, law, and politics are eligible to 
participate. 

The London Semester programs of 
Drew and The American Universities 
emphasize European history, politics, 
and culture. Interested students partic- 
ipate with the consent of either the De- 
partments of History or Political Sci- 
ence. 



17 



The Harrisburg Urban Semester 
(THUS) is a project of the Central 
Pennsylvania Consortium: Dickinson, 
Franklin & Marshall, and Gettysburg 
Colleges. THUS is a one-semester off- 
campus academic internship program 
designed for students who wish to par- 
ticipate in a career-oriented internship 
experience while exploring the social, 
economic, and political problems 
which our states and cities face. THUS 
students, in most cases, receive a full 
semester's academic credit by working 
25 hours a week in their internship, 
writing a substantial analytical paper 
related to the internship, and taking 
two academic seminars — one in urban 
affairs and one in a more specialized 
area. Opportunities for independent 
study are also available. The 20 stu- 
dents in the program each semester 
live near one another in apartments or 
houses available through THUS, and 
students spend a great deal of time to- 
gether sharing their common experi- 
ences in an informal and sometimes 
intense manner. Students will receive 
academic credit from Franklin & Mar- 
shall College. The internship is graded 
on a pass/fail basis. 

Normally the above special-semester 
programs are open only to juniors. 

NOTE: Lycoming College cannot assume re- 
sponsibility for the health, safety, or welfare of 
students engaged in or en route to or from any 
off-campus studies or activities which are not 
under the exclusive jurisdiction of this institu- 
tion. 

THE SCHOLAR PROGRAM 

The Lycoming College Scholar Pro- 
gram is a special program designed to 
meet the needs and aspirations of 
highly motivated students of superior 
intellectual ability. The Lycoming 
Scholar satisfies the general distribu- 
tion requirements, but on a more ex- 
acting level and with more challenging 
courses than the average student. Ly- 
coming Scholars also participate in 
special courses and seminars and in 
serious independent study culminating 
in a senior project supervised by their 
major department. 
Students are admitted to the pro- 



gram by invitation of the Scholar 
Council, the group which oversees the 
program. The council consists of four 
students elected by current scholars 
and four faculty selected by the Dean 
of the College. The guidelines govern- 
ing selection of new scholars are flexi- 
ble: academic excellence, intellectual 
curiosity, and creativity are all taken 
into account. Students who desire to 
participate in the Scholar Program but 
are not invited may petition the Schol- 
ar Council for consideration. 

To remain in the program, students 
must maintain a GPA of 3.0 or better. 
Students dropping below this average 
will be placed on Scholar probation 
until their average improves, or they 
are asked to leave the program. To 
graduate as a Scholar, a student must 
have at least a 3.0 cumulative average. 
Scholars must take the First Year Schol- 
ar Seminar during their first semester 
in the program. In addition, the fol- 
lowing course requirements must be 
met. 

A. English. Scholars must display 
above-average writing skills by the end 
of the sophomore year, as certified by 
the Department of English and the 
Scholar Council. This requirement 
may be met by obtaining a sufficiently 
high score on an apppropriate CLEP 
examination or by a grade of "B" in 
English 6. Students not meeting the re- 
quirement in either of these ways by 
the end of the freshman year will be 
asked to do extra work until the com- 
petency is reached. Beyond English 6, 
the requirement is one literature course 
numbered 20 or higher. 

B. Language/Mathematical Scienc- 
es. Scholars must satisfy the require- 
ment in either language or mathemati- 
cal sciences. Language: Scholars must 
complete two courses numbered 10 or 
higher (excluding courses taught in 
English). Mathematical Sciences: Two 
options are available in mathematics/ 
computer science. Either Math 18 and 
19, plus one course numbered 20 or 
higher (continuous mathematics) or 
two courses chosen from Math 12, 13, 
and Computer Science 15, plus one 
course numbered 20 or higher (discrete 



mathematics). By demonstrating high- 
er competence on the Mathematics 
Placement Examination, scholars may 
reduce the requirement to two units of 
mathematical science. 

C. Philosophy/Religion. Scholars 
must satisfy this requirement in either 
of the two areas. Philosophy: Two 
courses numbered 20 or higher. Relig- 
ion: Two courses numbered 22 or high- 
er. 

D. Fine Arts. Scholars must satisfy 
the requirement in one of four areas. 
Art: Two options are available in art. 
Either two courses taken from Art 22, 
23, 24, 31, 32, 33, and 34 (Art History), 
or two courses taken from Art 11, 15, 
20, and 25 (Studio Art). Music: Two 
courses taken from Music 17, 30, or 
higher. Theatre: Two courses taken 
from Theatre 12 or higher, excluding 
Theatre 18. Literature: Two literature 
courses taken from English 20 or high- 
er, Foreign Languages and Literature 
25, or other Foreign Language and 
Literature courses taught in English. 

E. Natural Sciences. Scholars must 
satisfy the requirements in one of three 
areas. Astronomy/ Physics: Two cours- 
es numbered 11 or higher. Biology: 
Two courses numbered 10 or higher. 
Chemistry: Two courses numbered 10 
or higher. 

F. History/Social Sciences. Scholars 
must satisfy the requirements in one of 
five areas. Economics: Two courses 
numbered 10 or higher. History: Two 
courses, one of which must be num- 
bered 20 or higher. Political Science: 
Two courses numbered 15 or higher. 
Psychology: Two courses including 
Psychology 10 and one course num- 
bered 24 or higher (excluding Psychol- 
ogy 38). Sociology/Anthropology: 
Two courses including Sociology 10 
and one course numbered 30 or higher 
(excluding Sociology 40). 

G. Physical Education. Scholars 
must satisfy the same physical educa- 
tion requirement stipulated by the Col- 
lege for all students. 

H. Designated Courses. In addition 
to completing the distribution require- 
ments, Scholars will be required to 
complete four upper-level courses 



18 



(numbered 30 and above) chosen from 
a list of "designated" courses selected 
and maintained by the Scholar Coun- 
cil. Each full-time Lycoming instruc- 
tor is invited to nominate one of 
his/her courses having special depth 
and merit for inclusion on this list. 
The Scholar Council may alter the list 
from time to time. A scholar may use 
no more than two such designated 
courses from any one department to 
satisfy this requirement. 



I. Senior Project. In the senior year, 
scholars must successfully complete an 
independent studies or departmental 
honors project which has been ap- 
proved in advance by the Independent 
Studies Committee and the Scholar 
Council. This project must be present- 
ed orally and be accepted by the Schol- 
ar Council. 

J. Scholars must complete a major 
and 32 units, exclusive of the First Year 
Scholar Seminar. 



K. In the case of transfer students 
and those who seek to enter the pro- 
gram after their freshman year and in 
other cases deemed by the Scholar 
Council to involve special or extraor- 
dinary circumstances, the Council shall 
have the right to grant exceptions and 
make adjustments to the Scholar dis- 
tribution requirements provided that 
in all cases such exceptions and adjust- 
ments would still satisfy the regular 
College distribution requirements. 




19 



Curriculum 



Numbers 1-9 Elementary courses in de- 
partments where such courses are 
not counted as part of the student's 
major. 
Numbers 10-19 Freshman level courses 
Numbers 20-29 Sophomore level 

courses 
Numbers 30-39 Junior Level courses 
Numbers 40-49 Senior level courses 
Numbers 50-59 Non-catalog courses 

(offered on a limited basis) 
Numbers 60-69 Applied Music 
Numbers 70-79 Internships 
Numbers 80-89 Independent Study 
Numbers 90-99 Independent Study for 
Department Honors 

Courses not in sequence are listed sep- 
arately, as: 

Drawing Art 11 

Color Theory Art 12 

Courses which imply a sequence are 
indicated with a dash between, mean- 
ing that the first semester must be tak- 
en prior to the second, as: 

Intermediate French 

French 10-11 

All students have the right of access to 
all courses. 



ACCOUNTING 

Professor: Richmond (Chairman) 
Assistant Professors: Kuhns, Wienecke 

The purpose of the accounting major 
is to help prepare the student for a ca- 
reer within the accounting profession, 
whether public, private, or govern- 
mental, through a curriculum stressing 
pre-professional education. 

A major consists of Accounting 10, 
20-21, 30, 40, 41, 43, 45, Mathematics 
13, Computer Science 15, and one unit 
to be selected from Accounting 25, 26, 
31, 42, 44, 46, 47, and 48 or Internship. 
Business 10 may be substituted for Ac- 
counting 10 if a student changes ma- 
jors. Duplicate credit will not be grant- 
ed. 



Students seeking entry into the pub- 26 
lie accounting field are advised to in- 
vestigate the professional require- 
ments for certification in the state in 
which they intend to practice so that 
they may meet all educational require- 
ments prior to graduation. All majors 
are advised to enroll in Economics 10 30-31 
and 11, Business 35, 36, and 38, and 
one of the following: Business 33, Ec- 
onomics 20, or 37. 

Three minors are offered by the De- 
partment of Accounting. The follow- 
ing courses are required to complete a 
minor in Financial Accounting: Ac- 
counting 10, 20, 21, 43, 47 and one 
from 25 or 46. A minor in Managerial 
Accounting requires the completion of 
Accounting 10, 20, 30, 31, and 44. To 
obtain a minor in Federal Income Tax, 
a student must complete Accounting 
10, 20, 21, 41 and 42. 

10 ELEMENTARY ACCOUNTING THEORY 

An introductory course in recording, classi- 
fying, summarizing, and interpreting the 
basic business transaction. Problems of 
classification and interpretation of accounts 
and preparation of financial statements are 
studied. Prerequisite: Second-semester 
freshman or consent of instructor. 



20-21 INTERMEDIATE ACCOUNTING 
THEORY 

An intensive study of accounting statements 
and analytical procedures with an emphasis 
upon corporate accounts, various decision 
models, price-level models, earnings per 
share, pension accounting, accounting for 
leases, and financial statement analysis. 
Prerequisite: Accounting 10. 



25 FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS 
Deals with the analysis of financial state- 
ments as an aid to decision making. The 
theme of the course is understanding the fi- 
nancial data which are analyzed as well as 
the methods by which they are analyzed and 
interpreted. This course should prove of 
value to all who need a thorough under- 
standing of the uses, to which financial 
statements are put as well as to those who 42 
must know how to use them intelligently 
and effectively. This includes accountants, 
security analysts, lending officers, credit 
analysts, managers, and all others who 
make decisions on the basis of financial 
data. Prerequisite: Accounting 10 or Busi- 
ness 10. Mav term. 



GOVERNMENT AND FUND 
ACCOUNTING 

This course is designed to introduce account- 
ing for not-for-profit organizations. Muni- 
cipal accounting and reporting are studied. 
Prerequisite: Accounting 10 or Business 10. 
One-half unit of credit. 

COST AND BUDGETARY 
ACCOUNTING THEORY 

Methods of accounting for material, labor, 
and factory overhead expenses consumed in 
manufacturing using job order, process, 
and standard costing. Application of cost 
accounting and budgeting theory to deci- 
sion making in the area of make or buy, ex- 
pansion of production and sales, and ac- 
counting for control are dealt with. Prere- 
quisite: Accounting 20 and Mathematics 13 
or consent of instructor. 

40 AUDITING THEORY 
A study of the science or art of verifying, 
analyzing, and interpreting accounts and re- 
ports. The goal of the course is to empha- 
size concepts which will enable students to 
understand the philosophy and environ- 
ment of auditing. Special attention is given 
to the public accounting profession, study- 
ing auditing standards, professional ethics, 
the legal liability inherent in the attest func- 
tion, the study and evaluation of internal 
control, the nature of evidence, the growing 
use of statistical sampling, the impact of 
electronic data processing, and the basic ap- 
proach to planning an audit. Finally, vari- 
ous audit reports expressing independent 
expert opinions on the fairness of financial 
statements are studied. Prerequisite: Ac- 
counting 21, Mathematics 13, and Compu- 
ter Science 15. 

41 FEDERAL INCOME TAX 
ACCOUNTING AND PLANNING 
Analysis of the provisions of the Internal 
Revenue Code relating to income, deduc- 
tions, inventories, and accounting methods. 
Practical problems involving determination 
of income and deductions, capital gains and 
losses, computation and payment of taxes 
through withholding at the source and 
through declaration are considered. Planning 
transactions so that a minimum amount of 
tax will result is emphasized. Prerequisite: 
Accounting 10 or consent of instructor. 



FEDERAL INCOME TAX 
ADMINISTRATION AND PLANNING 
An analysis of the provisions of the Internal 
Revenue Code relating to partnerships, 
estates, trusts, and corporations. An exten- 
sive series of problems is considered, and 
effective tax planning is emphasized. Pre- 
requisite: Accounting 41. 



20 



43 ADVANCED ACCOUNTING I 

An intensive study of partnerships, install- 
ment and consignment sales, branch ac- 
counting, bankruptcy and reorganization, 
estates and trusts, government entities, non- 
profit organizations, and accounting and 
reporting for the SEC. Prerequisite: Ac- 
counting 21. One-half unit of credit. 

44 CONTROLLERSHIP 

Control process in the organization. Gener- 
al systems theory, financial control systems, 
centralization-decentralization, perform- 
ance measurement and evaluation, forecasts 
and budgets, and marketing, production 
and finance models for control purposes. 
Prerequisite: Accounting 31 or consent of 
instructor. Alternate years. 

45 AUDITING PRACTICE 

An audit project is presented, solved and 
the auditor's report written. THIS 
COURSE IS LIMITED TO STUDENTS 
WHO HAVE EITHER COMPLETED OR 
ARE ENROLLED IN ACCOUNTING 40. 
One-half unit of credit. Grade will be 
recorded as "S" or "U." 

46 SEMINAR ON APB OPINIONS AND 
FASB STANDARDS 

A seminar course for accounting majors 
with library assignments to gain a workable 
understanding of the highly technical opin- 
ions of the Accounting Principles Board 
and standards of the Financial Accounting 
Standards Board. One term paper. Possible 
trip to New York City to attend a public 
hearing of the Financial Accounting Stan- 
dards Board. Prerequisite: Accounting 10. 
May term. 

47 ADVANCED ACCOUNTING II 
Certain areas of advanced accounting theo- 
ry, including business combinations, consol- 
idated financial statements, and accounting 
and reporting for the Securities and Ex- 
change Commission are covered. Prereq- 
uisite: Accounting 21. One-half unit of cred- 
it. 

48 CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS FOR 
CPA CANDIDATES 

Problems from the Accounting Practice sec- 
tions of past C.P.A. examinations, which 
require a thorough knowledge of the core 
courses in their solution, are assigned. The 
course is intended to meet the needs of 
those interested in public accounting and 
preparation for the Certified Public Ac- 
countants Examination. Prerequisite: Ac- 
counting 30 or consent of instructor. One- 
half unit of credit. Grade will be recorded 
as "S" or "U." 



70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Interns in accounting typically work off 
campus under the supervision of a public or 
private accountant. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Typical examples of recent studies in ac- 
counting are: computer program to generate 
financial statements, educational core for 
public accountants, inventory control, and 
church taxation. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



ACCOUNTING — 
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 

Assistant Professor: Kuhns 
(Coordinator) 

The Accounting-Mathematical Scienc- 
es interdisciplinary major is designed 
to offer, within a liberal-arts frame- 
work, courses which will aid in con- 
structing mathematical models for 
business decision making. Students 
obtain the necessary substantial back- 
ground in both mathematical sciences 
and accounting. 

Required accounting courses are: 
Accounting 10, 20, 21, 30, 31, 41, 42. In 
Mathematical Sciences required cours- 
es are: Computer Science 15 and 37 
and Mathematics 12, 18, 19, 38, and 13 
or 32. Recommended courses include: 
Mathematics 20, 33; Business 23, 34, 
35, 36, 38, 39; Computer Science 26; 
Economics 10, 11; Psychology 15, 24; 
and Sociology 10. 



AMERICAN STUDIES 

Associate Professor: Piper 
(Coordinator) 

The American Studies major offers a 
comprehensive program in American 
civilization which introduces students 
to the complexities underlying the de- 
velopment of America and its contem- 
porary life. The 13 major courses in- 
clude: 



FOUR CORE COURSES — The 

primary integrating units of the major, 
these team-taught courses will teach 
you how to think of ideas from differ- 
ent points of view and how to correlate 
information and methods from vari- 
ous disciplines: 

America As a Civilization (First se- 
mester of major study) 

American Studies — Research and 
Methodology (Second semester) 

American Tradition in the Arts and 
Literature (Third semester) 

Internship or Independent Study (Jun- 
ior and/or senior year) 

CONCENTRATION AREAS — 

Six courses in one option and three in 
the other are needed. Six primary con- 
centration-option courses in American 
Arts or American Society build around 
the insights gained in the core courses. 
They focus particular attention on 
areas most germane to academic and 
vocational interests. The three addi- 
tional courses from the other option 
give further breadth to understanding 
of America. Students also will be en- 
couraged to take elective courses relat- 
ing to other cultures. 

American Arts Concentration Option 

American Art — Art 24 
American Art of the 20th Century — Art 32 
19th Century American Literature — English 22 
20th Century American Literature — English 23 
American Music — Music 18 or 19 
American Theatre 

American Society Concentration 
Option 

U.S. Social and Intellectual History to 1877 

— History 42 

U.S. Social and Intellectual History since 1877 

— History 43 

The American Constitutional System 

— Political Science 30 

The American Political Tradition 

— Political Science 47 
American Economic Development 
Racial and Cultural Minorities 

— Sociology 34 



Students should design their American 
Studies major in consultation with the 



21 



program coordinator or a member of 
the American Studies Committee. 

10 AMERICA AS A CIVILIZATION 

An analysis of the historical, sociocultural, 
economic, and political perspectives of 
American civilization with special attention 
to the inter-relationships between these vari- 
ous orientations. 

11 AMERICAN STUDIES — RESEARCH 
AND METHODOLOGY 

The study and application of various re- 
search methods, including new trends in 
historical study, quantitative analysis, cross- 
cultural studies, and on-site inspection. 

12 AMERICAN TRADITION IN THE 
ARTS AND LITERATURE 

The relationships of the arts and literature 
to the various historical periods of Ameri- 
can life. 

70-79 or 80-89 INTERNSHIP OR 

INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See Index) 
An opportunity to relate the learning in the 
core courses and the concentration areas to 
an actual supervised off-campus learning 
situation or independent study project. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
HONORS (See Index) 



ART 

Associate Professor: Shipley 
Assistant Professors: Bogle 
(Chairman), Lesko 

The Art Department offers two degree 
programs: a bachelor of arts degree 
and a bachelor of fine arts in sculpture. 

The B.A. degree: 

In order to complete a bachelor of arts 
degree with a major in art, a student 
must complete one of the following 
three tracks: 

Track I — Two-Dimensional 

The two-dimensional track consists 
of Drawing I and II (Art 11 and 21), Fig- 
ure Modeling I (Art 16), Two-Dimen- 
sional Design (Art 15), and Painting I 
and II (Art 20 and 30). Printmaking I 
and II (Art 28 and 38) may be substi- 
tuted for Painting I and II (Art 20 and 



30). Students must also take Art 22 
and 23 (Survey of Art) and two addi- 
tional courses in art history (Art 24, 
31, 32, 33, 34, 39). Studio Research 
(Art 46) is required along with partici- 
pation in a senior exhibition. 

Track II — Three-Dimensional 

The three-dimensional track con- 
sists of Drawing I and II (Art 11 and 
21), Figure Modeling (Art 16), Sculp- 
ture I and II (Art 25 and 35), and eith- 
er Figure Modeling II (Art 26) or Sculp- 
ture III (Art 45). Students must also 
take Art 22 and Art 23 (Survey of Art) 
and two additional courses in art his- 
tory (Art 24, 31, 32, 33, 34, 39). Studio 
Research (Art 46) is required along with 
participation in a senior exhibition. 

Track III — Commercial Design 

The commercial design track con- 
sists of Drawing I and II (Art 11 and 
21), Color Theory (Art 12), Two-Di- 
mensional Design (Art 15), Figure 
Modeling I (Art 16), Survey of Art 
(Art 22 and 23), Photography I (Art 
27), Special Projects in Commercial 
Design (Art 42), Layout and Design 
(GCO 511), Typographic Composition 
(GCO 512), and Process Camera (GCO 
521). 

The following courses are recom- 
mended: Photography II (Art 37), In- 
ternship (Art 70-79), Advertising 
(Business 32), Writing for Special Au- 
diences (English 16), Introduction to 
Mass Communication (Mass Comm 
10), Social Psychology (Psy 24). 

The BFA degree in sculpture: 
The student completes a specified 
course of study in the Art Department, 
the Lycoming College distribution re- 
quirements, and one of the field spe- 
cialization apprenticeship programs at 
the Johnson Atelier in Princeton, New 
Jersey. 

The Art Department course of study 
consists of 12 courses in studio and art 
history: Figure Modeling I and II (Art 
16 and 26), Sculpture I and II (Art 25 
and 35), Drawing I and II (Art 11 and 
21), Introduction to Photography (Art 
27), 2-D Design (Art 15), Survey of Art 



(Art 22 and 23), and two additional 
courses in Art History (Art 24, 31, 32, 
33, 34, 39). 

Twelve additional course units are 
required of the student. The student 
must meet the requirements of the dis- 
tribution program within these courses. 

The student must also complete one 
of the field specialization apprentice- 
ships at the Johnson Atelier Technical 
Institute of Sculpture in Princeton, 
New Jersey. This requires the student 
to be at the Johnson Atelier for a peri- 
od of between 16 and 23'/2 months. 
The student receives eight course units 
of credit at Lycoming College for suc- 
cessfully completing the field speciali- 
zation apprenticeship at Johnson Ate- 
lier. It is expected that the work for the 
apprenticeship component will be 
completed during the summers and the 
junior year. 

Admission to the BFA degree pro- 
gram is on the basis of meeting the ad- 
mission standards of Lycoming Col- 
lege, and passing a portfolio review 
and interview by members of the Ly- 
coming College Art Department. 

Four minors are being offered by 
the Art Department. Requirements for 
each follow: Art History: Art 22, 23, 
and two advanced history courses; 
Sculpture: Art 16, 25, 26, 35; Painting: 
Art 15, 11, 20, 30; Photography: Art 
11, 15, 27, 37. 

11 DRAWING I 

Study of the human figure with gesture and 
proportion stressed. Student is made famil- 
iar with different drawing techniques and 
media. Some drawing from nature. Offered 
in alternate semesters with Drawing II and 
III. 

12 COLOR THEORY 

A study of the physical and emotional as- 
pects of color. Emphasis will be placed on 
the study of color as an aesthetic agent for 
the artist. The color theories of Johannes It- 
ten will form the base for this course with 
some study of the theories of Albert Mun- 
sell, Faber Berren, and Wilhelm Ostwald. 

15 TWO-DIMENSIONAL DESIGN 

The basic fundamentals found in the two- 
dimensional arts: line, shape, form, space, 
color, and composition are taught in rela- 
tionship to the other two-dimensional arts. 
Perceptual theories and their relationships 



22 



to what and why we see what we see in art 
are discussed with each problem. 

16 FIGURE MODELING I 

Understanding the figure will be approached 
through learning the basic structures and 
proportions of the figure. The course is con- 
ceived as a three-dimensional drawing class. 
At least one figure per student will be cast. 

19 CERAMICS I 

Emphasis placed on pottery design as it re- 
lates to function of vessels and the design 
parameters imposed by the characteristics 
of clay. The techniques of ceramics are 
taught to encourage expression rather than 
to dispense merely a technical body of in- 
formation. 

20 PAINTING I 

An introduction of painting techniques and 
materials. Coordination of color, value, 
and design within the painting is taught. 
Some painting from the figure. No limita- 
tions as to painting media, subject matter, 
or style. Prerequisite: Art 15 or consent of 
instructor. 

21 DRAWING II 

Continued study of the human figure. Em- 
phasis is placed on realism and figure- 
ground coordination with the use of value 
and design. Prerequisite: Art 11. 

22 SURVEY OF ART: PRE-HISTORY 
THROUGH THE MIDDLE AGES 

A survey of Western architecture, sculpture, 
and painting. Emphasis is on the interrela- 
tion of form and content and on the related- 
ness of the visual arts to their cultural envi- 
ronment: Paleolithic Art, Near East, Egypt, 
Greece, Rome, and Medieval Europe. 

23 SURVEY OF ART: FROM THE 
RENAISSANCE THROUGH THE 
MODERN AGE 

A survey of Western architecture, sculpture, 
and painting. Emphasis is on the interrela- 
tion of form and content and on the related- 
ness of the visual arts to their cultural envi- 
ronment: 14th - 20th centuries. 

24 AMERICAN ART OF THE 18TH AND 
19TH CENTURIES 

The development of the arts in America 
from Colonial times through the 19th cen- 
tury; from the unknown folk artist to popu- 
lar artists such as Winslow Homer and 
Thomas Eakins. 

25 SCULPTURE I 

An introduction to the techniques, materi- 
als, and ideas of sculpture. Clay, plaster, 
wax, wood, and other materials will be 
used. The course will be concerned with 
ideas about sculpture as expression, and 
with giving material form to ideas. 



26 FIGURE MODELING II 

Will exploit the structures and understand- 
ings learned in Figure Modeling I to pro- 
duce larger, more complete figurative works. 
There will be a requirement to cast one of 
the works in plaster. Prerequisite: Art 16 
and consent of instructor. 

27 INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY 
Objectives of the course are to develop tech- 
nical skills in the use of photographic equip- 
ment (cameras, films, darkroom, print 
maker) and to develop sensitivity in the are- 
as of composition, form, light, picture 
quality, etc. Each student must own or have 
access to a 35mm camera. 

28 PRINTMAKING I 

Practice of the techniques of silk-screen, 
wood-block, and linoleum-block printing. 
Prerequisite: Art 11 or 15. 

29 CERAMICS II 

Continuation of Ceramics I. Emphasis on 
use of the wheel and technical aspects such 
as glaze making and kiln firing. Prerequi- 
site: Art 19. 

30 PAINTING II 

Emphasis is placed on individual style and 
technique. Artists and movements in art are 
studied. No limitations as to painting med- 
ia, subject matter, or style. Prerequisite: Art 
20. 

31 20TH CENTURY EUROPEAN ART 
Stylistic developments in Europe from 1880 
to the present, including Cubism, Fauvism, 
Expressionism, Dada, and Surrealism. Pi- 
casso, Matisse, Kandinsky, and Mondrian 
are among the major artists studied. 

32 AMERICAN ART OF THE 20TH 

CENTURY 

Painting, sculpture, and architecture in the 
United States from 1900 to the present with 
emphasis on developments of the 1950's and 
1960's: an inquiry into the meaning and his- 
torical roots of contemporary art. 

33 19TH CENTURY EUROPEAN ART 
Emphasis on painting, sculpture, and archi- 
tecture of Western Europe from 1760 to 
1900, including the work of late 18th-century 
artists David and Goya and 19th-century de- 
velopments from Romanticism through 
Post-Impressionism. 

34 ART OF THE RENAISSANCE 
Painting, sculpture, and architecture in Ita- 
ly and the Northern countries from the late 
13th century through the early 16th century. 
Artists include Giotto, Donatello, Alberti, 
Leonardo da Vinci, Michelangelo, Van 
Eyck, Durer, and Bruegel. 



35 SCULPTURE II 

A continuation of Sculpture I (Art 25). Em- 
phasis is on advanced technical processes. 
Casting of bronze and aluminum sculpture 
will be done in the school foundry. Prereq- 
uisite: Art 25. 

37 PHOTOGRAPHY II 

To extend the skills developed in Photogra- 
phy I by continued growth in technical ex- 
pertise including instruction in the use and 
capabilities of large format view cameras. 
Emphasis is placed on conceptual and aes- 
thetic aspects of photography. Prerequisite: 
Art 27. 

38 PRINTMAKING II 

Further exploration of silk-screen printing 
techniques, practice of the techniques of 
engraving, drypoint, etching, and aquatint. 

39 WOMEN IN ART 

A survey of women artists from a variety of 
viewpoints — aesthetic, historical, social, 
political and economic — which seeks to 
understand and integrate the contributions 
of women artists into the mainstream of the 
history of art. No prerequisite. 

40 PAINTING III 

Professional quality is stressed. There is 
some experimentation with new painting 
techniques and styles. 

41 DRAWING III 

Continued study of human figure, individu- 
al style, and professional control of drawing 
techniques and media are now emphasized. 

42 SPECIAL PROJECT IN COMMERCIAL 
DESIGN 

Concentrated research, preparation, and ex- 
ecution of one major project in commercial 
design chosen by the student in consultation 
with the instructor. Preliminary concepts, 
preparatory layout and design and finished 
work will culminate in a portfolio and pre- 
sentation. Prerequisite: permission of the 
Art Department. 

45 SCULPTURE III 

In Sculpture III the student is expected to 
produce a series of sculptures that follow a 
conceptual and technical line of develop- 
ment. Prerequisites: Art 16, 25, and 35. 

46 STUDIO RESEARCH 

Independent research in an elective studio 
area, conducted under the supervision of 
the appropriate faculty member, includes 
creation of work which may be incorporat- 
ed in the senior group exhibition. Student 
works in private studio assigned by the de- 
partment. 



23 



70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Commercial design, interior design, and 
photography programs in local businesses, 
and museum work at the Lycoming County 
Historical Museum. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Recent studies in anatomy. Aspects of the art 
nouveau, lithography, photography, pottery, 
problems in illustration, and watercolor. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS 

Professor: Fineman 
Associate Professor: Erickson 

(Chairman) 
Assistant Professor: Keig 

The department offers two majors. 
The major in astronomy is specifically 
designed to train students in the field 
of planetarium education; it also may 
serve as a basis for earning state certi- 
fication as a secondary school teacher 
of general science. The major in phys- 
ics can prepare students for graduate 
work in physics, astronomy, and relat- 
ed physical sciences, for the coopera- 
tive program in engineering, for state 
certification as secondary school 
teachers of physics, or for technical 
positions in industry. 

Astronomy 

The major in astronomy requires As- 
tronomy 11, either 12 or 13, 30, 44, 45, 
and 46; Physics 25 and 26; Mathemat- 
ics 18 and 19; and Chemistry 10 and 11 
or 30 and 31. Juniors and seniors ma- 
joring in astronomy are also required 
to register for four semesters of As- 
tronomy 49 (non-credit colloquia). In 
addition, the following cognate cours- 
es are recommended: Physics 27 and 
33; Philosophy 33, 38, and 39; Music 
22; and Art 27. 

3 OBSERVATIONAL ASTRONOMY 

A methods course providing the opportuni- 
ty to make a variety of astronomical obser- 
vations, both visually and photographically, 
with and without telescopes. The planetari- 



um is used to familiarize the student with 
the sky at various times during the year and 
from different locations on earth. May or 
summer term only. 

4 FIELD GEOLOGY 

A methods course introducing the field 
techniques needed to study the geology of 
an area. May or summer term only. 

5 HISTORY OF ASTRONOMY 

A comprehensive view of the evolution of 
astronomical thought from ancient Greece 
to the present, emphasizing the impact that 
astronomical discoveries and the conquest 
of space have had on Western culture. May 
or summer term only. 

1 PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (B) 

11 PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (A) 

A summary of current concepts of the uni- 
verse from the solar system to distant galax- 
ies. Describes the techniques and instru- 
ments used in astronomical research. Pre- 
sents not only what is reasonably well 
known about the universe, but also consid- 
ers some of the major unsolved problems. 
Astronomy I and 11 share the same three 
hours of lecture and two hours of laborato- 
ry each week. 11 has one additional hour 
each week for more advanced mathematical 
treatment of the material. Credit may not 
be earned for both 1 and 11. Corequisite for 
II: Mathematics 17 or consent of instructor. 

2 EARTH SCIENCE (B) 

12 EARTH SCIENCE (A) 

A study of the physical processes that con- 
tinually affect the planet Earth, shaping our 
environment. Describes how past events 
and lifeforms can be reconstructed from 
preserved evidence to reveal the history of 
our planet from its origin to the present. Em- 
phasizes the ways in which geology, meteor- 
ology, and oceanography interrelate with 
man and the environment. Astronomy 2 
and 12 share the same three hours of lecture 
and two hours of laboratory each week. 12 
has one additional hour each week for more 
advanced mathematical treatment of the 
material. Credit may not be earned for both 
2 and 12. Corequisite for 12: Mathematics 
17 or consent of instructor. 

13 METEOROLOGY 

The general properties of the atmosphere 
and their measurements will be discussed in 
terms of basic physical and chemical laws. 
Two basic themes will guide the approach, 
i.e., the atmosphere behaves like a giant 
heat engine, and weather patterns exist 
from a micro-to-macro scale. May or sum- 
mer term only. Alternate years. 

30 PLANETARIUM TECHNIQUES 

A methods course covering major aspects 



of planetarium programming, operation 
and maintenance. Students are required to 
prepare and present a planetarium show. 
Upon successfully completing the course, 
students are eligible to become planetarium 
assistants. Three hours of lecture and dem- 
onstration and three hours of practical 
training per week. Prerequisites: Astronomy 
1 or 11 (Principles of Astronomy) or consent 
of instructor. A Iternate years. 

44 RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY 

A detailed presentation of the special theory 
of relativity, and a short view of the general 
theory and its classical proofs. Man's con- 
cepts of the universe, with particular atten- 
tion to alternative modern cosmological 
models. Discussion of the Cosmological 
Principle, its rationale, and its implications. 
Four hours of lecture per week. Prerequi- 
sites: Astronomy 11 (Principles of Astrono- 
my A) and Physics 25 (Introductory Physics 
with Calculus I). Alternate years. Cross- 
listed as Physics 44. 

45 STELLAR EVOLUTION 

The physical principles governing the inter- 
nal structure and external appearance of 
stars. Mechanisms of energy generation and 
transport within stars. The evolution of 
stars from initial formation to final stages. 
The creation of chemical elements by nucle- 
osynthesis. Four hours of lecture per week. 
Prerequisites: Astronomy 11 (Principles of 
Astronomy A) and Physics 26 (Introductory 
Physics with Calculus II). Alternate years. 

46 STELLAR DYNAMICS AND 
GALACTIC STRUCTURE 

The motion of objects in gravitational 
fields. Introduction to the n-body problem. 
The relation between stellar motions and 
the galactic potential. The large scale struc- 
ture of galaxies in general and of the Milky 
Way Galaxy in particular. Four hours of lec- 
ture per week. Prerequisites: Astronomy 11 
(Principles of Astronomy A) and Physics 25 
(Introductory Physics with Calculus I). Al- 
ternate years. 

49 ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS 
COLLOQUIA 

This non-credit but required course for jun- 
iors and seniors majoring in astronomy and 
physics offers students a chance to meet and 
hear active scientists in astronomy, physics, 
and related scientific areas talk about their 
own research or professional activities. In 
addition, majors in astronomy and physics 
must present two lectures, one given during 
the junior year and one given during the 
senior year, on the results of a literature sur- 
vey or on individual research. Students ma- 
joring in this department are required to at- 
tend four semesters during the junior and 
senior years. A letter grade will be given 



24 



when the student gives a lecture. Otherwise 
the grade will be S/U. Students in the Coop- 
erative Program in Liberal Arts and Engi- 
neering are required to attend two semesters 
and present one lecture during their junior 
year. One hour per week. Cross-listed as 
Physics 49. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Independent studies may be undertaken in 
most areas of astronomy. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 

Physics 

The major in physics requires Physics 
25, 26, 31, 32, and four additional 
Physics courses numbered 27 and 
above. Up to two courses chosen from 
Astronomy 11, 12, 13, 45, and 46 may 
substitute for two of the four Physics 
electives. Also required are Mathemat- 
ics 18 and 19, and Chemistry 10 and 11 
or 30 and 31. Juniors and seniors ma- 
joring in physics are required to regis- 
ter for four semesters of Physics 49 
(non-credit colloquia). In addition, the 
following cognate courses are recom- 
mended: Mathematics 20 and 21 (these 
are required for the cooperative engi- 
neering program and by most gradu- 
ate schools); Computer Science 15 (re- 
quired for the cooperative engineering 
program); and Philosophy 33, 38, and 
39. A foreign language is recommend- 
ed for students planning on graduate 
study. 

6 ENERGY ALTERNATIVES 

A physicist's definition of work, energy, and 
power. The various energy sources available 
for use, such as fossil fuels, nuclear fission 
and fusion, hydro, solar, wind, and geo- 
thermal. The advantages and disadvantages 
of each energy conversion method, includ- 
ing availability, efficiency, and environmen- 
tal effects. Present areas of energy research 
and possible future developments. Projec- 
tions of possible future energy demands. 
Exercises and experiments in energy collec- 
tion, conversion, and utilization. May or 
summer term only. 

15-16 PHYSICS WITH LIFE SCIENCE 
APPLICATIONS 
The basic concepts, principles, and laws of 
physics are presented in this noncalculus in- 



troductory physics course. Topics include 
mechanics, elastic properties of matter, flu- 
ids, thermodynamics, electricity and mag- 
netism, waves, optics, and radioactivity. 
Many of the examples and problems used to 
illustrate the physics are selected from the 
life sciences. Three hours of lecture, one 
hour of recitation, and one three-hour labo- 
ratory per week. Prerequisite: Mathematics 
17 or consent of instructor. (Credit may not 
be earned for both 15 and 25 or for both 16 
and 26.) 

25-26 INTRODUCTORY PHYSICS WITH 
CALCULUS 

A mathematically rigorous introduction to 
physics designed for majors in physics, as- 
tronomy, chemistry, and mathematics. 
Topics include mechanics, thermodynamics, 
electricity and magnetism, waves, optics, 
and modern physics. Five hours of lecture 
and recitation and one three-hour laborato- 
ry per week. Corequisite: Mathematics 
18-19 (Calculus I and II). (Credit may not be 
earned for both 15 and 25 or for both 16 and 
26.) 

27 ELECTRONICS 

D.C. and A.C. circuit and network theory, 
active devices such as transistors, opera- 
tional amplifiers, integrated circuits, and in- 
troduction to digital electronics will be cov- 
ered. Three lectures and two two-hour labo- 
ratory sessions per week. Prerequisites: 
Physics 16 or 26, and Mathematics 9 or 18 
or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

31 MECHANICS 

Kinematics and dynamics of single particles 
and systems of particles. Rigid bodies. In- 
troduction to the mechanics of continuous 
media. Moving reference frames. Lagrangi- 
an mechanics. Four hours of lecture and 
three hours of laboratory per week. Prereq- 
uisites: Physics 25 (Introductory Physics 
with Calculus I) and Mathematics 19 (Cal- 
culus II). 

32 ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 
The electromagnetic field, electrical poten- 
tial, magnetic field, and electric and mag- 
netic properties of matter. Electric circuits. 
Maxwell's equations. Laboratory includes 
electronics as well as classical electricity and 
magnetism. Four hours of lecture and three 
hours of laboratory per week. Prerequisite: 
Physics 26 (Introductory Physics with Cal- 
culus II). 

33 OPTICS 

Geometrical optics, optical systems, physi- 
cal optics, interference, Fraunhofer and 
Fresnel diffraction, and coherence and 
lasers will be covered. Three hours of lec- 
ture and three hours of laboratory per 
week. Prerequisites: Physics 16 or 26, and 



Mathematics 9 or 18 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Alternate years. 

37 THERMODYNAMICS AND 
STATISTICAL MECHANICS 
Classical thermodynamics will be present- 
ed, showing that the macroscopic properties 
of a system can be specified without a 
knowledge of the microscopic properties of 
the constituents of the system. Then statisti- 
cal mechanics will be developed, showing 
that these same macroscopic properties are 
determined by the microscopic properties. 
Four hours of lecture and recitation per 
week. Prerequisites: Physics 26 (Introduc- 
tory Physics with Calculus II) and Mathe- 
matics 19 (Calculus II). Alternate years. 

38 ATOMIC AND MOLECULAR PHYSICS 

The development of the principles and 
methods of quantum mechanics from the 
earliest evidence of quantization. Structure 
and spectra of atoms and molecules. Exten- 
sion of quantum theory to the solid state. 
Four hours of lecture and recitation and one 
three-hour laboratory per week. Prerequi- 
site: Physics 26 (Introductory Physics with 
Calculus II) and Mathematics 19 (Calculus 
II). Alternate years. 

44 RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY 

A detailed presentation of the special theory 
of relativity, and a short view of the general 
theory and its classical proofs. Man's con- 
cepts of the universe, with particular atten- 
tion to alternative modern cosmological 
models. Discussion of the Cosmological 
Principle, its rationale, and its implications. 
Four hours of lecture per week. Prerequi- 
sites: Astronomy 11 (Principles of Astrono- 
my A) and Physics 25 (Introductory Physics 
with Calculus I). Alternate years. Cross-list- 
ed as Astronomy 44. 

47 NUCLEAR AND PARTICLE PHYSICS 
The course will consider properties of nu- 
clei, nuclear models, radioactivity, nuclear 
reactions (including fission and fusion), and 
properties of elementary particles. The in- 
teractions of nuclear particles with matter 
and the detection of nuclear particles will be 
covered. It will be shown how observed 
phenomena lead to theories on the nature of 
fundamental interactions, how these forces 
act at the smallest measurable distances, 
and what is expected to occur at even small- 
er distances. Four hours of lecture and reci- 
tation and two hours of laboratory per 
week. Prerequisites: either Physics 26 (In- 
troductory Physics with Calculus II) or 
Physics 16 (Physics with Life Science Ap- 
plications II), Mathematics 19, and either 
Physics 38 (Atomic and Molecular Physics) 
or Chemist rv 10. Alternate years. 



25 



48 INTRODUCTION TO QUANTUM 
MECHANICS 

Basic concepts and formulation of quantum 
theory. The free particle, the simple har- 
monic oscillator, the hydrogen atom, and 
central force problems will be discussed. 
Both time-independent and time-dependent 
perturbation theory will be covered. Four 
hours of lecture and recitation. Prerequi- 
site: either Physics 26 /Introductory Physics 
with Calculus II) or Chemistry 31 (Physical 
Chemistry II), and Mathematics 21 (Differ- 
ential Equations). Cross-listed as Chemistry 
39. 

49 ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS 
COLLOQUIA 

This non-credit but required course for jun- 
iors and seniors majoring in astronomy and 
physics offers students a chance to meet and 
hear active scientists in astronomy, physics, 
and related scientific areas talk about their 
own research or professional activities. In 
addition, majors in astronomy and physics 
must present two lectures, one given during 
the junior year and one given during the 
senior year, on the results of a literature sur- 
vey or on individual research. Students ma- 
joring in this department are required to at- 
tend four semesters during the junior and 
senior years. A letter grade will be given 
when the student gives a lecture. Otherwise 
the grade will be S/U. Students in the Coop- 
erative Program in Liberal Arts and Engi- 
neering are required to attend two semesters 
and present one lecture during their junior 
year. One hour per week. Cross-listed as 
Astronomy 49. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Interns in physics work off campus under 
the supervision of professional physicists 
employed by local industries or hospitals. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Independent studies may be undertaken in 
most areas of physics. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



BIOLOGY 

Associate Professors: Angstadt 
(Chairman), Diehl, Zaccaria 

Assistant Professors: Gabriel, 
D. King, Zimmerman 

A major consists of eight biology 
courses, including 10-11, 21, 22, 23, 24, 



and 25. With departmental consent, 
Biology 26 may be substituted for Bi- 
ology 21. Only two courses numbered 
below 20 may count toward the major. 
Departmental internships cannot be 
used to fulfill the eighth required 
course. In addition, three units of 
chemistry and two units of mathemati- 
cal science are required. The chemistry 
requirement must include at least one 
unit of organic chemistry chosen from 
Chemistry 15, 20, or 21. The mathe- 
matical science courses must be chosen 
from Computer Science 15 and Mathe- 
matics 9, 13, 17 or above, or their 
equivalent. Certain specific exceptions 
to the core program will be made for 
three-year students enrolled in cooper- 
ative programs. Such exceptions are 
noted under the particular cooperative 
program described in the last section 
of the Academic Program chapter of 
the catalog. Students interested in 
these programs should contact the 
program director before finalizing 
their individual programs. Credit may 
not be earned for both Biology 1 and 
10 or for both Biology 2 and 11. Con- 
sent of instructor may replace Biology 
10-11 as a prerequisite for all biology 
courses. 

A minor in Biology requires the 
completion of four upper level (20's or 
higher) courses, with their appropriate 
prerequisites. At least two of these 
must be from the 20's series of courses. 
A minor with a special name (e.g., En- 
vironmental Science) may be designed 
by an individual. 



1-2 PRINCIPLES OF BIOLOGY 

An investigation of biological principles, in- 
cluding ecological systems, form and func- 
tion in selected representative organisms 
(especially man), cell theory, molecular biol- 
ogy, reproduction, inheritance, adaptation, 
and evolution. The course is designed pri- 
marily for students not planning to major in 
the biological sciences. Three hours of lec- 
ture and one two-hour laboratory per week. 



FIELD BIOLOGY FOR TEACHERS 

A methods course for students preparing to 
teach biology. Sources and methods of col- 
lecting and preserving various plant and an- 
imal materials. Summer term only. 



5-6 HUMAN BIOLOGY 

An introduction to the physics and chemis- 
try relative to biological systems. Human 
anatomy, physiology, and developmental 
biology will be surveyed. An introduction 
to microbiology with emphasis given to 
host-pathogen relationships and the im- 
mune response. Three hours of lecture and 
one three-hour laboratory per week. Not 
open to students who have received credit 
for Biology 13-14. 

10-11 INTRODUCTION TO BIOLOGY 

An introduction to the study of biology de- 
signed for students planning to major in the 
biological sciences. Major topics considered 
include the origin of life, cellular respiration 
and photosynthesis, genetics, development, 
anatomy and physiology, ecology, behavior, 
and evolution. Three hours of lecture and 
one three-hour laboratory per week. 



13-14 



HUMAN ANATOMY AND 
PHYSIOLOGY 



Using the organ-systems approach, the 
course is an introduction to the human 
body — its anatomy, physiology, and normal 
development — with particular attention to 
structure and function at all levels of its 
biological organization (molecular through 
organismal). Three hours of lecture, one 
hour of discussion, and one three-hour lab 
per week. Not open to students who have 
received credit for Biology 6. Prerequisite: 
Chemistry 15 or Chemistry 20 or consent of 
instructor. 

21 MICROBIOLOGY 

A study of microorganisms. Emphasis is 
given to the identification and physiology 
of microorganisms as well as to their role in 
disease, their economic importance, and in- 
dustrial applications. Three hours of lecture 
and two two-hour laboratory periods per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. Not open 
to students who have received credit for Bi- 
ology 26. 

22 GENETICS 

A general consideration of the principles 
governing inheritance, including treatment 
of classical, molecular, cytological, physio- 
logical, microbial, human, and population 
genetics. Three hours of lecture and two 
two-hour laboratory periods per week. 
Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. 

23 ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY 

The mechanisms and functions of animal 
systems, including the autonomic, endoc- 
rine, digestive, cardio-vascular, respiratory, 
renal, nervous, and reproductive systems. 
Mammalian physiology is stressed. Three 
hours of lecture and one three-hour labora- 
tory per week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. 



26 



24 ECOLOGY 

The study of the principles of ecology with 
emphasis on the role of chemical, physical, 
and biological factors affecting the distribu- 
tion and succession of plant and animal 
populations and communities. Included will 
be field studies of local habitats as well as 
laboratory experimentation. Two hours of 
lecture and one four-hour laboratory per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. 

25 PLANT SCIENCES 

A survey of the structure, development, 
function, classification, and use of plants 
and related organisms. The study will com- 
prise four general topic areas: form, includ- 
ing morphology and anatomy of plants in 
growth and reproduction; function, con- 
centrating on nutrition and metabolism pe- 
culiar to photosynthetic organisms; classifi- 
cation systems and plant identification, and 
human uses of plants. Three hours of lec- 
ture and one three-hour laboratory per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. 

26 MICROBIOLOGY FOR THE HEALTH 
SCIENCES 

A study of microorganisms with emphasis 
given to their taxonomy and their role in 
various aspects of human infectious disease. 
Mechanisms for treating and preventing in- 
fectious diseases will be presented. Labora- 
tory to include diagnostic culture proce- 
dures, antibiotic sensitivity testing, serology, 
anaerobic techniques and a study of hemo- 
lytic reactions. Three hours of lecture and 
four hours of laboratory per week. Prereq- 
uisites: one year of introductory level biolo- 
gy, one year of chemistry or consent of the 
instructor. Not open to students who have 
received credit for Biology 21. 

28 AQUATIC BIOLOGY 

A field-oriented course dealing with 
freshwater ecosystems. Studies will include 
a survey of the plankton, benthos, and fish 
— as well as the physical and chemical char- 
acteristics of water that influence their dis- 
tribution. Several local field trips and a one- 
week trip to a field station will familiarize 
students with the diversity of habitats and 
the techniques of limnologists. May term 
only. Prerequisites: Biology 10-11. 

30 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY OF 
VERTEBRATES 

Detailed examination of the origins, struc- 
ture, and functions of the principal organs 
of the vertebrates. Special attention is given 
to the progressive modification of organs 
from lower to higher vertebrates. Three 
hours of lecture and one four-hour labora- 
tory per week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. 
A Iternate years. 



31 HISTOLOGY 

A study of the basic body tissues and the 
microscopic anatomy of the organs and 
structures of the body which are formed 
from them. Focus is on normal human his- 
tology. Three hours of lecture and one four- 
hour laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Bi- 
ology 10-11. Alternate years. 

32 PLANT AND GREENHOUSE 
MANAGEMENT 

A course concerned with the care of house- 
plants and the management of small green- 
houses. Class time will include lectures, dis- 
cussions, demonstrations, greenhouse exer- 
cises, and field trips to local greenhouses. 
Topics will include the theoretical and prac- 
tical aspects of the care and feeding, propa- 
gation, light and water requirements, and 
disease control for many of the common 
house and greenhouse plants. Prerequisite: 
Biology 1-2 or 10-11. May term only. 

33 ECONOMIC AND 
SYSTEMATIC BOTANY 

Structure and classification of plants with 
emphasis on those species, particularly food 
and drug plants, having significance for 
human affairs. Three hours of lecture and 
one three-hour laboratory per week. Pre- 
requisites: Biology 10-11, Biology 25. Alter- 
nate years. 

34 INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY 
Comparative study of the invertebrate 
phyla with emphasis on phylogeny, physiol- 
ogy, morphology, and ecology. Two three- 
hour lecture/ laboratory periods per week. 
Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. Alternate years. 

35 CELLULAR PHYSIOLOGY 
Physicochemical background of cellular 
function: functions of membrane systems 
and organelles; metabolic pathways; bio- 
chemical and cellular bases of growth, devel- 
opment and responses of organisms. Three 
hours of lecture and one three-hour labora- 
tory per week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11 
and a year of chemistry. Alternate years. 

39 MEDICAL GENETICS 

This course is concerned with the relation- 
ships of heredity to disease. Discussions will 
focus on topics such as chromosomal ab- 
normalities, metabolic variation and dis- 
ease, somatic cell genetics, genetic screen- 
ing, and immunogenetics. Laboratory exer- 
cises will offer practical experiences in ge- 
netic diagnostic techniques. Prerequisite: 
Biology 1-2 or 10-11. May term only. 

40 PARASITOLOGY AND MEDICAL 
ENTOMOLOGY 

The biology of parasites and parasitism. 
Studies on the major groups of animal par- 



asites and anthropod vectors of disease will 
involve taxonomy and life cycles. Emphasis 
will be made on parasites of medical and 
veterinary importance. Three hours of lec- 
ture and one three-hour laboratory per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. Alternate 
years. 

41 VERTEBRATE EMBRYOLOGY 

A study of the development of vertebrates 
from fertilization to the fully formed fetus. 
Particular attention is given to the chick and 
human as representative organisms. Two 
three-hour lecture/ laboratory periods per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. Alternate 
years. 

42 ANIMAL BEHAVIOR 

A study of the causation, function, evolu- 
tion, and biological significance of animal 
behaviors in their normal environment and 
social contexts. Three hours of lecture and 
one four-hour laboratory each week. Pre- 
requisite: Biology 10-11. Alternate years. 

44 BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis is given to the metabolism of car- 
bohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins, 
and nucleic acids; integration of metabo- 
lism; and biochemical control mechanisms, 
including allosteric control, induction, re- 
pression, as well as the various types of in- 
hibitive control mechanisms. Three hours 
of lecture, one three-hour laboratory and 
one hour of arranged work per week. Pre- 
requisite: Chemistry 20-21 or Chemistry 15, 
or consent of instructor. Cross-listed as 
Chemistry 44. Alternate years. 

45 RADIATION BIOLOGY 

A study of the effects of ionizing and non- 
ionizing irradiations on cells, tissues and or- 
ganisms. Consideration will be given to re- 
pair mechanisms and how repair deficien- 
cies elucidate the nature of irradiation dam- 
age. Three hours of lecture and one three- 
hour lab per week. Prerequisites: Biology 
10-11, one year of chemistry. Alternate years. 

46 PLANT ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
A study of plant physiology as a function of 
plant anatomy. Metabolic relationships and 
environmental factors will be examined 
from a background of the structure and de- 
velopment of cells, tissues, organs, and 
whole plants. Three hours of lecture and 
one three-hour laboratory per week. Pre- 
requisites: Biology 10-11, Biology 25. Alter- 
nate years. 

47 IMMUNOLOGY 

The course introduces concepts concerning 
how pathogens cause disease and host de- 
fense mechanisms against infectious dis- 
eases. Characterization of and relationships 
between antigens, haptens, and antibodies 



27 



are presented. Serological assays will in- 
clude: agglutination precipitations, immu- 
nofluorescence, Immunoelectrophoresis, 
and complement fixation. Other topics are: 
immediate and delayed hypersensitivities 
(i.e. allergies such as hay fever and poison 
ivy), immunological renal diseases, immu- 
nohematology (blood groups, etc.), the 
chemistry and function of complement au- 
toimmunity, and organ graft rejection phe- 
nomena. Three hours of lecture, one three- 
hour laboratory, and one hour of arranged 
work per week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. 
Alternate years. 

48 ENDOCRINOLOGY 

This course begins with a survey of the role 
of the endocrine hormones in the integra- 
tion of body functions. This is followed by 
a study of the control of hormone synthesis 
and release, and a consideration of the 
mechanisms by which hormones ac- 
complish their effects on target organs. Two 
three-hour lecture/ laboratory periods per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. Alternate 
years. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Recent samples of internships in the depart- 
ment include ones with the Department of 
Environmental Resources, nuclear medicine 
or rehabilitative therapies at a local hospi- 
tal. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Departmental studies are experimentally or- 
iented and may entail either lab or field 
work. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 
Examples of recent honors projects have in- 
volved stream analysis, gypsy moth re- 
search, drug synthesis and testing. 



BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

Professor: Hollenback 

Assistant Professor: Liebman, Weaver 

(Chairman) 
Instructor: Gordon 
Lecturer: Larrabee 

To graduate with a major in business 
administration, a student must com- 
plete one of two tracks: 

Track I — Business Management 

This track is designed to train stu- 



dents in the functions of today's profit 
and nonprofit organizations. The pro- 
gram provides a well-balanced prepa- 
ration for a wide variety of careers, in- 
cluding general administration, per- 
sonnel administration, commercial 
banking, investments and portfolio 
management, security analysis, corpo- 
rate financial management, general 
marketing, sales, product manage- 
ment, advertising, retail merchandis- 
ing, and production and manufactur- 
ing management. 

Required courses are Business 10-11, 
23, 28-29, 38-39, 40, and 41, and 
Mathematics 13. Business 32 or 43 
may be substituted for Business 29, 
and Business 33 may be substituted for 
Business 39. Accounting 10 may be 
substituted for Business 10 if the stu- 
dent is transferring into the Business 
Administration major, but duplicate 
credit will not be granted. 

Majors are also urged to enroll in 
Economics 10 and 11, Business 35 and 
36, Mathematics 12, and Computer 
Science 15. Majors also are encouraged 
to take a foreign language. The addi- 
tional elective offerings are intended 
to add depth in the areas of finance, 
marketing, and management. 



Track II — Management Science 

This track is designed to train stu- 
dents in the quantitative aspects of 
business administration. It provides 
excellent undergraduate preparation 
for graduate study in management sci- 
ence, operations research, and quanti- 
tative business administration. The 
program also provides a solid prepara- 
tion for careers in production control, 
systems analysis, research, forecast- 
ing, industrial and technical sales and 
any of the functional areas of business 
where quantitative training would be 
an added qualification. 

Required courses are Business 10-11, 
23, 38-39, 46; Economics 10, 11, 41; 
Mathematics 18-19, 12, 13, 38, and 
Computer Science 15. Accounting 10 
may be substituted for Business 10 if 
the student is transferring into the 
business administration major. 



10-11 MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING 

The business firm is a decision-making in- 
stitution adapting to a constantly changing 
environment. Future administrators and 
managers are introduced to their steward- 
ship responsibilities by use of accounting 
and statistical techniques as tools in plan- 
ning and controlling the organization. 

23 QUANTITATIVE BUSINESS ANALYSIS 
Techniques of quantitative analysis useful in 
making business decisions. Topics include: 
decision theory, inventory models, network 
models, queuing, forecasting, and utility. 
Prerequisite: Mathematics 13 or consent of 
instructor. 

28-29 MARKETING MANAGEMENT 

Planning, organization, and control of the 
distribution activities of the firm, and an 
analysis and evaluation of the marketing 
system, its institutions, and processes. Ap- 
plication of marketing principles and the 
development of strategies for specific mar- 
keting problems. Product, channel flow, 
promotion, and pricing strategies explored. 
Readings, cases, and games. 

32 ADVERTISING 

Nature, scope, methods, and effects of pro- 
motion. Techniques of analysis and control 
in the use of advertising and publicity as 
tools in developing business strategy. 

33 INVESTMENTS 

An introduction to the financial sector of 
the economy and the structure and func- 
tions of financial markets and the agencies 
involved; brokerage houses and stock ex- 
changes; the various types of investments 
available. Techniques used to evaluate fi- 
nancial securities. Also covered are recent 
developments in investment theory. 

34 INSURANCE 

Analysis of the major insurance methods of 
overcoming risk, including life, accident, 
health, marine, and social insurance. Fideli- 
ty and surety bonds. Commercial and gov- 
ernment plans. 

35 LEGAL PRINCIPLES I 

Lectures and analysis of cases on the na- 
ture, sources, and fundamentals of the law 
in general, and particularly as relating to 
contracts, agency, and negotiable instru- 
ments. Open only to juniors and seniors. 

36 LEGAL PRINCIPLES II 

Lectures on the fundamentals and history 
of the law relating to legal association, real 
property, wills, and estates. Open only to 
juniors and seniors. 



28 



38-39 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT 

Financial planning, analysis, and control in 
corporations. Development and application 
of financial principles. Financial market, 
profit planning, ratio analysis, working 
capital management, interest rates and 
capital budgeting, financial and operating 
leverage, cost of capital, valuation, divi- 
dend policy, long-and short-term financing, 
leases, mergers, and acquisitions. Prerequi- 
site: Business 11 or Accounting 20, and 
Business 23. 

40 MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS 
Structural characteristics and functional re- 
lationships of a business organization as 
well as the problems encountered in coor- 
dinating the internal resources of a firm. 
Emphasis on administrative efficiency and 
procedures. 

41 BUSINESS POLICIES 

Planning, organization, and control of 
business operations; setting of goals; coor- 
dination of resources, development of poli- 
cies. Analysis of strategic decisions encom- 
passing all areas of a business, and the use 
and analysis of control measures. Emphasis 
on both the internal relationship of various 
elements of production, finance, market- 
ing, and personnel, and the relationship of 
the business entity to external stimuli. Read- 
ings, cases, and games. Prerequisites: Busi- 
ness 23, 28-29, 38-39, and 40, or consent of 
instructor. Seniors only. 

42 PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT 

An introduction to the managerial prob- 
lems of recruiting, selecting, training, and 
retraining the human resources of the firm. 
Emphasis is placed on the interrelationship 
of personnel policies with management ob- 
jectives and philosophies in such areas as 
fringe benefits, wage and salary policies, 
union activities, and health and safety. 

43 RETAIL MANAGEMENT 1 

Planning, organization, and control of the 
retailing firm. Competitive strategy devel- 
opment through store location, layout, ad- 
ministration organization, buying, and 
pricing. Cases, readings, and papers. 

45 MARKETING RESEARCH 

This is a study of the principles and practic- 
es of Marketing Research. The focus is on 
the development and application of Market- 
ing Research Studies. Topics covered include 
selection of a research design, project plan- 
ning and scheduling, data specification and 
gathering, quantitative methods to analyze 
data, interpretation of data, and research 
report writing. Readings, cases, and re- 
search project. Prerequisite: Mathematics 
13, Business 28, or consent of instructor. 



46 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 

An introduction to the planning, organiz- 
ing, and controlling of operations in a pro- 
ductive facility. The course also incor- 
porates quantitative techniques used in pro- 
duction- and operations-management appli- 
cations. Topics include: capacity and layout 
planning, facility locations, job design and 
work measurement, production planning 
and scheduling, inventory and quality con- 
trol. Prerequisite: Business 23 or consent of 
instructor. 

47 CREATIVE ADVERTISING 

A workshop concerned with theme, copy, 
and effective presentation of advertisements 
for print media, radio, and direct mail. Pri- 
marily an exploration of creativity through 
analysis of works of artists and writers with 
application to practical advertising, and tai- 
lored to the interests of individual students. 
May term. 

48 SALES SEMINAR 

The role of selling in the economy. The art of 
creative selling; application of theories from 
the behavioral sciences to selling through the 
analysis of sales situations and techniques. 

49 MANAGING THE SMALL BUSINESS 
How the potential businessman proceeds in 
establishing, operating, and profiting from 
a small business operation. Considered and 
analyzed are such aspects as marketing, 
managing, financing, promoting, insuring, 
establishing, developing, and staffing the 
small retail, wholesale service, and manu- 
facturing firm. May term. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Typical examples are marketing analysis for 
a paper products firm, planning a branch 
store, hotel and real estate management, 
banking and insurance. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Examples of recent studies are: the econom- 
ic impact of a college on a community; a 
marketing strategy for a local firm entering 
the consumer market. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 

A recent project was a study of the evolution 
of anti-trust legislation in the United States. 



CHEMISTRY 

Professors: Hummer, Radspinner 
Associate Professor: Franz (Chairman) 
Part-time Instructor: Baggett 



A major in chemistry consists of 
Chemistry 10-11, 20-21, 30-31, 32 and 
33; Physics 25-26; Mathematics 18, 19 
and one of the following courses: 
Mathematics 13, 20, 21, 32, or Com- 
puter Science 15. Mathematics 20 and 
21 and French or German are strongly 
recommended for students planning 
on graduate study in chemistry. To be 
certified in secondary education, 
chemistry majors must also pass two 
biology courses numbered 10 or higher. 
A minor in chemistry requires com- 
pletion of four courses numbered 20 
or higher; at least one must be taken 
from each of the following groups: 
Group A (20, 21, 40, 41, 44, 45) and 
Group B (26 or 32, 30, 31, 33, 39, 43). 
Named minors in specialized areas 
may be designed by students with de- 
partmental approval. 

8 CHEMICAL PRINCIPLES 

An introduction to the principles of inor- 
ganic chemistry. Topics include atomic and 
molecular structure, nomenclature, gases, 
solutions, acids and bases, kinetics, equili- 
brium, oxidation-reduction, and stoichiom- 
etry. The approach is primarily descriptive, 
with illustrations drawn mostly from the 
health sciences. Along with Chemistry 15, 
this course is designed for those students 
who require only two semesters of chemis- 
try, and is not intended for students plan- 
ning to enroll in chemistry courses num- 
bered 20 or above. Three hours lecture, one 
hour discussion, and one three-hour labo- 
ratory period each week. Prerequisite: high 
school algebra or Math 5. Not open for 
credit to students who have received credit 
for Chemistry 10. 

10 GENERAL CHEMISTRY I 

A quantitative introduction to the concepts 
and models of chemistry. Topics include sto- 
ichiometry, atomic and molecular structure, 
nomenclature, bonding, thermochemistry, 
gases, solutions, and chemical reactions. 
The laboratory introduces the student to 
methods of separation, purification, and 
identification of compounds according to 
their physical properties. This course is de- 
signed for students who plan to major in 
one of the sciences. Three hours lecture, 
one hour discussion and one three-hour lab- 
oratory period each week. Prerequisite: 
placement in Chemistry 10 is determined in 
part by a student's score on the mathematics 
placement examination. Not open for credit 
to students who have received credit for 
Chemistry 8, except by permission of the 
Chemistry Department. 



29 



11 GENERAL CHEMISTRY II 

A continuation of Chemistry 10, with em- 
phasis placed on the foundations of analyti- 
cal, inorganic and physical chemistry. Top- 
ics include kinetics, general and ionic equi- 
libria, acid-base theory, electrochemistry, 
thermodynamics, nuclear chemistry, coor- 
dination chemistry, and descriptive inorgan- 
ic chemistry of selected elements. The labo- 
ratory treats aspects of quantitative and 
qualitative inorganic analysis. Three hours 
lecture, one hour discussion, and one three- 
hour laboratory period each week. Prereq- 
uisite: Chemistry 10, or consent of the 
Chemistry Department. 

15 BRIEF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

A descriptive study of the compounds of 
carbon. This course will illustrate the prin- 
ciples of organic chemistry with material 
relevant to students in medical technology, 
biology, nursing, forestry, education and the 
humanities. Topics include nomenclature, 
alkanes, arenes, functional derivatives, ami- 
no acids and proteins, carbohydrates and 
other naturally occurring compounds. This 
course is designed for students who require 
only one semester of organic chemistry. 
Three hours lecture, one hour discussion, 
and one four-hour laboratory period each 
week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 8 or 10. Not 
open for credit to students who have re- 
ceived credit for Chemistry 20. 

20-21 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

A systematic study of the compounds of 
carbon, including both aliphatic and aro- 
matic series. The laboratory work introduc- 
es the student to simple fundamental meth- 
ods of organic synthesis, isolation, and 
analysis. Three hours lecture and one four- 
hour laboratory period each week. Prereq- 
uisite: Chemistry 11. 

26 CLINICAL ANALYSIS 

A presentation of selected wet -chemical and 
instrumental methods of quantitative analy- 
sis with an orientation toward clinical appli- 
cations in medical technology. Topics in- 
clude: general methods and calculations; 
solutions; titrations; photometric analyses 
(colorimetric, atomic absorption, flame 
emission); electrochemical methods (ion-se- 
lective electrodes, coulomelry), automation. 
Lecture, recitation, and laboratory daily. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 10-11 or consent of 
instructor. May not be taken for credit fol- 
lowing Chemistry 32. May term only. 

30-31 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 

A study of the fundamental principles of 
theoretical chemistry and their applications. 
The laboratory work includes techniques in 
physicochemical measurements. Three 
hours lecture and one four-hour laboratory 
period each week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 



11, Mathematics 19, and one year of physics 
or consent of instructor. 



32 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 

A study of the fundamental methods of 
gravimetric, volumetric, and elementary in- 
strumental analysis together with practice in 
laboratory techniques and calculations of 
these methods. Two hours lecture and two 
three-hour laboratory periods each week. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 11 or consent of in- 
structor. 

33 ADVANCED INORGANIC CHEMISTRY 
A study of modern theories of atomic and 
molecular structure and their relationship to 
the chemistry of selected elements and their 
compounds. Three hours lecture and one 
four-hour laboratory period each week. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 30, Mathematics 
19, and one year of physics or consent of in- 
structor. 

39 INTRODUCTION TO QUANTUM 
MECHANICS 

After presenting the origin, basic concepts, 
and formulation of quantum mechanics 
with emphasis on its physical meaning, the 
free particle, simple harmonic oscillator, 
and central-force problems will be investi- 
gated. Both time-independent and time-de- 
pendent perturbation theory will be covered. 
The elegant operator formalism of quantum 
mechanics will conclude the course. Four 
hours of lecture and recitation. Prerequi- 
sites: Mathematics 21, either Chemistry 31 
or Physics 26, and consent of instructor. 
Cross-listed as Physics 48. 

40 ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

Selected topics, which may include mecha- 
nisms of organic reactions, synthesis, de- 
tailed structure and chemistry of natural 
products, polynuclear hydrocarbons, and 
aromatic heterocyclics. Three hours lecture. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 21. 

41 QUALITATIVE ORGANIC ANALYSIS 
Theory and application of the systematic 
identification of pure organic compounds 
and mixtures. Two hours lecture and two 
three-hour laboratory periods each week. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 21. 

43 ADVANCED ANALYTICAL 
CHEMISTRY 

A study of advanced analytical methods 
with emphasis on chromatographic, electro- 
chemical, and spectroscopic methods of in- 
strumental analysis. Three hours lecture 
and one four-hour laboratory period each 
week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 31 and 32 or 
consent of instructor. 



44 BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis is given to the metabolism of car- 
bohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins, 
and nucleic acids; integration of metabo- 
lism; and biochemical control mechanisms, 
including allosteric control, induction, re- 
pression, as well as the various types of in- 
hibitive control mechanisms. Prerequisite: 
Chemistry 21 or 15 or consent of instructor. 
Cross-listed as Biology 44. 

45 SPECTROSCOPY AND MOLECULAR 
STRUCTURE 

Theory and practice of molecular structure 
determination by spectroscopic methods. 
Three hours lecture. Pre- or co-requisites: 
Chemistry 31, 33, or consent of instructor. 

48 CHEMISTRY COLLOQUIUM 

A seminar in which faculty, students, and 
invited professional chemists discuss their 
own research activities or those of others 
which have appeared in recent chemical lit- 
erature. Prerequisite: Three semesters of 
non-credit Chemistry Colloquium taken 
during the junior and senior years. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

The student will ordinarily work under su- 
pervision in an industrial laboratory and 
submit a written report on his project. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
The student will ordinarily work on a labo- 
ratory research project and will write a the- 
sis on his work. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 
The student will ordinarily work on a labo- 
ratory research project with emphasis being 
on the student's showing initiative and mak- 
ing a scholarly contribution. A thesis will be 
written. 



CRIMINAL Jl STICK 

Assistant Professor: Strauser 
(Coordinator) 

This major is designed to acquaint stu- 
dents with the American criminal-jus- 
tice system and to provide an under- 
standing of the social, psychological, 
philosophical, and political contexts 
within which the system of criminal 
justice functions. Its aim is to develop 
students' intellectual and scientific 
skills in raising and attempting to an- 



30 



swer important questions about the 
system of justice and its place in socie- 
ty. The program offers opportunity 
for intern experience in the field, and 
prepares for careers in the areas of law 
enforcement, probation and parole, 
prisons, and treatment services. 

The major has two tracks. Track I 
prepares for careers in law enforce- 
ment. Track II prepares for careers in 
corrections. 

Track I — Law Enforcement. The 

major consists of 10 courses, distribut- 
ed as follows: 

A. Professional courses in criminal 
justice (three courses) 
Introduction to the Criminal Jus- 
tice System (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 15) 

Introduction to Law Enforcement 
(Sociology and Anthropology 23) 
The American Prison System (So- 
ciology and Anthropology 39) 

B. Courses in the social, psychologi- 
cal, philosophical, and political 
context of the justice system (seven 
courses) 

Criminology (Sociology and An- 
thropology 30) and either Juvenile 
Delinquency (Sociology and An- 
thropology 21) or Racial and Cul- 
tural Minorities (Sociology and 
Anthropology 34) (two courses) 
Abnormal Psychology (Psychology 
16) (one course) 

America as a Civilization (Ameri- 
can Studies 10), Afro- American 
History (History 28) or United 
States Social and Intellectual His- 
tory Since 1877 (History 43) (one 
course) 

Law and Society (Political Science 
35) and Civil Rights and Liberties 
(Political Science 31) (two courses) 
Philosophical Issues in Criminal 
Justice (Philosophy 18) (one course) 

C. Internship or practicum in law en- 
forcement. (Recommended but not 
required for the major) 

Track II — Corrections. The major 
consists of 10 courses, distributed as 
follows: 



A. Professional courses in criminal 
justice (three courses) 
Introduction to the Criminal Jus- 
tice System (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 15) 

The American Prison System (So- 
ciology and Anthropology 39) 
Introduction to Human Services 
(Sociology and Anthropology 22) 

B. Courses in the social, psychologi- 
cal, philosophical, and political 
context of the justice system (seven 
courses) 

Criminology (Sociology and An- 
thropology 30) and either Juvenile 
Delinquency (Sociology and An- 
thropology 21) or Racial and Cul- 
tural Minorities (Sociology and 
Anthropology 34) (two courses) 
Abnormal Psychology (Psychology 
16) (one course) 

America as a Civilization (Ameri- 
can Studies 10), Afro-American 
History (History 28) or United 
States Social and Intellectual His- 
tory Since 1877 (History 43) (one 
course) 

Law and Society (Political Science 
35) and Civil Rights and Liberties 
(Political Science 31) (two courses) 
Philosophical Issues in Criminal 
Justice (Philosophy 18) (one course) 

C. Internship or practicum in correc- 
tions. (Recommended but not re- 
quired for the major.) Prerequi- 
sites: Mathematics 13, Psychology 
31, and Psychology 39. These pre- 
requisites may be waived in certain 
cases by the coordination commit- 
tee. 

Majors should seek advice con- 
cerning course selection from mem- 
bers of the coordinating committee 
and should note course prerequisites 
in planning their programs. 



ECONOMICS 



Professors: Opdahl (Chairman), 
Rabold 



The major has two tracks. Track I is 
designed for the student whose primary 
interest lies in business management; 
Track II is designed for students with 
an interest in graduate work, teaching, 
government or non-business careers, 
and for those with less well-defined in- 
terests. 

Track I — Managerial Economics 

requires: Economics 10, 11, 32, and 41; 
Business 10-11 or Accounting 10 and 
20; Business 38 and 39, plus two elec- 
tives from Economics 20, 31, 35, 37, 
43, and Business 40. Business 33 (In- 
vestments) may be substituted for 
Business 39 (Financial Management 
II). 

Track II — Political Economy re- 
quires: Economics 10, 11, 30, 31, 40, 
and five electives of which three must 
be in economics and two in political 
science, all selected with the advice 
and consent of the student's adviser or 
department chairman. Economics 41 
(Managerial Economics) may be sub- 
stituted for Economics 30 (Intermedi- 
ate Microeconomics). 

In addition, the following courses 
are recommended: all majors — Math 
13 and Business 23; majors planning 
graduate work — Math 12-18; Track II 
majors — Business 10-11. 

A minor in economics requires the 
completion of Economics 10 and 11 
and two other economics courses se- 
lected by the student with prior ap- 
proval of the department chairman. 

2 CONSUMER ECONOMICS 

A course in "family" or "practical" eco- 
nomics, designed to teach students how 
they and their families can be intelligent 
consumers: that is, how they can spend, 
save, and borrow so as to maximize the val- 
ue they receive for the income they have. 
Treats subjects such as intelligent shopping; 
the uses and abuses of credit; investing sav- 
ings; buying insurance, automobiles, and 
houses; medical care costs; estates and wills, 
etc. Alternate years. 

10 PRINCIPLES OF POLITICAL 
ECONOMY I 

Macroeconomics. Deals with problems of 
the economic system as a whole. What in- 
fluences the level of national income and 



31 



employment? What is inflation and why do 
we have it? What is the role of government 
in a modern capitalistic system? How does 
business organize to produce the goods and 
services we demand? How are the American 
financial and banking system organized? 
What is the nature of American unionism? 
What are the elements of government fi- 
nance and fiscal policy? 

11 PRINCIPLES OF POLITICAL 
ECONOMY II 

This course focuses upon microeconomics 
and selected current economic problems. It 
deals with the relatively small units of the 
economy such as the firm and the family. 
Analyzes demand and supply. Discusses 
how business firms decide what and how 
much to produce and how goods and servic- 
es are priced in different types of markets. 
Also considers such problems as economic 
growth, international trade, poverty, dis- 
crimination, ecology, and alternative eco- 
nomic systems. 

20 MONEY AND BANKING 

Covers business fluctuations and monetary 
and fiscal policy; the financial organization 
of society; the banking system; credit insti- 
tutions; capital markets, and international 
financial relations. Prerequisite: Economics 
10 and 11. 

22 ECONOMIC SYSTEMS OF THE WEST 
(CAPITALISM AND SOCIALISM) 

A comparative analysis of the underlying 
ideologies, the basic institutions, and the 
performance of selected economic systems 
extant in the West. Alternate years. 

23 SOVIET-TYPE ECONOMICS 

An analysis of the ideologies, institutions, 
and performance of Soviet-type economics, 
with emphasis upon Marxian theory and 
the economy of the U.S.S.R.; comparison 
of selected Eastern European and Chinese 
approaches to communism. Alternate years. 

24 URBAN PROBLEMS 

The application of economic theory to the 
study of significant social, political, and ec- 
onomic problems associated with urbaniza- 
tion, including poverty, employment, edu- 
cation, crime, health, housing, land use and 
the environment, transportation, and pub- 
lic finance. Analysis of solutions offered. 
A Iternate years. 

25 ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS 

A study of the relationship between envi- 
ronmental decay and economic growth, 
with particular reference to failures of the 
price and property-rights systems; applica- 
tion of cost/benefit analysis, measures 
aimed at the creation of an ecologically 
viable economy. Alternate years. 



30 INTERMEDIATE MICROECONOMICS 

An advanced analysis of contemporary the- 
ory regarding consumer demand, produc- 
tion costs and theory, profit maximization, 
market structures, and the determinants of 
returns to the factors of production. Pre- 
requisite: Economics 10 and 11. Alternate 
years. 

31 INTERMEDIATE MACROECONOMICS 
An advanced analysis of contemporary the- 
ory and practice with regard to business 
fluctuations, national income accounting, 
the determination of income and employ- 
ment levels, and the use of monetary and 
fiscal policy. Prerequisite: Economics 10 
and 11. Alternate years. 

32 GOVERNMENT AND THE ECONOMY 

An analytical survey of government's efforts 
to maintain competition through antitrust 
legislation; to supervise acceptable cases of 
private monopoly through public-utility 
regulation and via means of regulatory 
commissions, and to encourage or restrain 
various types of private economic activities. 
Prerequisite: Economics 10 and 11 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

35 LABOR PROBLEMS 

The history of organized labor in the United 
States, including the structure of unions, 
employers' opposition to unions, the role of 
government in labor-management relations, 
the economic impact of unions. Alternate 
years. 

37 PUBLIC FINANCE 

An analysis of the fiscal economics of the 
public sector, including the development, 
concepts, and theories of public expendi- 
tures, taxation, and debt at all levels of 
American government. Includes also the 
use of fiscal policy as an economic control 
device. Prerequisite: Economics 10 and 11 or 
consent of instructor. 

40 HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT 
A discussion of the origins, development, 
and significance of the economic ideas em- 
bodied in the works of Smith, Marx, 
Schumpeter, Keynes, and others. Prerequi- 
site: Economics 10 and 11 or consent of in- 
structor. A Iternate years. 

41 MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS 

The application of economic theory and 
methodology to the solution of business 
problems. Subjects include: optimizing 
techniques, risk analysis, demand theory, 
production theory, cost theory, linear pro- 
gramming, capital budgeting, market struc- 
tures, and the theory of pricing. Prerequi- 
site: Economics 10 and 11. 



43 INTERNATIONAL TRADE 

A study of the principles, theories, develop- 
ment, and policies concerning international 
economic relations, with particular refer- 
ence to the United States. Subjects covered 
include: U.S. commercial policy and its de- 
velopment, international trade theory, tariffs 
and other protectionist devices, internation- 
al monetary system and its problems, bal- 
ance of payments issues. Alternate years. 
Prerequisite: Economics 10 and 11. 

45 DEVELOPMENT OF 

UNDERDEVELOPED NATIONS 
A study of the theories and problems of cap- 
ital accumulation, allocation of resources, 
technological development, growth, plan- 
ning techniques, and institutions and inter- 
national relations encountered by the devel- 
oping nations. Alternate years. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Typically off campus in business, banking, 
or government, supervised by assigned em- 
ployee of sponsoring organization. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Superior students may select independent 
study in various courses, particularly in 
preparation for graduate school. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



EDUCATION 

Associate Professor: Keesbury 

(Chairman) 
Assistant Professors: Conrad, Doyle 

Lycoming believes that the liberal arts 
provide the best preparation for future 
teachers, thus all education students 
complete a liberal-arts major in addi- 
tion to the certification requirements. 
Students can be certified in elementary 
education or one or more of the fol- 
lowing secondary areas: biology, chem- 
istry, English, French, general science 
(with biology or astronomy/physics 
tracks), German, mathematics, phys- 
ics, social studies, and Spanish. All 
teacher-education programs are ap- 
proved by the Pennsylvania Depart- 
ment of Education, and Pennsylvania 
certificates are recognized in most oth- 
er states whether through reciprocal 



32 



agreements or by transcript evaluation. 

Education 20 and Psychology 38 are 
prerequisites to all other offerings in 
the Department of Education. Educa- 
tion 20 should be taken at least two se- 
mesters before the professional semes- 
ter. 

Students seeking elementary certifi- 
cation must complete Mathematics 7, 
Education 40, 41, 42, and 43 as prereq- 
uisites to the professional semester 
(Education 45, 47, and 48). 

Students interested in the teacher- 
education program should consult 
with a member of the department no 
later than the first semester of the 
sophomore year. Application for the 
professional semester must be made 
before October 1 of the junior year. 
The Department of Education will ad- 
mit to the professional semester those 
applicants who have a minimum cu- 
mulative grade point average of 2.00, 
are in good academic standing, have 
satisfactorily completed the junior 
year participation requirements (sec- 
ondary students only), have paid the 
student teaching fee, and have re- 
ceived a positive recommendation. 
The recommendation will be based 
upon: (a) recommendations from each 
student's major department; (b) rec- 
ommendations from two additional 
faculty outside the Department of Ed- 
ucation; (c) a screening interview con- 
ducted by the department, and (d) a 
writing sample from each student ap- 
plicant. Major departments have dif- 
ferent criteria for their recommenda- 
tions. Therefore, students should con- 
sult with the chairman of their major 
department about those requirements 
as soon as they begin to study for certi- 
fication. 

5 DEVELOPMENTAL SEMINAR 

The course focuses on developing reading 
and study skills which are useful in college. 
Reading comprehension, vocabulary build- 
ing, and critical reading are especially em- 
phasized. Study skills, including time man- 
agement, textbook reading, reading-study 
systems, notetaking, test-taking skills, and 
library reference skills are also stressed. 
Open only to freshmen who are enrolled in 
English 5 or with consent of instructor. One- 
half unit of credit. 



20 INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF 
EDUCATION 

A study of teaching as a profession with 
emphasis on the economic, social, political, 
and religious conditions which influence 
American schools and teachers. Considera- 
tion is given to the school environment, the 
curriculum, and the children with the inten- 
tion that students will examine more ration- 
ally their own motives for entering the pro- 
fession. Prerequisite: Sophomore standing 
or consent of instructor. 

32 INSTRUCTIONAL MEDIA AND 
COMMUNICATIONS 
A study of the value, design, construction, 
and application of the visual and auditory 
aids to learning. Practical experience in the 
handling of audio-visual equipment and 
materials is provided. Application of audio- 
visual techniques. Application of the visual 
and auditory aids to learning. Students will 
plan and carry out actual teaching assign- 
ments utilizing various A-V devices. 

39 PUBLIC SCHOOL CURRICULUM 

An examination of the various curricula of 
the public schools and their relationships to 
current practices. Special attention will be 
given to the meaning and nature of the cur- 
riculum, the desirable outcomes of the cur- 
riculum, conflicting and variant concep- 
tions of curricular content, modern tech- 
niques of curricular construction, criteria 
for the evaluation of curricula, the curricu- 
lum as a teaching instrument. Emphasis will 
be placed upon the curriculum work within 
the teaching field of each individual. 

40 TEACHING LANGUAGE ARTS AND 
CHILDREN'S LITERATURE IN THE 
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

A course designed to consider the principal 
means of communication, oral and written, 
including both practical and creative uses. 
Attention will be given to listening, speak- 
ing, written expression, linguistics and 
grammar, spelling, and handwriting. Stress 
will be placed upon the interrelatedness of 
the language arts. Children's literature will 
be explored as a vehicle for developing crea- 
tive characteristics in children and for en- 
suring an appreciation of the creative writ- 
ing of others. Observation and participation 
in Greater Williamsport elementary schools. 
Prerequisites: Education 20 and Psychology 
38 or consent of instructor. 

41 TEACHING THE SOCIAL STUDIES IN 
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 
Studies and experiences to develop a basic 
understanding of the structure, concepts, 
and processes of anthropology, economics, 
geography, history, political science, and so- 
ciology as they relate to the elementary 
school social-science curriculum. Practical 



applications, demonstrations of methods, 
and the development of integrated teaching 
units using tests, reference books, films, 
and other teaching materials. Observation 
and participation in Greater Williamsport 
elementary schools. Prerequisites: Educa- 
tion 20 and Psychology 38 or consent of in- 
structor. 

42 TEACHING SCIENCE IN THE 
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

Science methods and materials interpreting 
children's science experiences and guiding 
the development of their scientific concepts. 
A study of the science content of the curric- 
ulum, its material, and use. Observation 
and participation in Greater Williamsport 
elementary schools. Prerequisites: Educa- 
tion 20 and Psychology 38 or consent of in- 
structor. 

43 TEACHING READING IN THE 
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

A basic course in the philosophy and ration- 
ale for the implementation of an elementary 
developmental-reading program from kin- 
dergarten through sixth grade. Emphasis is 
upon designing a reading instructional pro- 
gram which reflects the nature of the learn- 
ing process and recognizes principles of 
child development through examination of 
the principles, problems, methods, and ma- 
terials used in elementary reading programs. 
Observation and participation in Greater 
Williamsport elementary schools. Prerequi- 
sites: Psychology 38, Education 20, 40, 41, 
and 42, or consent of instructor. 

45 METHODS OF TEACHING IN THE 
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
The course emphasizes the relationship be- 
tween the theoretical studies of physical, so- 
cial, and cognitive development and the ele- 
mentary classroom environment. Particular 
consideration will be given to the appropri- 
ate age and developmental level of the stu- 
dents with an emphasis upon selection and 
utilization of methods in all the elementary 
subject areas, including art and music. Spe- 
cific attention will be given to the develop- 
ment of strategies for structuring lesson 
plans, for maintaining classroom control, 
and for overall classroom management. Di- 
rect application will be made to the individ- 
ual student-teaching experience. Prerequi- 
sites: Math 7, Education 40, 41, 42, and 43, 
or consent of instructor. 

46 METHODS OF TEACHING IN THE 
SECONDARY SCHOOL (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 

A study of materials, methods, and tech- 
niques of teaching with emphasis on the stu- 
dent's major. Stress is piaced on the selec- 
tion and utilization of visual and auditory 



33 



aids to learning. Students will teach demon- 
stration lessons in the presence of the in- 
structor and the members of the class and 
will observe superior teachers in Greater 
Williamsport secondary schools. Prerequi- 
sites: Education 20, Psychology 38, and the 
participation experience. 

47 PROBLEMS IN CONTEMPORARY 
AMERICAN EDUCATION (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
Seminar in the issues, problems, and 
challenges encountered by teachers in the 
American public schools, especially those 
related to the student-teaching experience. 

48 STUDENT TEACHING IN THE 
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
Two units. Exceeds state-mandated mini- 
mum requirements. Professional laboratory 
experience under the supervision of a select- 
ed cooperating teacher in a public elementa- 
ry school in Greater Williamsport. Organiz- 
es learning experiences. Actual classroom 
experience.* 

49 STUDENT TEACHING IN THE 
SECONDARY SCHOOL (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
Two units. Exceeds state-mandated mini- 
mum requirements. Professional laboratory 
experience under the supervision of a select- 
ed cooperating teacher in a public secon- 
dary school in Greater Williamsport. Or- 
ganized learning experience. Emphasis on 
actual classroom experience, responsibility 
in the guidance program, and out-of-class 
activities.* 

•Student teachers are required to follow the 
calendar of the school district to which they 
are assigned. 



ENGLISH 

Professor: Van Marter 

Associate Professors: Ford, Jensen 

(Chairman), Madden, Rife 
Assistant Professors: Moses, F. Wild 
Visiting Instructor: Hartsock 

A major consists of nine courses not 
including English 3, 5 or 6. These nine 
courses must include English 17, 20, 
21, 22, 23, and one from English 35 
and 36. 

The remaining electives may include 
any course from English 12 and above 
not already taken to satisfy the preced- 



ing requirements. With the consent of 
the Department of English, an appro- 
priate course from the offerings of 
other departments may be substituted 
for an English elective. 

Majors seeking secondary certifica- 
tion in English are required to take 
English 35 and English 38. 

The Department of English partici- 
pates with seven others in the Ameri- 
can Studies interdisciplinary major, in 
which American literature courses 
constitute an important part of the 
American-arts concentration area. 

Because of its emphasis on commu- 
nication skills, a major or a minor in 
English is excellent preparation for a 
wide range of professions. In addition 
to preparing students for graduate 
work or for teaching, a major or a mi- 
nor in English can be valuable for 
those interested in a career in law, min- 
istry, publishing, editing or writing, 
and business, to name a few. 

Two minors are available in the De- 
partment of English. A minor in Eng- 
lish Literature consists of any five lit- 
erature courses numbered 12 and 
above, at least one of which must be 
numbered 30 or above. With prior 
written consent of the department, one 
writing course may be substituted for a 
literature course. A minor in Writing 
consists of English 16 or 17; 18 and 38; 
19 or 28 or 37; and a senior practicum 
in an extended writing project. With 
prior consent of the department, one 
literature course may be substituted 
for a writing course. 

3 BASIC WRITING AND 

COMMUNICATION SKILLS 
Intensive practice in using basic grammar 
and spelling conventions and in writing 
sentences, paragraphs, and essays; major 
emphasis on the development and organiza- 
tion of concepts. This course does not sub- 
stitute for English 5 or 6 and may not be 
taken to satisfy the English distribution re- 
quirement. 

5 WORKSHOP IN DEVELOPMENTAL 
WRITING 

Classroom and laboratory instruction in or- 
ganizing and writing the detailed paragraph 
and illustrative expository theme, with ma- 
jor emphasis on spelling, grammar, and 
sentence structure. Writing assignments and 



classroom exercises designed to ensure mas- 
tery of the student's special problems in ba- 
sic writing. 

One-half unit grade of "S" will be as- 
signed when the student has successfully 
completed all of the work in the course. Re- 
quired of, and limited to, those who have 
not been exempted from English 5. 

6 COMPOSITION 

Extensive practice in either report and eval- 
uative writing or in analytical and argumen- 
tative writing. This may be accomplished by 
taking one of the following options: 

Writing for the Sciences and Business: 
Extensive practice in report and evaluative 
writing, with particular reference to busi- 
ness and technology as human concerns. 

Writing for the Liberal Arts: Extensive 
practice in analytic and argumentative writ- 
ing with particular reference to the humani- 
ties and social sciences. 

NOTE: Although either of these options 
will satisfy the composition requirement. 
Writing for the Sciences and Business would 
be more suitable for the student interested 
in business, in the natural and physical sci- 
ences, and in related professions; whereas 
Writing for the Liberal Arts would be more 
suitable for the student interested in hu- 
manities, in law, and in the social sciences. 

12 INTRODUCTION TO LITERATURE 

An introduction to the study of literature 
designed for the general student and utiliz- 
ing one of the following approaches: major 
literary genres, selected literary masterpiec- 
es, or traditional themes in literature. 

16 WRITING FOR SPECIAL AUDIENCES 
Intensive practice in writing and presenting 
information to various audiences within the 
student's own discipline. Includes training 
in the use of graphics and in basic library re- 
search methods. Prerequisite: a grade of C 
or better in English 6 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Alternate years. 

17 CRITICAL WRITING 

Designed to provide intermediate students 
of literature with the critical skills necessary 
for an understanding of poetry, fiction, dra- 
ma, and film. Intensive reading and exten- 
sive practice in writing the critical essay. Re- 
quired of English majors. 

18 NEWSWRITING FOR THE PRINT 
MEDIA 

Analysis of and practice in the basic forms 
of newswriting: the elements of news, lead, 
style, and structure. Frequent workshop 
sessions for detailed critiques and discus- 
sion of student writing. Alternate years. 



34 



19 NEWSWRITING FOR THE 
BROADCAST MEDIA 

Analysis of and practice in newswriting for 
broadcast: the news story, the newscast, and 
the interview. Frequent workshop sessions 
for critiques of student writing and oral pre- 
sentations. Alternate years. 

20 BRITISH LITERATURE I 

Literary forms, themes, and authors from 
the Anglo-Saxon through the Neo-Classical 
periods. Such writers as Chaucer, Spenser, 
Shakespeare, Milton, Swift, Pope, and 
Johnson; representative works from Beo- 
wulf to Sterne's Sentimental Journey. 

21 BRITISH LITERATURE II 

Literary movements and authors from the 
Romantic Period to the present. Particular 
emphasis on such writers as Blake, Words- 
worth, Shelley, Keats, Tennyson, Browning, 
Arnold, Hardy, Yeats, Eliot. 

22 AMERICAN LITERATURE I 

Brief survey of American literature and 
thought before 1800, followed by more in- 
tensive study of the literature and thought 
of the period 1800-1900. Major focus on the 
works of Emerson, Thoreau, Poe, Haw- 
thorne, Melville, Whitman, Dickinson, and 
Howells. 

23 AMERICAN LITERATURE II 

Major writers, movements, and tendencies 
in American literature during the present 
century. Such forces as naturalism, realism, 
and modernism; such writers as James, 
Dreiser, Hemingway, Faulkner, Frost, Eliot, 
and Stevens. 

24 THE SHORT STORY 

Historical and critical study of the short 
story. Consideration of representative ex- 
amples of the form with emphasis on Amer- 
ican and European writers of the 19th and 
20th centuries. 

25 DEVELOPMENT OF THE NOVEL 
Historical study of the development of the 
novel from the 18th through the 20th cen- 
turies. Novels analyzed both as works of 
prose art and as turning points in the devel- 
opment of the novel. Alternate years. 

26 LITERATURE AND FILM 

The relationship between the conventions 
of literature and film with emphasis on ex- 
amination of representative literary and 
film works. Media comparison to reveal the 
problems of adaptation. 

28 CREATIVE WRITING WORKSHOP: 
FICTION AND POETRY 

A beginning course in the theory and prac- 
tice of writing fiction and poetry. Students 



may concentrate in either genre or both. Al- 
ternate years. 

30 ROMANTIC LITERATURE 

A study of the major poetry and fiction, 
plus some non-fiction prose, written during 
the years, 1789-1832. Emphasis on the work 
of at least three poets, two novelists, and as- 
sorted prose writers. Alternate years. 

31 MODERN FICTION 

Study of the novels and short fiction of 
such major British and American figures as 
Conrad, Forster, Woolf, Lawrence, Joyce, 
Hemingway, Faulkner, Nabokov, and 
Bellow. 

32 MODERN POETRY 

A study of the poetry written in this century, 
beginning with Yeats and Eliot and continu- 
ing through such writers as Frost, Williams, 
Moore, Stevens, Auden, Lowell, Roethke, 
Thomas, Ginsberg, and Rich. Alternate 
years. 

33 COMEDY, TRAGEDY, AND THE 
MODERN THEATRE 

Introduction to the theories of comedy and 
tragedy as those theories help us to deepen 
our response to the theatre. Major focus on 
plays, including musicals, from Ibsen and 
Shaw to the present. Alternate years. 

34 WOMEN AND LITERATURE 

Through an examination — literary, social, 
and historical — of selected British and 
American literature by women, this course 
will seek to identify those elements which 
distinguish women's particular contribution 
to the literary canon. Alternate years. 

35 CHAUCER 

A study of the major works with emphasis 
on The Canterbury Tales and Troilus and 
Criseyde. Some attention to the traditions 
out of which these works arose. Required of 
majors seeking secondary certification in 
English. A Iternate years. 

36 SHAKESPEARE 

A study of representative plays: comedies, 
tragedies, histories, romances. Attention 
given to Shakespeare's life and times. Alter- 
nate years. 

37 PUBLIC RELATIONS AND 
PUBLICITY WRITING 

Communication and publicity techniques in 
the field of public relations focused on writ- 
ing for the media. The news and feature re- 
lease, newsletter, and house organ. Prereq- 
uisite: English 18 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate vears. 



38 LINGUISTICS AND THE ANALYSIS OF 
THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 
Introduction to methods of analyzing spok- 
en and written English. Classroom work 
supported by weekly tutorials, in which the 
student gains practical experience in identi- 
fying, diagnosing, and correcting basic 
communications problems. Required of 
majors seeking secondary certification in 
English. Alternate years. 

40 SELECTED WRITERS 

An intensive study of no more than three 
writers, selected on the basis of student and 
faculty interest. Possible combinations in- 
clude: Frost, Hemingway, and Faulkner; 
O'Connor, Welty, and Porter; Spenser and 
Milton; Hawthorne, Melville, and Dickens; 
Woolf, Forster, and Lawrence; Joyce and 
Yeats. May be repeated for credit if the writ- 
ers are different. Alternate years. 

41 TOPICS IN LITERATURE 

Examination of a literary theme, idea, or 
movement as it appears in one or more 
types of literature and as it cuts across vari- 
ous epochs. Possible topics include: Ameri- 
can Novelists and Poets of the Jazz Age and 
Depression; Religion and Literature; Gothic 
Tradition in American Literature; Realism 
in the Novel; Literary Modernism; Litera- 
ture and Mythology; The Hero in Litera- 
ture. May be repeated for credit if the topic 
is different. Alternate years. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Interns typically work off campus in a pro- 
fession related to their career interest such 
as law, public relations, journalism, and 
others. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Recent studies include The Arthurian Leg- 
end, Shakespeare's Women, D. H. Law- 
rence, and T. S. Eliot: The Social Vision. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 
Recent projects include The Creative Pro- 
cess in Literature and Art and Images of 
Women in the 1890's. 



FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND 
LITERATURES 

Associate Professors: Flam, Maples, 

MacKenzie (Chairman) 
Assistant Professor: Barker, Lewis 

Study of foreign languages and litera- 
tures offers opportunity to explore 



35 



broadly the varieties of human experi- 
ence and thought. It contributes both 
to personal and to international under- 
standing by providing competence in a 
foreign language and a critical ac- 
quaintance with the literature and cul- 
ture of foreign peoples. A major can 
serve as entree to careers in business, 
industry, government, publishing, ed- 
ucation, journalism, social agencies, 
translating, and writing. It prepares 
for graduate work in literature or lin- 
guistics and the international fields of 
politics, commerce, law, health, and 
area studies. 

French, German, and Spanish are 
offered as major fields of study. The 
major consists of at least eight courses 
numbered 10 or above. Majors seeking 
teacher certification and students 
planning to enter graduate school are 
advised to begin study of a second for- 
eign language. The department en- 
courages the development in breadth 
of programs, including allied courses 
from related fields or a second major, 
and also individual or established in- 
terdisciplinary majors combining in- 
terest in several literatures or area or 
cross-cultural studies. For example: 
International Studies, 20th Century 
Studies, the Major in Literature. Ma- 
jors, teacher certification candidates, 
and all students are encouraged to 
spend at least a semester of study 
abroad by applying to one of the many 
programs available. The department 
maintains a file of such programs. 

Courses taught in English: Foreign 
Languages and Literatures 25, French 
28 (Section A) and Spanish 32 (Section 
A). 

Foreign Languages and Literatures 

25 CONTINENTAL LITERATURE 

A study of such major continental authors 
as Cervantes, Dostoevsky, Chekhov, Dante, 
Ibsen, Proust, Gide, Kafka, Hesse, Goethe, 
Sartre, Camus, Brecht, and lonesco. Works 
read in English translation will vary and be 
organized around a different theme or top- 
ic; recent topics have been existentialism, 
modernism, drama, the Weimar era, and 
20th century Scandinavian and German 
prose writers. Prerequisite: None. May be 
repeated for credit with consent of instruc- 



tor. May be accepted toward the English 
major with consent of the Department of 
English. 

38 FOREIGN LANGUAGE: SYSTEMS 
AND PROCESS 

Study of basic linguistic concepts as a tool 
for language learning and teaching. Discus- 
sion and application of language teaching 
techniques, including work in the language 
laboratory. Designed for future teachers of 
one or more languages and normally taken 
in the junior year. Students should arrange 
through the Department of Education to 
fulfill in the same semester the requirements 
of a participation experience in area 
schools. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 

French 

A major consists of a minimum of 
eight courses numbered 10 or above, 
including at least two from 40, 42, 44, 
and 46. All students who wish to be 
certified for teaching French must com- 
plete a major, including courses 21-22 
and Foreign Languages and Literatures 
38 (the latter course with a C or better). 
A minor in French consists of five 
courses at the 10-11 level, or above. 

1-2 ELEMENTARY FRENCH 

The aim of the course is to acquire the fun- 
damentals of the language with a view to 
using them. Regular practice in speaking, 
understanding, and reading. 

10-11 INTERMEDIATE FRENCH 

Review and development of the fundamen- 
tals of the language for immediate use in 
speaking, understanding, and reading with 
a view to building confidence in self- 
expression. Prerequisite: French 2 or equi- 
valent. 

21-22 FRENCH LANGUAGE PRACTICE 

Further training in speaking, listening com- 
prehension, reading, and writing. Includes 
extensive work in grammar. Prerequisite: 
French II or equivalent. 

28 MODERN FRANCE 

A course designed to familiarize students 
with political and social structures and cul- 
tural attitudes in contemporary French soci- 
ety. Materials studied may include such 
documents as newspaper articles, interviews 
and sociological surveys, and readings in 
history, religion, anthropology, and the arts. 
Some attention to the changing education 
system and the family and to events and 
ideas which have shaped French society. 
May include some comparative study of 
France and the United States. 



English Section: Not applicable toward 
satisfying the foreign language distribution 
requirement. Prerequisite: none. 

French Section: Offers readings, papers, 
and interviews in French for students with 
sufficient language skill. Can be applied to- 
ward the foreign language distribution re- 
quirement. Prerequisite: French 21 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

40 FRENCH LITERATURE TO 1800 

Major authors and movements from the 
Medieval, Renaissance, Classical and En- 
lightenment periods. Includes the chanson 
de geste, Villon, Montaigne, Corneille, Ra- 
cine, Moliere, Voltaire and Rousseau. Pre- 
requisite: French 22 or 28, or consent of in- 
structor. Alternate years. 

42 FRENCH LITERATURE OF THE 19TH 
CENTURY 

The dimensions of the Romantic sensibility: 
Musset, Hugo, Vigny, Balzac, Stendhal. 
Realism and Naturalism in the novels of 
Flaubert and Zola. Reaction in the poetry 
of Baudelaire, Rimbaud, Verlaine, and 
Mallarme'. Prerequisite: French 22 or 28 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

44 MODERN FRENCH THEATRE 

Major trends in French drama from the 
turn of the century to Existentialism and the 
Theatre of the Absurd, Giraudoux, Anouilh, 
Sartre, Camus, Beckett lonesco, Genet, 
Adamov, and others. Prerequisite: French 
22 or 28 or consent of instructor. Alternate 
years. 

46 FRENCH LITERATURE OF THE 20TH 
CENTURY 

Representative poets and novelists of mod- 
ern France. Readings selected from the 
works of authors such as Proust, Gide, 
Aragon, Giono, Mauriac, Celine, Malraux, 
Saint-Exupery, Camus, the "new novelists" 
(Robbe-Grillet, Butor, Sarraute, Le Clezio), 
and the poetry of Apollinaire, Valery, the 
Surrealists (Breton, Reverdy, Eluard, Char), 
Saint- John Perse, Supervielle, Prevent, and 
others. Some attention to works of French- 
speaking African writers. Prerequisite: 
French 22 or 28 or consent of instructor. Al- 
ternate years. 

49 ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
Intensive practice for advanced students 
who wish to improve further their spoken 
and written French. Includes work in oral 
comprehension, phonetics, pronunciation, 
oral and written composition, and transla- 
tion. Prerequisite: one course from French 
40, 42, 44, 46 or consent of instructor. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 



36 



80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Examples of recent studies in French in- 
clude translation, existentialism, the classi- 
cal period, enlightenment literature, and 
Saint-ExupeYy. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 

German 

A major consists of a minimum of 
eight courses numbered 10 or above. 
One unit of Foreign Languages and 
Literatures 25 may be included in the 
major with permission. German 40 or 
German 47 is required of all majors. 

All majors who wish to be certified 
for teaching must pass German 33 and 
34. In addition to the eight courses for 
the major they must also pass Foreign 
Languages and Literatures 38 with a 
grade of C or better. All majors are 
urged to enroll in History 41, Music 37, 
Political Science 20 and Theatre 35. 

A minor in German consists of five 
courses at the German 10-11 level, or 
above. 

1-2 ELEMENTARY GERMAN 

Aim of course is to acquire the fundamen- 
tals of the language with a view to using 
them. Regular practice in speaking, under- 
standing, and reading. 

10-11 INTERMEDIATE GERMAN 

Review and development of fundamentals 
of the language for immediate use in speak- 
ing, understanding, and reading with a view 
to building confidence in self-expression. 
Prerequisite: German 2 or equivalent. 

21-22 COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW AND 
LANGUAGE PRACTICE 

A two-semester course designed to review 
and develop skills in speaking, listening, 
writing and reading. Grammar and vocabu- 
lary building are stressed with intensive re- 
view, writing practice and some reading on 
contemporary issues in German-speaking 
countries. As the course progresses, greater 
emphasis is placed on speaking, listening 
comprehension and translation. Some at- 
tention is given to the development of the 
language and its relationship to English. 
Prerequisite: German 11 or equivalent. 

33 SURVEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE 
AND CIVILIZATION I 
Designed to acquaint the student with im- 
portant periods of German literature, repre- 
sentative authors, and major cultural devel- 



opments in Germany, Austria, and Switzer- 
land. The course deals with literature from 
the Early Middle Ages through the 18th cen- 
tury. Prerequisite: German 22 or consent of 
instructor. 

34 SURVEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE 
AND CIVILIZATION II 

Designed to acquaint the student with im- 
portant periods of German literature, repre- 
sentative authors, and major cultural devel- 
opments in Germany, Austria, and Switzer- 
land. The course deals with the literature 
from the 19th century to the present. Pre- 
requisite: German 22 or consent of instruc- 
tor. 

40 GOETHE 

A study of the life and works of Goethe. 
Goethe's significance in the Classical period 
and later. Readings in the major works. Pre- 
requisite: German 33 or 34 or consent of in- 
structor. 

41 CLASSICAL GERMAN DRAMA 

The development of das klassische Drama 
with emphasis on works of Lessing, Goethe, 
and Schiller. Prerequisite: German 33 or 34 
or consent of instructor. 

43 THE NOVELLE 

The German Novelle as a genre relating to 
various literary periods. Prerequisite: Ger- 
man 33 or 34 or consent of instructor. 

45 GERMAN POETRY 

A study of selected poets or the poetry of 
various literary periods. Possible topics in- 
clude: Romantic poetry, Heine, Rilke, and 
Benn. Prerequisite: German 33 or 34 or 
consent of instructor. 

47 CONTEMPORARY GERMAN 
LITERATURE 

Representative poets, novelists and drama- 
tists of contemporary Germany, Switzerland 
and Austria covering the period from 1945 
to the present. Readings selected from 
writers such as: Borchert, Boll, Brecht, 
Benn, Frisch, Diirrenmatt, Bichsel, Han- 
dke, Walser, Grass and others. Prerequisite: 
German 33 or 34 or consent of instructor. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Examples of recent studies in German in- 
clude Classicism, Germanic Mythology, 
Hermann Hesse, the dramas of Frisch, and 
Durrenmatt. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



Greek 

Greek is not offered as a major. A stu- 
dent may, however, take a minor in 
Biblical languages which consists of 
Greek 11, 12; Hebrew 11, 12. 

1-2 NEW TESTAMENT GRAMMAR AND 
READINGS 

Fundamentals of New Testament Greek 
grammar and readings of selected passages 
of the Greek text. Alternate years. 

11 READINGS IN THE SYNOPTIC 
GOSPELS 

A comparative study of the synoptic tradi- 
tion in Greek. Prerequisite: Greek 2 or equi- 
valent. Alternate years. 

12 READINGS IN THE PAULINE 
EPISTLES 

Selected readings from the letters of Paul in 
Greek. Prerequisite: Greek 11 or equivalent. 
Alternate years. 

Hebrew 

Hebrew is not offered as a major. A 
student may, however, take a minor in 
Biblical languages which consists of 
Greek 11, 12; Hebrew 11, 12. 

1-2 OLD TESTAMENT GRAMMAR AND 
READINGS 

Fundamentals of Old Testament Hebrew 
grammar and readings of selected passages 
of the Hebrew text. Alternate years. 

11-12 INTERMEDIATE OLD TESTAMENT 
HEBREW 
A critical reading of the Hebrew text with 
special attention being given to exegetical 
questions. The text read varies from year to 
year. Prerequisite: Hebrew 2 or equivalent. 
Alternate years. 

Spanish 

A major consists of eight courses num- 
bered 10 or above. Foreign Languages 
and Literatures 38 does not count to- 
ward the major. 

All majors who wish to be certified 
for teaching in secondary school must 
pass Foreign Languages and Litera- 
tures 38 (grade of C or better) and 
Spanish 49. 

A minor in Spanish consists of five 
courses at the 10-11 level, or above. 

1-2 ELEMENTARY SPANISH 

Aim of course is to acquire the fundamen- 
tals of the language with a view to using 
them. Regular practice in speaking, under- 
standing, and reading. 



37 



10-11 INTERMEDIATE SPANISH 

Review and development of fundamentals 
of the language for immediate use in speak- 
ing, understanding, and reading with a view 
to building confidence in self-expression. 
Prerequisite: Spanish 2 or equivalent. 

21-22 COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW AND 
LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
This course consists of a thorough review of 
grammar, drills for oral comprehension and 
expression, discussion of readings and the 
writing of compositions. It is designed to 
develop the student's ability to read, write 
and converse in Spanish with confidence. 
Prerequisite: Spanish 11 or equivalent. 

32 HISPANIC CULTURE 

To introduce students to the Spanish-speak- 
ing people — their values, customs and insti- 
tutions, with reference to the geographic 
and historical forces governing present-day 
Spain and Spanish America. Prerequisite: 
Spanish 22 or consent of instructor. A ller- 
nate years. 

33 SURVEY OF SPANISH LITERATURE 
AND CIVILIZATION 

Designed to acquaint the student with im- 
portant periods of Spanish literature, repre- 
sentative authors, and major socio-econom- 
ic developments. The course deals with the 
literature from the beginning to the present. 
Prerequisite: Spanish 22 or consent of in- 
structor. A llernate years. 

35 SURVEY OF SPANISH-AMERICAN 
LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION 
Designed to acquaint the student with im- 
portant periods of Spanish-American litera- 
ture, representative authors, and major so- 
cio-economic developments. The course 
deals with the literature, especially the essay 
and poetry, from the 16th century to the 
present. Prerequisite: Spanish 22 or consent 
of instructor. Alternate years. 

44 SPANISH LITERATURE OF THE 
GOLDEN AGE 

A study of representative works and princi- 
pal literary figures in the poetry, prose, and 
drama of the 16th and 17th centuries. Pre- 
requisite: Spanish 33, 35, or consent of in- 
structor. 

45 MODERN HISPANIC LITERATURE 
Readings of important works of drama, po- 
etry, and prose from the major periods of 
19th and 20th century Spanish and Latin- 
American literature. Prerequisite: Spanish 
33, 35, or consent of instructor. 

49 ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
Intensive practice for advanced students 
who wish to improve further their spoken 
and written Spanish. Includes work in oral 
comprehension, pronunciation, oral and 



written composition, and translation. Pre- 
requisite: One Spanish course at the 30's 
level or consent of instructor. Alternate 
years. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Recent studies include literary, linguistic, 
and cultural topics and themes such as ur- 
ban problems as reflected in the modern 
novel. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



HISTORY 

Associate Professors: Larson 

(Chairman), Piper 
Assistant Professor: Morris 

A major consists of 10 courses, includ- 
ing 10, 11, and 45. At least seven cours- 
es must be taken in the department. 
The following courses may be counted 
toward fulfilling the major require- 
ments: American Studies 10, Political 
Science 39, Religion 26 and 28. Other 
appropriate courses outside the de- 
partment may be counted upon de- 
partmental approval. For history ma- 
jors who student teach in history, the 
major consists of nine courses. In ad- 
dition to the courses listed below, spe- 
cial courses, independent study, and 
honors are available. Special courses 
recently taught and anticipated include 
a biographical study of European 
Monarchs, the European Left, the In- 
dustrialization and Urbanization of 
Modern Europe, Utopian Movements 
in America, the Peace Movement in 
America, The Vietnam War, and 
American Legal History. History ma- 
jors are encouraged to participate in 
the internship program. 

Three minors are offered by the De- 
partment of History. The following 
courses are required to complete a mi- 
nor in American History: History 12, 
13, and four courses in American his- 
tory numbered 20 and above. A minor 
in European History requires the com- 
pletion of History 10, 11, and four 
courses in European history numbered 
20 and above. To obtain a minor in 



History (without national or geo- 
graphic designation), a student must 
complete seven courses in history, at 
least two in American and two in 
European. 

10 EUROPE 1500-1815 

An examination of the political, social, cul- 
tural, and intellectual history of Europe and 
its relations with other areas of the world 
from 1500 to 1815. 

11 EUROPE 1815-Present 

An examination of the political, social, cul- 
tural, and intellectual history of Europe and 
its relations with other areas of the world 
from 1815 to the present. 

12 UNITED STATES HISTORY 1607-1877 

A study of the men, measures, and move- 
ments which have been significant in the de- 
velopment of the United Stales between 
1607 and 1877. Attention is paid to the prob- 
lems of minority groups as well as to major- 
ity and national influences. 

13 UNITED STATES HISTORY 1877-Present 
A study of the men, measures, and move- 
ments which have been significant in the de- 
velopment of the United States since 1877. 
Attention is paid to the problems of minori- 
ty groups as well as to majority and nation- 
al influences. 

20 ANCIENT HISTORY 

A study of the ancient western world, in- 
cluding the foundations of the western tra- 
dition in Greece, the emergence and expan- 
sion of the Roman state, its experience as a 
republic, and its transformation into the 
Empire. The course will focus on the social 
and intellectual life of Greece and Rome as 
well as political and economic changes. Al- 
ternate years. 

22 MEDIEVAL EUROPE AND ITS 
NEIGHBORS 

The history of Europe from the dissolution 
of the Roman Empire to the mid-15th cen- 
tury. The course will deal with the growing 
estrangement of western Catholic Europe 
from the Byzantium and Islam, culminating 
in the Crusades; the rise of the Islamic Em- 
pire and its later fragmentation; the devel- 
opment and growth of feudalism; the con- 
flict of empire and papacy, and the rise of 
the towns. Alternate years. 

23 EUROPE IN THE ERA OF THE 
WORLD WARS 

An intensive study of the political, econom- 
ic, social, and cultural history of Europe 
from 1900-1945. Topics include the rise of 
irrationalism, the origins of the First World 
War, the Communist and Fascist Revolu- 
tions, and the attempts to preserve peace 



38 



before 1939. Prerequisite: History 11 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

24 CONTEMPORARY EUROPE 

An intensive study of the political, econom- 
ic, social, and cultural history of Europe 
since 1945. Topics include the post-war eco- 
nomic recovery of Europe, the Sovietization 
of Eastern Europe, the origins of the Cold 
War, decolonization, and the flowering of 
the welfare state. Prerequisite: History 11 or 
consent of instructor. 

25 FRENCH REVOLUTION AND 
NAPOLEON 

An analysis of the political, social, and in- 
tellectual background of the French Revolu- 
tion, a survey of the course of revolutionary 
development, and an estimate of the results 
of the Napoleonic conquests and adminis- 
tration. Prerequisite: History 10 or consent 
of instructor. Alternate years. 

26 COLONIAL AMERICA AND THE 
REVOLUTIONARY ERA 

The establishment of British settlements on 
the American continent, their history as col- 
onies, the causes and events of the Ameri- 
can Revolution, the critical period following 
independence, and proposal and adoption 
of the United States Constitution. Alternate 



27 20TH CENTURY UNITED STATES 
This course begins with the Progressive Era 
and includes the political, economic, and so- 
cial developments in the 20th century. Em- 
phasis will be placed on the domestic and 
international demands which have faced the 
United States in the period following World 
War II. 

28 AFRO-AMERICAN HISTORY 

A study of the experiences and participation 
of Afro-Americans in the United States. 
The course includes historical experiences 
such as slavery, abolition, reconstruction, 
and urbanization. It also raises the issue of 
the development and growth of white rac- 
ism, and the effect of this racism on con- 
temporary Afro-American social, intellec- 
tual, and political life. Alternate years. 

29 LATIN AMERICAN HISTORY 

An examination of the native civilization, 
the age of discovery and conquest, Spanish 
colonial policy, the independence move- 
ments, and the development of modern in- 
stitutions and governments in Latin Ameri- 
ca. Alternate years. 

31 HISTORY OF WORLD WAR 11 

A comprehensive examination of World 
War II emphasizing the effect of ideological, 
economic and political forces on the formu- 
lation of military strategy and the conduct 



of operation; the nature and extent of the 
expansion of government powers; and the 
experience of war from the perspective of 
ordinary civilians and military alike. Does 
not count toward distribution. 

33 CONFLICT IN WESTERN 
CIVILIZATION 

An in-depth study of the changing nature of 
war and its relationship to the development 
of Western Civilization since the end of the 
Middle Ages. Particular emphasis will be 
placed on the role of war in the development 
of the modern nation state and the origins 
and nature of total war. Alternate years. 

34 DIPLOMATIC HISTORY OF EUROPE 
SINCE 1789 

A survey of the development of the Europe- 
an-states system and the relations between 
the European states since the beginning of 
the French Revolution. Prerequisite: Histo- 
ry 11 or consent of instructor. Alternate 
years. 

35 THE CRISIS OF LIBERALISM AND 
NATIONALISM, EUROPE 1848-1870 
An in-depth investigation of the crucial 
"Middle Years" of 19th century Europe 
from the revolutions of 1848 through the 
unification of Germany. The course centers 
on the struggles for power within the major 
states of Europe at this time, and how the 
vehicle of nationalism was used to bring 
about one type of solution. Alternate years. 

37 AGE OF JEFFERSON AND JACKSON 

The theme of the course is the emergence of 
the political and social characteristics that 
shaped modern America. The personalities 
of Thomas Jefferson, John Marshall, John 
Randolph, Aaron Burr, and Andrew Jack- 
son receive special attention. Special consid- 
eration is given to the first and second party 
systems, the decline in community cohesive- 
ness, the westward movement, and the 
growing importance of the family as a unit 
of social organization. Alternate years. 

38 CIVIL WAR AND RECONSTRUCTION 
The problems and events leading to war, the 
political and military history of the war, and 
the bitter aftermath to the Compromise of 
1877. 

39 20TH CENTURY UNITED STATES 
RELIGION 

The study of historical and cultural develop- 
ments in American society which relates to 
religion or what is commonly called relig- 
ion. This involves consideration of the insti- 
tutional and intellectual development of 
several faith groups as well as discussion of 
certain problems, such as the persistence of 
religious bigotry and the changing modes of 
church-state relationships. Alternate years. 



40 HISTORY OF RENAISSANCE 
THOUGHT 

A study of the classical, humanist, and 
scholastic elements involved in the develop- 
ment of the Renaissance outlook on views 
and values, both in Italy and in Northern 
Europe. The various combinations of social 
and political circumstances which constitute 
the historical context of these intellectual 
developments will be noted. Alternate years. 

41 HISTORY OF REFORMATION 
THOUGHT 

A study of the ideas and systems of ideas 
propounded prior to the Reformation, but 
which are historically related to its incep- 
tion, and of the ideas and systems of ideas 
involved in the formulation of the major 
Reformation Protestant traditions, and in 
the Catholic Reformation. Included are the 
ideas of the humanists of the Reformation 
Era. Alternate years. 

42 UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND 
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY TO 1877 

A study of the social and intellectual experi- 
ence of the United States from its colonial 
antecedents through reconstruction. Among 
the topics considered are Puritanism, trans- 
cendentalism, community life and organiza- 
tion, education, and social-reform move- 
ments. Prerequisites: two courses from His- 
tory 12, 13, 28, or consent of instructor. 

43 UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND 
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY SINCE 1877 
A study of the social and intellectual experi- 
ence of the United States from reconstruc- 
tion to the present day. Among the topics 
considered are social Darwinism, pragma- 
tism, community life and organization, ed- 
ucation and social reform movements. Pre- 
requisites: two courses from History 12, 13, 
28 or consent of instructor. 

45 HISTORICAL METHODS 

This course focuses on the nature and mean- 
ing of history. It will open to the student 
different historical approaches and will pro- 
vide the opportunity to explore these ap- 
proaches in terms of particular topics and 
periods. Majors are required to enroll in 
this course in either their junior or senior 
year. The course is open to other students 
who have two courses in history or consent 
of instructor. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Typically, history interns work for local gov- 
ernment agencies engaged in historical pro- 
jects or for the Lycoming County Historical 
Museum. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Recent topics include studies of the immi- 
gration of American blacks, political dis- 



39 



sension in the Weimer Republic, Indian re- 
lations before the American Revolution, 
and the history of Lycoming County. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



INTERNATIONAL STUDIES 

Associate Professor: Larson 
(Coordinator) 

The major is designed to integrate an 
understanding of the changing social, 
political, and historical environment 
of Europe today with study of Europe 
in its relations to the rest of the world, 
particularly the United States. It stress- 
es the international relations of the 
North Atlantic community and offers 
the student opportunity to emphasize 
either European studies or internation- 
al relations. The program provides 
multiple perspectives on the cultural 
traits that shape popular attitudes and 
institutions. Study of a single country 
is included as a data-base for compari- 
sons, and study of its language as a ba- 
sis for direct communication with its 
people. 

The program is intended to prepare 
a student either for graduate study or 
for careers which have an internation- 
al component. International obliga- 
tions are increasingly assumed by gov- 
ernment agencies and a wide range of 
business, social, religious, and educa- 
tional organizations. Opportunities 
are found in the fields of journalism, 
publishing, communications, trade, 
banking, advertising, management, 
and tourism. The program also offers 
flexible career preparation in a variety 
of essential skills, such as research, 
data analysis, report writing, language 
skills, and the awareness necessary for 
dealing with people and institutions of 
another culture. Preparation for relat- 
ed careers can be obtained through the 
guided selection of courses outside the 
major in the areas of business, eco- 



nomics, foreign languages and litera- 
tures, government, history, and inter- 
national relations or through a second 
major. Students should design their 
programs in consultation with mem- 
bers of the Committee on Internation- 
al Studies. 

By completing six to eight addition- 
al courses in the social sciences (which 
include those courses needed to com- 
plete a major in economics, history, 
political science, or sociology/anthro- 
pology) and the required program in 
education, students can be certified 
for the teacher education program in 
social studies. By completing a major 
in the foreign language (five or more 
courses) and the education program, 
students can be certified to teach that 
language. The International Studies 
program also encourages participation 
in study-abroad programs, as well as 
the Washington and United Nations 
semesters. 

The major includes 11 courses select- 
ed as follows: 

International Relations Courses — 

Four or two courses (if two, then four 
must be taken from Area Courses). 
Courses within this group are designed 
to provide a basic understanding of 
the international system and of Eu- 
rope's relations with the rest of the 
world. Political Science 25 is required. 

Political Science 25: World Politics 
Economics 43: International Trade 
History 34: European Diplomatic History 
Political Science 39: American Foreign Pol- 
icy 

Area Courses — Four or two courses 
(if two, then four must be taken from 
International Relations Courses). 
Courses within this group are designed 
to provide a basic understanding of 
the European political, social, and ec- 
onomic environment. History 11 and 
Economics 22 are required. 

History 11: Europe 1815-Present 
Economics 22: Economic Systems of the 

West 
Political Science 20: European Politics 
History 23: Europe in the Era of the World 

Wars 
History 24: Contemporary Europe 



National Courses 

Language —Two courses in one lan- 
guage. 

French 21, plus one course numbered 22 or 

above (except 28) 
German 21, plus one course numbered 22 or 

above 
Spanish 21, plus one course numbered 22 or 

above 

Country — One course. The student 
must select, according to his or her 
language preparation, one Europe- 
an country which will serve as a spe- 
cial interest area throughout the 
program. The country selected will 
serve as the base for individual pro- 
jects in the major courses wherever 
possible. 

France — French 28: Modern France 
Germany — History 80: Topics in German 

History 
Spain — Spanish 32: Hispanic Culture 

Elective Course — One course which 
should involve further study of some 
aspect of the program. Appropriate 
courses are any area or international re- 
lations courses not yet taken, History 
10, 32, 33; Economics 23, 45; Political 
Science 26, 27, 38, 46; related foreign- 
literature courses counting toward the 
fine-arts requirement and internships. 

49 SENIOR SEMINAR 

A one-semester seminar, taken in the senior 
year, in which students and several faculty 
members will pursue an integrative topic in 
the field of international studies. Students 
will work to some extent independently. 
Guest speakers will be invited. The seminar 
will be open to qualified persons from out- 
side the major and the College. Prerequisite- 
consent of instructor. 



LITERATURE 

Associate Professor: Maples 
(Coordinator) 

This major recognizes literature as a 
distinct discipline beyond national 
boundaries and combines the study of 
any two literatures in the areas of Eng- 



40 



lish, French, German, and Spanish. 
Students can thus explore two litera- 
tures widely and intensively at the up- 
per levels of course offerings within 
each of the respective departments 
while developing and applying skills in 
foreign languages. The major prepares 
students for graduate study in either of 
the two literatures studies or in com- 
parative literature. 

The major requires at least six litera- 
ture courses, equally divided between 
the two literatures concerned. The six 
must be at the advanced level as deter- 
mined in consultation with advisers 
(normally courses numbered 20 and 
above in English and 40 and above in 
foreign languages). In general, two of 
the advanced courses in each literature 
should be period courses. The third 
course, taken either as a regular course 
or an independent study, may have as 
its subject another period, a particular 
author, genre, or literary theme, or 
some other unifying approach or idea. 
Beyond these six, the major must in- 
clude at least two additional courses 
from among those counting toward a 
major in the departments involved. 
Any prerequisite courses in the respec- 
tive departments (for example: English 
6, French 21-22 or 28, German 21-22, 
Spanish 21-22) should be taken during 
the freshman year. Students should de- 
sign their programs in consultation 
with a faculty member from each of 
the literatures concerned. Programs 
for the major must be approved by the 
departments involved. 



MASS COMMUNICATION 

Instructor: Nason (Chairman) 

The major in mass communication 
combines a liberal arts foundation 
with a professional sequence through a 
selection of courses from the Depart- 
ments of Art, Business Administra- 
tion, English, Political Science, Psy- 
chology, Sociology and Anthropology, 
and Mass Communication. It also 
draws upon specialized courses from 
the graphic arts department of the Wil- 



liamsport Area Community College. 
Students completing the program are 
qualified to pursue either career op- 
tions or graduate study in mass com- 
munication, advertising, broadcasting, 
journalism, or public relations. 

Students majoring in mass communi- 
cation must complete the Core Curric- 
ulum and one sequence, as well as the 
College distribution requirements. 

A minor in Mass Communication 
consists of Mass Comm 10 and any 
four of the following courses: Mass 
Comm 11, 24, 27, 28, 30, 31. 

I. THE CORE CURRICULUM 

REQUIRED OF ALL STUDENTS 

Two Theory Courses 

Mass Comm 10 Introduction to Mass 

Communication 
Mass Comm 30 Theories of Mass 

Communication 

A Media Regulation Course 

Mass Comm 31 Mass Media Law and 
Regulation 

A Production Course (Choice of one. Cer- 
tain of these courses are required in spe- 
cific sequences.) 

GC0 511 Layout and Design 

GCO 512 Typographic Composition 

Mass Comm 24 Television Production 

A Writing Course (Choice of one. Certain 
of these courses are required in specific 
sequences.) 

Eng 16 Writing for Special Audiences 
Eng 18 Newswriting for the Print Media 
Eng 19 Newswriting for the Broadcast 

Media 

Pol Sci 34 Political Newswriting 

Mass Comm 27 Scriptwriting for Radio 

and Television 

A Research Course (Choice of one. Certain 
of these courses are required in specific 
sequences.) 

Pol Sci 48 Public Opinion and Polling 
Soc 47 Research Methods in Sociology 
Psy 32 Sensory Experimental Psychology 
Psy 24 Social Psychology 

Bus 45 Marketing Research 

An applied Media Experience Course 
(Choice of one.) 

Mass Comm 48-49 Practicum 

Mass Comm 70-79 Internship 

Mass Comm 80-89 Independent Study 

NOTE: Mass Communication core courses 
may be utilized both to meet the core re- 



quirements and to complete sequence re- 
quirements. Since some core courses must 
be used to meet sequence requirements stu- 
dents should review carefully sequence re- 
quirements in selecting courses. 

II. SEQUENCE REQUIREMENTS 

Mass Communication majors must com- 
plete at least one sequence. All sequence re- 
quirements are in addition to the core cur- 
riculum but the same course may be used to 
meet the core requirements as well as the re- 
quirements of sequences. 

Advertising Sequence: 

Bus 28-29 Marketing Management 

Bus 32 Advertising 

Pol Sci 48 Public Opinion and Polling or 
Bus 45 Marketing Research or 

Soc 47 Research Methods in Sociology 
GCO 511 Layout and Design 

GCO 512 Typographic Composition 

Mass Comm 11 Oral Communication 
Art 27 Photography I or 

Art 15 Two-dimensional Design 

Bus 47 Creative Advertising is 

strongly recommended, though 
not required, for this sequence. 

Broadcasting Sequence: 

Eng 19 Newswriting for Broadcast Media 

Pol Sci 34 Political Newswriting 

Mass Comm 11 Oral Communication 

Mass Comm 31 Mass Media Law and 

Regulation 

Mass Comm 28 Radio Programming 

and Production 

Mass Comm 24 Television Production 

Mass Comm 27 Scripwriting for Radio 

and Television 

Eng 26 Film and Literature or 

Thea 11 Introduction to Film 

Journalism Sequence: 
Eng 16 Writing for Special Audiences 
Eng 17 Critical Writing 

Eng 18 Newswriting for Print Media 

Pol Sci 34 Political Newswriting 

Pol Sci 11 State and Local Government 
Pol Sci 32 Politics of Cities and Suburbs 

or 
Soc 34 Racial and Cultural Minorities 
Pol Sci 48 Public Opinion and Polling 
Art 27 Photography I 

GCO 511 Typographic Composition 

Public Relations Sequence: 
Eng 16 Writing for Special Audiences 
Eng 18 Newswriting for Print Media 

Eng 37 Public Relations and Publicity 
Bus 28-29 Marketing Management 

Pol Sci 48 Public Opinion and Polling or 
Soc 47 Research Methods in Sociology 
Art 27 Photography I 

Mass Comm 24 Television Production 
Mass Comm 11 Oral Communication 



41 



10 INTRODUCTION TO MASS 
COMMUNICATION 

Theories of the process of mass communi- 
cation and introduction to the mass media; 
attention will be given to problems of cen- 
sorship and media ethics. Analysis of the 
mass media's impact on society; emphasis 
will be placed on the social, psychological, 
and political implications of the media's 
shaping influence on man and institutions. 

11 FUNDAMENTALS OF ORAL 
COMMUNICATION 

The dynamics of oral communication. The 
development of elementary principles of 
simple oral communication through lec- 
tures, prepared assignments in speaking, 
and informal class exercises. Utilizes video- 
tape sequences for feedback to students. 

24 TELEVISION PRODUCTION 

Technical, aesthetic, organizational, and 
business aspects of video programs. Study 
and use of basic equipment to produce stan- 
dard formats on videotape. 

27 SCRIPWRITING FOR RADIO AND 
TELEVISION 

Analysis of differences between radio and 
television writing requirements, station for- 
mats, standard program forms, script stan- 
dards, writing and criticism. Alternate 
years. 

28 RADIO PROGRAMMING AND 
PRODUCTION 

Contemporary broadcast programming 
techniques including station scheduling, 
program development and analysis, and im- 
plementation in real and hypothetical situa- 
tions. Emphasis on management functions. 
A tternate years. 

30 THEORIES OF MASS 
COMMUNICATION 

An examination and analysis of current the- 
ories dealing with the sources, receivers, and 
systems of mass communication and the na- 
ture and function of the media audience, its 
attitudes and behaviors. 

31 MASS MEDIA LAW AND REGULATION 
An examination of the legal structure and 
the system by which mass communication is 
controlled in this society. The forces which 
shape, influence, and make policy will be 
considered. Cross-listed as Political Science 
36. 

48-49 PRACTICUM IN MASS 
COMMUNICATION 
Utilization of mass communication princi- 
ples, techniques, and skills in an applied set- 
ting through work experience in a commu- 
nication agency or organization. This expe- 



rience is coordinated with regular class 
meetings to analyze and evaluate relation- 
ships between theory and practice. Prereq- 
uisite: upper division status and consent of 
instructor. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Interns usually work off campus in a field 
related to their communication sequence; 
some may work with the campus radio sta- 
tion. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Studies involve research related to the com- 
munication sequence of the student. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 

Through special arrangement, the following 
courses offered at the Williamsport Area 
Community College are available to stu- 
dents in the mass communication major on- 
ly. The WACC courses are taken as part of 
the student's semester schedule and are 
listed with Lycoming offerings during regis- 
tration periods. 

Graphic Arts 

511 LAYOUT AND DESIGN 

Analysis of materials, tools, and techniques 
used in preparation of copy for reproduc- 
tion; paste-up and color separation over- 
lays. 4 cr. 

512 TYPOGRAPHIC COMPOSITION 
Fundamentals of typesetting. Theory and 
practice in the care and use of composing 
machines, both hot (mechanical) and cold 
(photo). 4 cr. 

521 PROCESS CAMERA 

Concepts and techniques of darkroom pro- 
cedure for reproduction of line and halftone 
copy on process camera. 4 cr. 



MAIHKMAIK AI SCIKNCKS 

Associate Professors: Getchell, Haley 

(Chairman) 
Assistant Professors: DeSilva, 

Sprechini 
Instructor: Troxel 
Part-time Instructor: Dotzel 

The Department of Mathematical Sci- 
ences offers major programs in com- 
puter science and mathematics. 



Computer Science 

A major in computer science consists 
of 11 courses: Mathematics 16, 18, and 
19, and Computer Science 15, 26, 27, 
44, 45, and three other computer sci- 
ence courses numbered 30 or above, 
one of which must be 31 or 37. Recom- 
mended extradepartmental courses: 
Physics 27, Philosophy 25, and Psy- 
chology 37. 

A minor in computer science con- 
sists of Computer Science 26, 27, and 
two other computer science courses 
numbered 20 or above. 

15 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER 
SCIENCE 

Introduction to programming, utilizing BA- 
SIC and FORTRAN IV. Topics include pro- 
gram structure, computer configuration, 
memory allocation, algorithms, and appli- 
cations. Includes laboratory experience on 
the PDP11/70 computer. Prerequisite: cred- 
it for or exemption from Mathematics 5. 

26 PRINCIPLES OF ADVANCED 
PROGRAMMING 

Principles of effective programming using 
PASCAL, including structured program- 
ming, stepwise refinement, assertion prov- 
ing, style, debugging, control structure, de- 
cision tables, finite state machines, recur- 
sion, and encoding. Prerequisite: a grade of 
C or better in Computer Science IS or con- 
sent of instructor. 

27 DATA STRUCTURES 
Representation of data and algorithms asso- 
ciated with data structures. Topics include 
representation of lists, trees, graphs and 
strings, algorithms for searching and sort- 
ing. Prerequisite: a grade of C or better in 
Computer Science 26 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Corequisite: Mathematics 16. 

31 INTRODUCTION TO NUMERICAL 
ANALYSIS 

Study and analysis of tabulated data leading 
to interpolation, numerical integration, nu- 
merical solutions of differential equations, 
and systems of equations. Prerequisite: 
Computer Science 15 and Mathematics 19. 
Alternate years. Cross- listed as Mathemat- 
ics 31. 

37 COMPUTATIONAL MATRIX ALGEBRA 
An introduction to some of the algorithms 
which have been developed for producing 
numerical solutions to such linear algebraic- 
problems as solving systems of linear equa- 
tions, inverting matrices, computing the ei- 
genvalues of a matrix, and solving the linear 
least-squares problem. Prerequisite: Com- 



42 



puter Science 15 and Mathematics 19 or con- 
sent of instructor. Alternate years. Cross- 
listed as Mathematics 37. 

39 DATABASE SYSTEMS 

External storage structures, hashed files, in- 
dexed files; relational, network, and hierar- 
chical data models; relational algebra and 
the relational calculus; design theory for re- 
lational databases; query optimization; 
concurrent operations; database protection. 
Prerequisite: Computer Science 27. Alter- 
nate years. 

44 MACHINE LANGUAGE 

Principles of machine language program- 
ming; computer organization and represen- 
tation of numbers, strings, arrays, and list 
structures at the machine level; interrupt 
programming, relocatable code, linking 
loaders; interfacing with operating systems. 
Prerequisite: a grade of C or better in Com- 
puter Science 26 or consent of instructor. 

45 SYSTEMS PROGRAMMING 

The emphasis in this course is on the algo- 
rithms used in programming the various 
parts of a computer system. These parts in- 
clude assemblers, loaders, editors, interrupt 
processors, input/output schedulers, pro- 
cessor and job schedulers, and memory 
managers. Prerequisite: Computer Science 
27 and 44. 

46 COMPILER CONSTRUCTION 

The emphasis in this course is on the con- 
struction of translators for programming 
languages. Topics include lexical analysis, 
block structure, grammars, parsing, pro- 
gram representation, and run-time organi- 
zation. Prerequisite: Computer Science 27. 
Alternate years. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 

Mathematics 

A major in mathematics consists of 10 
units of courses in the mathematical 
sciences: Computer Science 15, Mathe- 
matics 18, 19, 20, 24, 34, 42, and three 
other mathematics courses numbered 
above 20. Students seeking secondary 
certification in mathematics are re- 
quired to complete Mathematics 30 
and 36 and are advised to enroll in 
Philosophy 17. In addition, all majors 



are advised to elect Philosophy 25 and 
33, Physics 25 and 26. 

In addition to the regular courses 
listed below, special courses are occa- 
sionally available on an independent- 
study basis. Recent topics include 
graph theory, discrete probability, ac- 
tuarial mathematics, theory of games 
of chance, and mathematics physics. 

A minor in mathematics consists of 
Mathematics 20, 24, and two other 
mathematics courses numbered above 
20. 

5 INDIVIDUALIZED LABORATORY 
INSTRUCTION IN BASIC ALGEBRA 
A self-paced study of arithmetic and deci- 
mal numerals, fractions, the real number 
line, factoring, solutions to linear and quad- 
ratic equations, graphs of linear and quad- 
ratic functions, expressions with rational 
exponents, algebraic functions, exponential 
functions, and inequalities. THIS COURSE 
IS LIMITED TO STUDENTS PLACED 
THEREIN BY THE MATHEMATICS 
DEPARTMENT. One-half unit of credit. 

1 MATHEMATICS IN ELEMENTARY 
EDUCATION 

This course is intended for prospective ele- 
mentary-school teachers and is required of 
all those seeking elementary certification. 
Topics include systems of numbers and of 
numeration, computational algorithms, en- 
vironmental and transformation geometry 
measurement, and mathematical concept 
formation. Observation and participation 
in Greater Williamsport elementary schools. 
Corequisite: any education course numbered 
40 or above which is specifically required 
for elementary certification or consent of 
instructor. 

9 INTRODUCTION TO CALCULUS 

An intuitive approach to the calculus con- 
cepts with applications to business, biology, 
and social-science problems. Not open to 
students who have completed Mathematics 
18. Prerequisite: credit for or exemption 
from Mathematics 5. A Iternate years. 

12 FINITE MATHEMATICS FOR 
DECISION MAKING 

An introduction to some of the principal 
mathematical models, not involving calcu- 
lus, which are used in business administra- 
tion, social sciences, and operations re- 
search. The course will include both deter- 
ministic models such as graphs, networks, 
linear programming and voting models, and 
probabilistic models such as Markov chains 
and games. Prerequisite: credit for or ex- 
emption from Mathematics 5. 



13 INTRODUCTION TO STATISTICS 
Empirical distributions of measurements, 
probability and random variables, discrete 
and continuous probability distributions, 
statistical inference from small samples, lin- 
ear regression and correlation, analysis of 
enumerative data. Prerequisite: credit for or 
exemption from Mathematics 5. 

14 MULTIVARIATE STATISTICS 

The study of statistical techniques used in 
experimental designs where more than one 
random variable is involved. Techniques in- 
clude analysis of variance, analysis of 
covariance, multiple regression and correla- 
tion, factor analysis and canonical correla- 
tions, contingency tables, discriminative 
analysis, and non-parametric techniques. 
Further topics will be chosen from cluster 
analysis, time series analysis, and repeated 
measure analysis. Extensive use of the PDP 
11/70 computer and the BMDP statistical 
package is made. Prerequisite: Mathematics 
13 or its equivalent. Alternate years. 

16 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS 

An introduction to discrete structures. Top- 
ics include equivalence relations, partitions 
and quotient sets, mathematical induction, 
recursive functions, elementary logic, dis- 
crete number systems, elementary combina- 
torial theory, and general algebraic struc- 
tures emphasizing semi-groups, groups, lat- 
tices, Boolean algebras, graphs and trees. 
Prerequisite: Computer Science 15 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

17 PRECALCULUS MATHEMATICS 

The study of logarithmic, exponential, trig- 
onometric, polynomial, and rational func- 
tions, their graphs, and elementary proper- 
ties. Prerequisite: credit for or exemption 
from Mathematics 5. 

18 CALCULUS WITH ANALYTIC 
GEOMETRY I 

Differentiation of algebraic functions, 
graphing plane curves, applications to relat- 
ed rate and extremal problems, integration 
of algebraic functions, areas of plane re- 
gions, volumes of solids or revolution, and 
other applications. Prerequisite: a grade of 
C or better in Mathematics 17 or its equiva- 
lent or consent of instructor. 

19 CALCULUS WITH ANALYTIC 
GEOMETRY II 

Differentiation and integration of transcen- 
dental functions, parametric equations, 
polar coordinates, the conic sections and 
their applications, infinite sequences, and 
series expansions. Prerequisite: a grade ofC 
or better in Mathematics 18 or consent of 
instructor. 



43 



20 MULTIVARIATE CALCULUS WITH 
MATRIX ALGEBRA 

Vectors, linear transformations and their 
matrix representations, determinants, ma- 
trix inversion, solutions to systems of linear 
equations, differentiation and integration 
of multivariate functions, vector field theo- 
ry and applications. Prerequisite: a grade of 
C or better in Mathematics 19 or consent of 
instructor. 

21 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 

A study of ordinary differential equations 
and their applications: first-order linear dif- 
ferential equations, the Picard Existence 
Theorem, solution by separation of varia- 
bles, solution by numerical methods; sec- 
ond-order linear differential equations, so- 
lution by variation of parameters, solution 
by power series, solution by Laplace trans- 
forms; system of first-order equation, solu- 
tions by eigenvalues; qualitative theory, sta- 
bility theory asymptotic behavior, and the 
Poincare-Bendixon theorem. Besides the 
usual applications in physics and engineer- 
ing, considerable attention will be given to 
modern applications in the social and life 
sciences. Prerequisite: a grade ofC or better 
in Mathematics 19 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

23 COMPLEX VARIABLES 

Complex numbers, analytic functions, com- 
plex integration, Cauchy's theorems and 
their applications. Corequisite: Mathemat- 
ics 20. Alternate years. 

24 FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICS 
Topics regularly included are the nature of 
mathematical systems, essentials of logical 
reasoning, and axiomatic foundations of set 
theory. Other topics frequently included are 
approaches to the concepts of infinity and 
continuity, and the construction of the real 
number system. The course serves as a bridge 
from the elementary calculus to advanced 
courses in algebra and analysis. Prerequisite: 
Mathematics 19 or consent of instructor. 

30 TOPICS IN GEOMETRY 

An axiomatic treatment of Euclidean geo- 
metry, and an introduction to related geo- 
metries. Prerequisite: Mathematics 18. Al- 
ternate years. 

31 INTRODUCTION TO NUMERICAL 
ANALYSIS 

Study and analysis of tabulated data lead- 
ing to interpolation, numerical integration, 
numerical solutions of differential equa- 
tions, and systems of equations. Prerequi- 
site: Computer Science IS and Mathematics 
19. Alternate years. Cross-listed as Compu- 
ter Science 31. 



32-33 MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS I-II 
A study of probability, discrete and contin- 
uous random variables, expected values and 
moments, sampling, point estimation, sam- 
pling distributions, interval estimation, test 
of hypotheses, regression and linear hypo- 
theses, experimental design models. Coreq- 
uisite: Mathematics 20. Alternate years. 

34 MODERN ALGEBRA 

An integrated approach to groups, rings, 
fields, and vector spaces and functions 
which preserve their structure. Prerequisite: 
Mathematics 24. 

36 CONCEPTS OF MATHEMATICS IN 
SECONDARY EDUCATION 

A course designed for mathematics majors 
who are planning to teach at the secondary 
level. Emphasis will be placed on the mathe- 
matics that forms the foundation of secon- 
dary mathematics. Ideas will be presented 
to familiarize the student with various cur- 
riculum proposals, to provide for innova- 
tion within the existing curriculum, and to 
expand the boundaries of the existing cur- 
riculum. Open only to junior and senior 
mathematics majors enrolled in the secon- 
dary-education program. Alternate years. 

37 COMPUTATIONAL MATRIX ALGEBRA 
An introduction to some of the algorithms 
which have been developed for producing 
numerical solutions to such linear algebraic 
problems as solving systems of linear equa- 
tions, inverting matrices, computing the ei- 
genvalues of a matrix, and solving the linear 
least-squares problem. Prerequisite: Com- 
puter Science 15 and Mathematics 19 or con- 
sent of instructor. Alternate years. Cross- 
listed as Computer Science 37. 

38 OPERATIONS RESEARCH 

Queuing theory, including simulation tech- 
niques; optimization theory, including line- 
ar programming, integer programming, and 
dynamic programming; game theory, in- 
cluding two-person zero-sum games, coop- 
erative games, and multiperson games. Pre- 
requisite: Mathematics 12 or Mathematics 
20. A Iternate years. 

42 REAL ANALYSIS 

A rigorous analysis of the basic concepts of 
real variable calculus; the real number sys- 
tem as a complete, ordered field; the topol- 
ogy of Euclidean space, compact sets, the 
Heine- Borel Theorem; continuity; the Inter- 
mediate Value Theorem; derivatives, the 
Mean Value Theorem; Riemann integrals, 
the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus; in- 
finite series, and Taylor's theorem. Prereq- 
uisite: Mathematics 24. 



48 SEMINAR 

Topics in modern mathematics of current 
interest to the instructor. A different topic is 
selected each semester. This semester is de- 
signed to provide junior and senior mathe- 
matics majors and other qualified students 
with more than the usual opportunity for 
concentrated and cooperative inquiry. Pre- 
requisite: consent of instructor. One-half 
unit of credit. This course may be repeated 
for credit. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



MUSIC 

Assistant Professors: Boerckel 

(Chairman), Thayer 
Part-time Instructors: Freed, Gallup, 

Lakey, Nacinovich, Payn, Russell 

The music major is required to take a 
balanced program of theory, applied 
music, music history, and music en- 
semble. A minimum of eight courses 
(exclusive of applied music and ensem- 
ble) is required, and these must include 
Music 10, 11, 17, 22, and any two from 
35, 36, 37, 38. Music 17 is not required 
of the music major who completes 
Music 35, 36, 37, and 38. Each major 
must participate in an ensemble (Music 
68 and/or 69) and take one hour of ap- 
plied music per week for a minimum of 
four semesters. (See Music 60-66). The 
major must include at least one-half 
hour of piano in the applied program 
unless a piano proficiency test is re- 
quested and passed. Anyone declaring 
music as a second major must do so by 
the beginning of the junior year. 

The Music Department recommends 
that non-majors select courses from 
the following list to meet distribution 
requirements: Music 16, 17; Music 18, 
19; Music 22 in combination with any 
one of the above mentioned four (4) 
courses (16, 17, 18, 19). 

10-11 MUSIC THEORY I AND II 

A two-semester course open to all students. 
An examination of the fundamental com- 



44 



ponents and theoretical concepts of music. 
The student will develop musicianship 
through application of applied skills. (Mu- 
sic 10 is prerequisite to Music 11). 

16 INTRODUCTION TO MUSIC 

A basic course in the materials and tech- 
niques of music. Examples drawn from var- 
ious periods and styles are designed to en- 
hance perception and appreciation through 
careful and informed listening. 

17 SURVEY OF WESTERN MUSIC 

A chronological survey of Western music 
from the Middle Ages to the present for the 
major or non-major. 

18 AMERICAN MUSIC I 

For the major or non-major interested in 
studying all types of American music, from 
pre-Revolutionary days through World War 
I. Areas explored will include Indian, Afri- 
can, and European roots influencing the 
serious music for small and large ensembles, 
the development of show music from min- 
strels to Broadway musicals, the evolution 
of "Tin Pan Alley," and the beginnings of 
jazz. Alternate years. 

19 AMERICAN MUSIC II 

For the major or non-major interested in 
studying all types of American music. 
American Music II will cover post-World 
War I days to the present. Areas explored 
will include indigenous serious music for 
small and large ensembles, the mature 
Broadway musical, the evolution of jazz, 
the development of rock, and the fusion of 
musical styles in the 1970's. Alternate years. 

20-21 MUSIC THEORY III AND IV 

A continuation of the integrated theory 
course moving toward newer uses of music 
materials. Prerequisite: Music 11. Alternate 



22 ELECTRONIC MUSIC I 

Largely a non-technical introduction to elec- 
tronic music designed for the major and 
non-major. The course traces the develop- 
ment of electronic music, introduces the 
student to simple tape-splicing and recorder 
manipulation, and progresses to the present- 
day synthesizer and multitrack techniques. 
Students will work collectively and individ- 
ually in the electronic studios. Alternate 
years. 

30 COMPOSITION 

Creative writing in smaller vocal and instru- 
mental forms. The beginning of the course 
requires students to identify and use the 
techniques developed by major composers 
of the 20th century. Students begin develop- 
ing a personal style of composition in the 
remainder of the semester. One composition 



by each class member will be presented in a 
New Works recital toward the end of the se- 
mester. Prerequisite: Music 10-11 or consent 
of instructor. Alternate years. 

31 CONDUCTING 

A study of the fundamentals of conducting 
with frequent opportunity for practical ex- 
perience. The College music organizations 
serve to make performance experience pos- 
sible. Prerequisite: Music 10-11 or consent 
of instructor. Alternate years. 

33 ELECTRONIC MUSIC II 

An in-depth study of the Moog synthesizer, 
including alternating and direct current, sig- 
nal generators and the characteristics of their 
waveforms, control voltage and its sources, 
the transient and periodic modulations. Ba- 
sic mixing and filtering techniques will be 
examined. Students will be assigned studio 
hours to complete the recording assign- 
ments. Prerequisite: Music 22. Alternate 
years. 

35 MUSIC HISTORY TO J.S. BACH 

A survey of Western music from Gregorian 
chant to the masterworks of Handel and 
Bach. Church music of the Middle Ages, 
Renaissance, and Baroque periods is of pri- 
mary importance with the origins of instru- 
mental music and opera receiving secondary 
consideration. Prerequisite: Music 17 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

36 MUSIC HISTORY OF THE 18TH 
CENTURY 

The symphonies, operas, chamber music, 
and piano works of Haydn, Mozart, and 
Beethoven are studied within the social and 
cultural climate of late 18th century Europe. 
Rococo music in France and Italy will be 
considered with the expressive style of Ger- 
many and Austria. Prerequisite: Music 17 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

37 MUSIC OF THE 19TH CENTURY 

A study of the music of the Romantic peri- 
od with emphasis on Beethoven, Schubert, 
Chopin, Berlioz, Liszt, Schumann, Brahms, 
Wagner, Verdi, Tchaikovsky, and others. 
Close examination of short lyric forms, 
program music, opera, and the sonata gen- 
re. Prerequisite: Music 17 or consent of in- 
structor. Alternate years. 

38 MUSIC OF THE 20TH CENTURY 

Beginning with Debussy, Strauss, Mahler, 
and Sibelius, the course traces some of the 
main currents in the music of our time. Em- 
phasis given to such composers as Stravin- 
sky, Bartok, Ives, Shostakovich, Berg, 
Gershwin, and others. Prerequisite: Music 
17 or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 



39 ORCHESTRATION 

A study of modern orchestral instruments 
and examination of their use by the great 
masters with practical problems in instru- 
mentation. The College music organiza- 
tions serve to make performance experience 
possible. Prerequisite: Music 10-11 or con- 
sent of instructor. Alternate years. 

40 COUNTERPOINT 

A study of the five species in two-, three- 
and four-part writing. Emphasis is placed 
upon the 16th century writing style. Prereq- 
uisite: Music 10-11 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

42 ELECTRONIC MUSIC III 

An introduction to acoustic theory, echo 
technique, location modulation, application 
of equalization, phasing, and microphones. 
The student will write and perform an elec- 
tronic composition utilizing real-time net- 
works. Prerequisite: Music 33. Alternate 
years. 

43 ELECTRONIC MUSIC IV 

A study of major compositions and genres 
of electronic music. The student will com- 
plete an original composition based upon a 
study of these techniques and forms. Pre- 
requisite: Music 42. Alternate years. 

Applied Music and Ensemble 

The study of performance in piano, 
voice, organ, strings, woodwinds, and 
percussion is designed to develop sound 
technique and a knowledge of the ap- 
propriate literature for the instrument. 
Student recitals offer opportunities to 
gain experience in public performance. 
Music majors and other students qual- 
ified in performance may present for- 
mal recitals. 

Credit for applied music courses 
(private lessons) and ensemble (choir 
and band) is earned on a fractional ba- 
sis. For a description of this, see page 6. 
An applied course or ensemble should 
NOT be substituted for an academic 
course, but should in every case be in 
addition to the normal four academic 
courses. 

Extra fees apply for private lessons 
(Music 60-66) as follows: 
$100 per semester for a half-hour les- 
son per week. Private lessons are given 
for 13 weeks. 

60 Piano 61 Voice 62 Strings 63 Organ 
64 Brass 65 Woodwinds 66 Percussion 



45 



68 CHORAL ENSEMBLE (CHOIR) 
Participation in the College choir is designed 
to enable any student possessing at least av- 
erage talent an opportunity to study choral 
technique. Emphasis is placed upon ac- 
quaintance with choral literature, tone pro- 
duction, diction, and phrasing. Students 
desiring credit for choir are allowed a maxi- 
mum of one hour per semester. A student 
who is enrolled in choir and not band 
should elect Music 68-B (one hour credit). 
Students enrolled in both band and choir 
should elect 68-A and 69-A (one-half hour 
in each). 

69 INSTRUMENTAL ENSEMBLE (BAND) 
The College band allows students with some 
instrumental experience to become ac- 
quainted with good band literature and de- 
velop personal musicianship through partic- 
ipation in group instrumental activity. Stu- 
dents desiring credit for ensemble are al- 
lowed a maximum of one hour per semes- 
ter. A student who is enrolled in band, but 
not choir, should elect Music 69-B (one hour 
credit). A student enrolled in both band and 
choir should elect 68-A and 69-A (one-half 
hour in each). 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



NEAR EAST CULTURE AND 
ARCHAEOLOGY 

Professor: Guerra (Coordinator) 

The Near East Culture and Archaeolo- 
gy interdisciplinary major is designed 
to acquaint students with the "cradle 
of Western civilization," both in its an- 
cient and modern aspects. Majors will 
complete a minimum of eight to 10 
courses related to the Near East. 

Required courses are described in 
their departmental sections and in- 
clude: 

1. Four courses (semesters) in lan- 
guage and culture from: 
History and Culture of the Ancient 
Near East (Religion 28) 
History of Art (Art 22) 
Ancient History (History 20) 
Old Testament Faith and History 



(Religion 13) 

Judaism and Islam (Religion 24) 
Two semesters of foreign language 
(Hebrew 1, 2 or Greek 1, 2) 

2. Two courses (semesters) in archaeol- 
ogy from: 

Biblical Archaeology (Religion 26) 
Special Archaeology courses, such 
as independent studies or in May or 
summer terms in the Near East. 

3. Two courses (semesters) in the coop- 
erating departments (art, history, 
political science, religion and socio- 
logy-anthropology) or related de- 
partments. These two courses, usu- 
ally taken in the junior or senior 
years, can be independent study. 
Topics should be related either to 
the ancient or the modern Near East 
and must be approved in advance 
by the committee supervising the in- 
terdisciplinary program. The study 
of modern Arabic or Hebrew is en- 
couraged. 

Other courses may be suggested by 
the supervisory committee within the 
limits of a 10-course major. The num- 
ber of courses taken within this pro- 
gram applicable toward fulfilling the 
College distribution requirements will 
vary according to the selection of 
courses. 



NURSING 

Professor: Rodgers (Chairman) 
Instructors: Atkinson, Pagana 
Adjunct Instructor: Kramer 

Students wishing to major in nursing 
will be admitted to the College under 
the usual admission procedures. Fresh- 
men should follow the nursing curricu- 
lum plan for the freshman year in the 
sequence designated. To be considered 
for continuation in nursing, a mini- 
mum G.P.A. of 2.5 is required at com- 
pletion of the freshman year. It is nec- 
essary for the student to file a supple- 
mentary application with the Depari- 
ment of Nursing by March 1 of the 
freshman year. 



Clinical Learning Resources 

In addition to the College's new well- 
equipped Nursing Skills Lab, oppor- 
tunity for self-learning is provided in 
the adjacent Learning Center which is 
equipped with electronic study carrels 
and audio-visual materials. 

A wide variety of health care agen- 
cies in the surrounding area are utilized 
for clinical experiences. Cooperating 
hospitals and agencies include: Divine 
Providence Hospital, Williamsport 
Hospital, Evangelical Hospital, Gei- 
singer Medical Center, Leader Nursing 
Home and Rehabilitation Center, Dan- 
ville State Hospital, Pennsylvania De- 
partment of Health, Regional Home 
Health Services and the County Health 
Improvement Plan (CHIP). 

Expenses of the Nursing Program 

Students are responsible for their 
own transportation to assigned clinical 
areas. The student of nursing assumes 
all financial obligations listed in the 
section on fees in this bulletin. Addi- 
tional expenses include uniforms, 
name pin, watch with second hand, 
bandage scissors, stethoscope, blood 
pressure cuff, malpractice insurance, 
annual health examinations and NLN 
achievement tests. 

Major in Nursing 

The major in nursing consists of: 
Nursing 20, 21, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 
36, 40, 41, 42, and 43 or 80-89. In ad- 
dition, the following are prerequisites 
for specific nursing courses: Chemistry 
8, 15; Biology 13-14, 26; Psychology 
10, 17; Mathematics 13, and Computer 
Science 15. The religion/philosophy 
distribution requirement is met by the 
required courses: Philosophy 19 and 
Religion 20. The history/social science 
distribution requirement is met by the 
required courses: Psychology 10 and 
17. In addition, the student is required 
to take one course from among Sociol- 
ogy/Anthropology 10, 14, 20, 28, or 
29. The fine arts/foreign language dis- 
tribution requirement can be met by 
two courses in one department from 
among art, literature, music, or thea- 
tre; or by two courses in foreign lan- 



46 



guage on the intermediate or higher 
course level. 

Unless otherwise indicated, nursing 
courses are open only to nursing ma- 
jors. 



Policies Specific to Nursing 

In addition to the Lycoming College 
continuance policies, the following 
policies are specific to all declared ma- 
jors in the Department of Nursing: 

1 . A grade of C or better is required in 
all clinical nursing courses to con- 
tinue in the nursing program. These 
courses are Nursing 21, 30, 31, 32, 
33, 36, 40 and 41. Students who earn 
a grade of less than seventy percent 
or C in either the theoretical or clin- 
ical component of a nursing course 
will receive a course grade of F and 
will be required to repeat both com- 
ponents of the course. Students 
who receive a nursing grade of F 
will not be permitted to continue in 
the nursing sequence until the defi- 
ciency has been made up. 

2. Policies regarding absence from 
classes or from the clinical portion 
of nursing courses are determined 
by the instructor(s) responsible for 
the course. No absence from the 
clinical portion of the course will be 
excused except for illness or a fami- 
ly emergency. Excessive absences 
for any reason will necessitate re- 
peating the entire course. 



Typical Plan of Study for B.S.N. 

FRESHMAN YEAR 

Fall 

Chem. 8*(Inorganic Chemistry) . 1 

Eng. 6 (Composition) 1 

Psych. 10* (Intro, to Psych.) 1 

Fine Arts/Lang 1 

Physical Education 

4 

Spring 

Chem. 15* (Brief Organic 1 

Chemistry) 
Eng. Elective 1 



Psych. 17* (Developmental 1 

Psych.) 

Fine Arts/Lang 1 

Physical Education 

4 

SOPHOMORE YEAR 

Fall 

Bio. 13 (Human Anatomy and . . 1 
Physiology) 

Math 13 (Intro, to Statistics) 1 

Nur. 20 (Concepts of Nutrition . . .75 

in Family Health) 
Phil. 19 (Ethical Issues in 1 

Biology and Medicine) 

3.75 

Spring 

Bio. 14 (Human Anatomy and . . 1 

Physiology) 
C. Sci. 15 (Intro, to Computer . . 1 

Sci.) 
Bio. 26 (Microbiology for 1 

Health Sciences) 
Nur. 21 (Foundations of 1 .25 

Professional Practice) 

4.25 

JUNIOR YEAR 

Fall 

Nur. 30 (Nursing Care of the. . . . 1 .5 

Developing Family I) 
Nur. 32 (Nursing Care of the. ... 1.5 

Adult I) 
Nur. 34 (Basic Concepts of 1 

Pharmacology and 

Therapeutics) 



4 



Spring 

Nur. 31 (Nursing Care of the. ... 1.5 

Developing Family II) 
Nur. 33 (Nursing Care of the ... . 1.5 

Adult II) 
Nur. 35 (Research in Nursing) ... 1 

4 



May Term 

Nur. 36 (The Nurse in the 
Social System) 



SENIOR YEAR 

Fall 

Nur. 40 (Nursing Care of the ... . 1.5 

Emotionally Troubled 

Individual and Family) 

Rel. 20 (Death & Dying) 1 

Elective** 1 

Nur. 43 (Topics in Nursing or . . . .5 

Nur. 80-89 Independent 

Study in Nursing) 

4 

Spring 

Nur. 41 (Comprehensive 1.5 

Nursing Care) 

Nur. 42 (Professional Issues) 5 

Free Elective 1 



* Prerequisite to sophomore year. 
**Student must select one course from 
sociology/anthropology which may be 
taken at any point in the program. 
Recommended courses at this time are 
Sociology 10, 20, 28, 14 and 29. 

Requirement for Graduation: 32 Units 
(128 Credits) 

The student may take additional units 
for electives, independent study, hon- 
ors and/or a minor in another disci- 
pline. 

20 CONCEPTS OF NUTRITION IN 
FAMILY HEALTH 

Essentials of normal nutrition and their re- 
lationship to the health of individuals and 
families. These concepts serve as a basis for 
the development of an understanding of 
therapeutic application of dietary principles 
and the health professional's role and re- 
sponsibility in this facet of client care. Three 
hours of lecture. 3 A unit. Prerequisites: 
Chemistry 8, 15, or consent of instructor. 
Open to non-nursing majors. 

21 FOUNDATIONS OF PROFESSIONAL 
NURSING PRACTICE 

Introduction of major theoretical elements 
underlying professional nursing practice. 
Focus on the concept of health and com- 
mon health problems recognizing the multi- 
directional influence of the individual, fam- 
ily, and environment. In this first clinical 
course the student will utilize the nursing 
process in assisting clients to attain a maxi- 



47 



mum level of functioning. Three hours of 
lecture and five hours clinical laboratory. 
I'A units. Prerequisites: Chemistry 8, IS. 
and Biology 13. 



30-31 



NURSING CARE OF THE 
DEVELOPING FAMILY 



Examination of health and nursing needs of 
beginning and developing families. Empha- 
sis on nursing needs of mothers and infants 
within the family unit as well as the com- 
mon health problems of children through 
adolescence. Three hours of lecture and 7'A 
hours clinical laboratory. I'A units. Prereq- 
uisite for Nursing 30: Nursing 21, Biology 14 
and 26. Prerequisite for Nursing 31: Nursing 
30. 



32-33 NURSING CARE OF THE ADULT 
Identification of adult health care needs 
and implementation of nursing activities 
based on an understanding of growth and 
development, pathophysiology, communi- 
cation skills, interpersonal dynamics and 
psychosocial interventions. Three hours of 
lecture and 7'A hours clinical laboratory. 
I'A units. Prerequisite for Nursing 32: Nurs- 
ing 21, Biology 14 and 26. Prerequisite for 
Nursing 33: Nursing 32. 

34 BASIC CONCEPTS OF 
PHARMACOLOGY AND 
THERAPEUTICS 

Fundamentals of pharmacology and thera- 
peutics are presented for the various classes 
of drugs. Relationship of pharmacological 
mechanisms to the affected biochemical 
and physiological processes. Interactions 
and toxicologic aspects of drug therapy are 
reviewed. Four hours of lecture. 1 unit. Cor- 
equisite: Nursing 30, 32, or consent of in- 
structor. Open to non-nursing majors. 

35 RESEARCH IN NURSING 
Expansion of theoretical basis of research 
methodology with emphasis on analyzing, 
criticizing and interpreting nursing research. 
Development of a research proposal focus- 
ing on a nursing problem. Four hours of 
lecture. 1 unit. Prerequisites: Mathematics 
13, Computer Science 15, and Nursing 30 
and 32. 



36 THE NURSE IN THE SOCIAL SYSTEM 
Seminar discussions and clinical laboratory 
using the hospital as a prototype. Theories 
of social systems. Examination of induction 
into the hospital system. Evaluation of 
standards of care. Focus on utilization of 
change theory. Twelve hours of lecture and 
96 hours clinical laboratory. I unit. Prereq- 
uisites: Nursing 31, 33. Required for the 
nursing major and offered only in May term. 



40 NURSING CARE OF THE 
EMOTIONALLY TROUBLED 
INDIVIDUAL AND FAMILY 
Examination of disturbed human relation- 
ships with focus on intrapsychic, interper- 
sonal and physiologic etiology. Emphasis 
on advanced therapeutic nurse-patient rela- 
tionships within context of family, commu- 
nity, and health care systems. Three hours 
of lecture and 7'A hours clinical laboratory. 
I'A units. Prerequisites: Nursing 31, 33, 36. 

41 COMPREHENSIVE NURSING CARE 
Culminating nursing course with focus on 
utilizing nursing theory in a choice of clini- 
cal settings. Seminars will provide oppor- 
tunities for students to share commonalities 
and unique aspects of professional practice. 
Three hours of lecture and 7'A hours clini- 
cal laboratory. I'A units. Prerequisites: 
Nursing 36, 40. 

42 PROFESSIONAL ISSUES 

An analysis of nursing issues in the context 
of the historical background of the profes- 
sion, the social forces which influence nurs- 
ing, and nursing's impact upon society. Two- 
hour seminar. 'A unit. Prerequisite: Senior 
standing. 

43 TOPICS IN NURSING 

Selected topic courses in nursing designed 
to permit students to pursue subjects which, 
because of their specialized nature, may not 
be offered on a regular basis. 'A unit. Pre- 
requisite: Senior standing. 



80-89 



INDEPENDENT STUDY IN 
NURSING 



An opportunity to develop and implement 
an individual plan of study under faculty 
guidance. 'A unit. Prerequisite: Senior 
standing or consent of chairman. 



PHILOSOPHY 

Associate Professors: Griffith 

(Chairman), Whelan 
Assistant Professor: Herring 

The study of philosophy develops a 
critical understanding of the basic con- 
cepts and presuppositions around 
which we organize our thought in sci- 
ence, religion, education, morality, the 
arts, and other human enterprises. A 
major in philosophy, together with ap- 
propriate other courses, can provide 
an excellent preparation for policy- 
making positions of many kinds, for 



graduate study in several fields, and 
for careers in education, law, and the 
ministry. The major in philosophy 
consists of eight courses numbered 10 
or above, including 38, 39, 49 and at 
least three other courses numbered 25 
or above. 

A minor in philosophy consists of 
any four philosophy courses numbered 
20 or above. 

5 PRACTICAL REASONING 

A general introduction to topics in logic and 
their application to practical reasoning, 
with primary emphasis on detecting falla- 
cies, evaluating inductive reasoning, and 
understanding the rudiments of scientific 
method. 

10 INTRODUCTION TO PHILOSOPHICAL 
PROBLEMS 

An introductory course designed to show 
the nature of philosophy by examination of 
several examples of problems which have 
received extended attention in philosophical 
literature. These topics often include the re- 
lation of the mind to the body, the possibili- 
ty of human freedom, arguments about the 
existence of God, the conditions of knowl- 
edge, and the relation of language to 
thought. Some attention is also given to the 
principles of acceptable reasoning. 

14 PHILOSOPHY AND PERSONAL 
CHOICE 

An introductory philosophical examination 
of a number of contemporary moral issues 
which call for personal decision. Topics oft- 
en investigated include: the "good" life, 
obligation to others, sexual ethics, abor- 
tion, suicide and death, violence and paci- 
fism, obedience to the law, the relevance of 
personal beliefs to morality. Discussion 
centers on some of the suggestions philoso- 
phers have made about how to make such 
decisions. 

15 PHILOSOPHY AND PUBLIC POLICY 

An introductory philosophical examination 
of the moral and conceptual dimension of 
various contemporary public issues, such as 
the relation of ethics to politics and the law, 
the enforcement of morals, the problems of 
fair distribution of goods and opportunities, 
the legitimacy of restricting the use of natu- 
ral resources, and the application of ethics 
to business practice. Discussion centers on 
some of the suggestions philosophers have 
made about how to deal with these issues. 

16 ETHICAL ISSUES IN BUSINESS 

An introductory philosophical examination 
of a variety of moral problems that arise 
concerning the American business system. 



48 



Included are a systematic consideration of 
typical moral problems faced by individuals 
and an examination of common moral criti- 
cisms of the business system itself. 

17 PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES IN 
EDUCATION 

An examination of the basic concepts in- 
volved in thought about education, and a 
consideration of the various methods for 
justifying educational proposals. Typical of 
the issues discussed are: Are education and 
indoctrination different? What is a liberal 
education? Are education and schooling 
compatible? What do we need to learn? Al- 
ternate years. 

18 PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES IN 
CRIMINAL JUSTICE 

An introductory examination of various 
philosophical issues and concepts which are 
of special importance in legal contexts. Dis- 
cussion includes both general topics, such as 
the justification of punishment, and more 
specific topics, such as the insanity defense 
and the rights of the accused. Readings are 
arranged topically and include both classical 
and contemporary sources. 

19 ETHICAL ISSUES IN BIOLOGY AND 
MEDICINE 

A philosophical investigation of some of 
the ethical issues which arise as a result of 
contemporary medical and biological tech- 
nology. Typical of these issues are euthana- 
sia, behavior control, patient rights, experi- 
mentation on humans, fetal research, abor- 
tion, genetic engineering, population con- 
trol, and distribution of health resources. 

21-22 INTRODUCTION TO THE HISTORY 
OF PHILOSOPHY 

An introductory survey of the history of 
philosophy from the ancient Greeks through 
the early modern period. Particular atten- 
tion will be paid to the common origins of 
philosophy and science and their subse- 
quent relationship and to the role which 
philosophy has played in the evolution of 
social and political thought. Philosophy 21 
is not a prerequisite for Philosophy 22. 

25 SYMBOLIC LOGIC 

A study of modern symbolic logic and its 
application to the analysis of arguments. 
Included are truth-functional relations, the 
logic of propositional functions, and deduc- 
tive systems. Attention is also given to vari- 
ous topics in the philosophy of logic. 

31 PHILOSOPHY AND HUMAN NATURE 
An examination of a variety of classical and 
contemporary philosophical questions about 
human nature. Among the questions typi- 
cally considered are these: Is there such a 
thing as human nature? Are human beings 



different, in any fundamental way, from 
other animals? Are human beings free? Is 
human consciousness just a brain process? 
Are human beings inherently predisposed to 
evil? Are human beings biologically deter- 
mined to be selfish or aggressive? Are the 
differences in achievement between men 
and women biologically based? Prerequi- 
site: Students without previous study in phi- 
losophy must have instructor's permission. 

32 PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION 

A philosophical examination of religion. 
Included are such topics as the nature of re- 
ligious discourse, arguments for and against 
the existence of God, and the relation be- 
tween religion and science. Readings from 
classical and contemporary sources. Prereq- 
uisite: students without previous study in 
philosophy must have instructor's permis- 
sion. Alternate years. 

33 PHILOSOPHY OF NATURAL SCIENCE 
A consideration of philosophically impor- 
tant conceptual problems arising from re- 
flection about natural science, including 
such topics as the nature of scientific laws 
and theories, the character of explanation, 
the import of prediction, the existence of 
"non-observable" theoretical entities such 
as electrons and genes, the problem of justi- 
fying induction, and various puzzles associ- 
ated with probability. Prerequisite: students 
without previous study in philosophy must 
have instructor's permission. Alternate 
years. 

34 SOCIAL AND POLITICAL 
PHILOSOPHY 

A systematic philosophical investigation of 
the relation between human nature and the 
proper social and political order. Topics 
studied include the purpose of government, 
the nature of legitimate authority, the foun- 
dation of human rights, and the limits of 
human freedom. Emphasis is placed on the 
logic of social and political thought and on 
the analysis of basic principles and concepts. 
Prerequisite: students without previous phi- 
losophy must have instructor's permission. 

35 ETHICAL THEORY 

An inquiry concerning the grounds which 
distinguish morally right from morally 
wrong actions. Central to the course is criti- 
cal consideration of the proposals and the 
rationale of relativists, egoists, utilitarians, 
and other ethical theorists. Various topics in 
metaethics are also included. Prerequisite: 
students without previous study in philoso- 
phy must have instructor's permission. 

38 ANCIENT GREEK PHILOSOPHY 

A critical examination of the ancient Greek 
philosophers, with particular emphasis on 
Plato and Aristotle. Prerequisite: two cours- 



es in philosophy or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

39 EARLY MODERN PHILOSOPHY 

A critical examination of the Continental 
Rationalists (Descartes, Spinoza, Leibniz), 
the British Empiricists (Locke, Berkeley, 
Hume) and Kant. Prerequisite: two courses 
in philosophy or consent of instructor. Al- 
ternate years. 

49 DEPARTMENTAL SEMINAR 

An investigation, carried on by discussions 
and papers, into one philosophical problem, 
text, philosopher, or movement. A different 
topic is selected each semester. Recent topics 
include Sidgwick's ethics, religious language, 
Kierkegaard, legal punishment, Wittgen- 
stein, personal identity and human rights. 
This seminar is designed to provide junior 
and senior philosophy majors and other 
qualified students with more than the usual 
opportunity for concentrated and coopera- 
tive inquiry. Prerequisite: consent of in- 
structor. This seminar may be repeated for 
credit. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 

Recent independent studies in philosophy 
include Nietzsche, moral education, Rawls' 
theory of justice, existentialism, euthanasia, 
Plato's ethics, and philosophical aesthetics. 

90 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 



PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

Associate Professor: Burch 

(Chairman) 
Assistant Professor: Whitehill 
Instructors: Hair, Holmes 

1 PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

Coeducational physical education classes. 
Basic instructions in fundamentals, knowl- 
edge, and appreciation of sports that include 
swimming, tennis, bowling, volleyball, ar- 
chery, field hockey, soccer, golf, badminton, 
modern dance, skiing, elementary games 
(for elementary teachers), toneastics, physi- 
cal fitness, and other activities. Backpack- 
ing, cross-country and alpine skiing, jog- 
ging, and cycling are offered on a contract 
basis. Beginning swimming is required for 
all non-swimmers. Students may select any 
activity offered. A reasonable degree of 
proficiency is required in the activities. Em- 
phasis is on the potential use of activities as 
recreational and leisure-time interests. Two 



49 



semesters of physical education (two hours 
per week) are required. All physical educa- 
tion classes are open to men and women. 



Athletic Training 

Lycoming College established an ap- 
prenticeship program in athletic train- 
ing in 1979 after recognizing two con- 
ditions: the importance of the care and 
prevention of athletic injuries by 
trained professionals and the career's 
promising growth potential. 

To complete this non-credit program 
students participate in practical as well 
as classroom work under the supervi- 
sion of Lycoming's certified athletic 
trainer. Students become eligible to 
participate in the National Athletic 
Trainers Association (N.A.T.A.) Certi- 
fication examination to earn the status 
of an N.A.T.A. certified trainer. 



POLITICAL SCIENCE 

Professor: Giglio (Chairman) 
Associate Professor: Roskin 
Assistant Professor: Grogan 

The major is designed to provide a sys- 
tematic understanding of government 
and politics at the international, na- 
tional, state, and local levels. Majors 
are encouraged to develop their facul- 
ties to make independent, objective 
analyses which can be applied to the 
broad spectrum of the social sciences. 
Although the political science major 
is not designed as a vocational major, 
students with such training may go di- 
rectly into government service, jour- 
nalism, teaching, or private adminis- 
trative agencies. A political science 
major can provide the base for the stu- 
dy of law, or for graduate studies lead- 
ing to administrative work in federal, 
state, or local governments, interna- 
tional organizations, or college teach- 
ing. Students seeking certification to 
teach secondary school social studies 
may major in political science but 
should consult their advisers and the 
education department. 



A major consists of eight political 
science courses. Political Science 15 is 
required unless exempted by the de- 
partment. Exemptions will be granted 
only if they strengthen the student's 
program. In addition, students must 
take at least one course in each of the 
five areas (A to E) below. To encourage 
familiarity with other social sciences, 
at least two courses must be completed 
from the following: American Studies 
10; Business 35 and 36 (recommended 
for prelaw); Economics 10, 11, 32, 45; 
History 24, 33, 34; Philosophy 21, 22; 
Sociology and Anthropology 26, 38. 

Students also may take a minor in 
political science. Three minors are of- 
fered: 1) a minor in political science 
consists of Political Science 15 plus any 
three courses numbered above 15 from 
areas A to E; 2) a minor in foreign af- 
fairs consists of four courses selected 
from the following offerings: Political 
Science 20, 25, 26, 27, 38 and 39; and 
3) a minor in legal studies consists of 
the following courses: Political Science 
30, 31, 35, and 36. 

Students are encouraged to consult 
with department members on the se- 
lection of a minor. 

15 INTRODUCTION TO POLITICS 

The behavior and misbehavior of the politi- 
cal animal, man. Why he forms political 
communities; how he may improve and de- 
stroy them. Required of all political science 
majors; open to a limited number of other 
interested students. 



A. American Government 

10 GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS IN 
THE UNITED STATES 

An introduction to American national gov- 
ernment which emphasizes both structural- 
functional analysis and policy-making pro- 
cesses. In addition to the legislative, execu- 
tive, and judicial branches of government, 
attention will be given to political parties 
and interest groups, elections and voting 
behavior, and constitutional rights. Recom- 
mended to all social science education ma- 
jors and to those students who have had in- 
adequate or insufficient preparation in 
American government. 

11 STATE AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT 

An examination of the general principles, 
major problems, and political processes of 



the states and their subdivisions, together 
with their role in a federal type of govern- 
ment. 

30 THE AMERICAN CONSTITUTIONAL 
SYSTEM 

An analysis of the Supreme Court in the 
American system of government with some 
attention paid to judicial decision making. 
Topics include: judicial review, federalism, 
constitutional limits on legislative and exec- 
utive powers, elections, and representation. 
Alternate years. 

31 CIVIL RIGHTS AND LIBERTIES 
What are our rights and liberties as Ameri- 
cans? What should they be? A frank discus- 
sion of the nature and scope of the constitu- 
tional guarantees. First Amendment rights, 
the rights of criminal suspects and defen- 
dants, racial and sexual equality, and equal 
protection of the laws. Students will read 
and brief the more important Supreme 
Court decisions. Prerequisite: junior or sen- 
ior standing or consent of instructor. 

33 BUREAUCRACY AND PUBLIC 
ADMINISTRATION 

What is bureaucracy? Why and how do bu- 
reaucracies arise? What has been the politi- 
cal impact of growth of bureaucracy in gov- 
ernment? These questions, among others, 
will be considered in this examination of 
public bureaucracies. This course is highly 
recommended to students planning to take 
an internship in city or county government 
through the political science department. 



B. American Politics 

22 POLITICAL PARTIES AND INTEREST 
GROUPS 

An examination of the history, organiza- 
tion, functions, and methods of American 
political parties. Special attention is devoted 
to the role of organized interest groups in 
the political process. Alternate years. 

23 AMERICAN PRESIDENCY 

A study of the office and powers of the 
president with analysis of his major roles as 
chief administrator, legislator, political lead- 
er, foreign policy maker, and commander- 
in-chief. Special attention is given to those 
presidents who led the nation boldly. 

24 THE LEGISLATIVE PROCESS 

A study of the role of the legislature in the 
framework of the national and state gov- 
ernments. Consideration of the influence of 
the parties, pressure groups, public opinion, 
constituencies, the "committee system," the 
"administration," and the constitution in 
the lawmaking process. Alternate years. 



50 



28 CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN PUBLIC 
POLICY I 

Introduction to basic principles of policy 
analysis, including identification of contem- 
porary public policy problems, alternative 
solutions, formal government and other 
participants in the policy-making process, 
and evaluation of policy impact. Includes a 
detailed case-study analysis of one major 
policy controversy. This is a one-half unit 
course (first seven weeks of semester). Stu- 
dents wishing to register in full unit course 
should register for both PS 28 and PS 29; 
those wishing to register for a one-half unit 
course only should register for PS 28. Alter- 
nate years. 

29 CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN PUBLIC 
POLICY II 

A continuation of PS 28 with an emphasis 
on the variety of major issues in public poli- 
cy confronting American government and 
society. Includes a detailed case-study anal- 
ysis of one major public policy controversy 
(will differ from that analyzed in PS 28). 
This is a one-half unit course (second seven 
weeks of semester). Prerequisite: PS 28. 
Students wishing to register in a full-unit 
course should register for both PS 28 and 
PS 29. Alternate years. 

32 THE POLITICS OF CITIES AND 
SUBURBS 

An examination of the history, legal basis, 
power, forms, services, and problems of the 
cities and their suburbs, with special refer- 
ence to current experiments in the solution 
of the problems of metropolitan areas. 

C. Political Theory and Methodology 

35 LAW AND SOCIETY 

An examination of the nature, sources, 
functions, and limits of law as an instru- 
ment of political and social control. Includ- 
ed for discussion are legal problems pertain- 
ing to the family, crime, deviant behavior, 
poverty, and minority groups. Prerequisite: 
junior or senior standing or consent of in- 
structor. 

46 CONTEMPORARY POLITICAL 
IDEOLOGIES 

The growth, development, and current sta- 
tus of liberalism, conservatism, nationalism, 
socialism, communism, and fascism. Alter- 
nate years. 

47 THE AMERICAN POLITICAL 
TRADITION 

An examination of the significant ideas 
which have shaped the American political 
tradition from their European origins to the 
present, with emphasis on the influence of 
these ideas in the development of American 



democracy. Special attention will be paid to 
an analysis of contemporary ideological 
movements: Black power, new left, and rad- 
ical feminism. Alternate years. 

48 PUBLIC OPINION AND POLLING 

A course dealing with the general topic and 
methodology of polling. Content includes 
exploration of the processes by which peo- 
ple's political opinions are formed, the ma- 
nipulation of public opinion through the 
uses of propaganda, and the American re- 
sponse to politics and political issues. 



D. Comparative Politics 

20 EUROPEAN POLITICS 

A study of the political systems of East and 
West Europe with emphasis on comparison 
and patterns of government. The course 
will review politics in Northern (Britain, 
West Germany, Sweden), Latin (France, Ita- 
ly, Spain), and Eastern (Soviet Union, East 
Germany, Yugoslavia) Europe and attempt 
to find underlying similarities and differ- 
ences. 

26 POLITICAL CULTURES 

An exploration of the "people" aspects of 
political life in several countries. The way 
people interact with each other and with 
government, what they expect from the sys- 
tem, how they acquire their political atti- 
tudes and styles, and how these contribute 
to the type of government. Alternate years. 

38 POLITICS OF DEVELOPING AREAS 

The causes and possible cures for socio-po- 
litical backwardness in Asia, Africa, and 
Latin America. Alternate years. 



E. International Relations 

25 WORLD POLITICS 

Why is there war? An introduction to inter- 
national relations with emphasis on the va- 
rieties of conflicts which may grow into war. 

27 CRISIS AREAS IN WORLD POLITICS 

The study of several current areas of inter- 
national tension and conflict, including re- 
lations among the United States, Soviet Un- 
ion, and China, plus the Middle East and 
whatever new danger spots arise over time. 
Alternate years. 

39 AMERICAN FOREIGN POLICY 

The U.S. role in the world in geographic, 
strategic, historical, and ideological per- 
spectives, plus an examination of the do- 
mestic forces shaping U.S. policy. Alternate 
vears. 



F. Non-area Electives 

34 POLITICAL NEWSWRITING 

A workshop course in the reporting and re- 
writing of public affairs at the local, nation- 
al, and international levels. There will be 
neither texts nor examinations, but short 
written assignments will be due every class 
meeting. Prerequisite: English 18 or 19 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

36 MASS MEDIA LAW AND REGULATION 
An examination of the legal structure and 
the system by which mass communication is 
controlled in this society. The forces which 
shape, influence, and make policy will be 
considered. Cross-listed as Mass Communi- 
cation 31. 

G. Special Programs 

70-79 INTERNSHIPS (See Index) 

Students may receive academic credit for 
serving as interns in structured learning situ- 
ations with a wide variety of public and pri- 
vate agencies and organizations. Students 
have served as interns with the Public De- 
fender's office, the Lycoming County Court 
Administrator, and the Williamsport city 
government. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Current studies relate to elections — local, 
state, and federal — while past studies have 
included Soviet and world politics. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



PSYCHOLOGY 

Professor: Hancock (Chairman) 
Associate Professor: Berthold 
Assistant Professors: Newburg, Ryan 
Part-time Instructor: Vestermark 

The major provides training in both 
theoretical and applied psychology. It 
is designed to meet the needs of stu- 
dents seeking careers in psychology or 
other natural or social sciences. It also 
meets the needs of students seeking a 
better understanding of human behav- 
ior as a means of furthering individual 
and career goals in other areas. Certain 
courses are particularly appropriate 
for majors in other areas. Psychology 
majors and others are urged to discuss 



51 



course selections in psychology with 
members of the department to help in- 
sure appropriate course selection. 

A major consists of Psychology 10, 
31, 32, 36, and four other psychology 
courses. Statistics also is required. 

A minor in psychology consists of 
Psychology 10 and four other psychol- 
ogy courses which must be approved 
by the department. 

10 INTRODUCTORY PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the empirical study of 
human and other animal behavior. Areas 
considered may include: learning, personal- 
ity, social, physiological, sensory, cognition, 
and developmental. 

12 GROUP PROCESSES AND 

INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION 
The introduction to the research and theory 
from social psychology related to small- 
group dynamics and interpersonal commu- 
nication. Topics covered will include com- 
munication processes, interpretation of mo- 
tivation, conceptualization of individual 
personalities, problem solving and leader- 
ship. The first stage of the course will focus 
on research and theory; the second half will 
emphasize the development of skills and 
techniques where students become members 
of a self-analytic — practicing the skills and 
making a case study of the processes in- 
volved. May term only. 

15 INDUSTRIAL AND 
ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 
The application of the principles and meth- 
ods of psychology to selected industrial and 
organizational situations. Prerequisite: Psy- 
chology 10 or consent of instructor. 

16 ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the patterns of deviant 
behavior with emphasis on cause, function, 
and treatment. The various models for the 
conceptualization of abnormal behavior are 
critically examined. Prerequisite: Psycholo- 
gy 10. 

17 DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 

A study of the basic principles of early hu- 
man growth and development. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 10. 

18 ADOLESCENT PSYCHOLOGY 

The study areas will include theories of ado- 
lescence; current issues raised by as well as 
about the "generation of youth"; research 
findings bearing on theories and issues of 
growth beyond childhood, and self-explora- 
tion. Prerequisite: Psychology 10. 



24 SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An examination of behavior in social con- 
texts, including motivation, perception, 
group processes and leadership, attitudes, 
and methods of research. Prerequisite: Psy- 
chology 10. 

31 LEARNING EXPERIMENTAL 
PSYCHOLOGY 

Learning processes. The examination of the 
basic methods and principles of animal and 
human learning. Prerequisites: Psychology 
10 and statistics. 

32 SENSORY EXPERIMENTAL 
PSYCHOLOGY 

The examination of psychophysical method- 
ology and basic neurophysiological meth- 
ods as they are applied to the understanding 
of sensory processes. Prerequisites: Psy- 
chology 10 and statistics. 

33 PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the physiological psy- 
chologist's method of approach to the un- 
derstanding of behavior as well as the set of 
principles that relate the function and or- 
ganization of the nervous system to the phe- 
nomena of behavior. The course emphasis is 
on the relationship between brain function 
and the physiological bases of learning, per- 
ception, and motivation. Laboratory expe- 
rience includes both behavioral testing and 
basic small-animal neurosurgical technique 
as well as histological methodology. Prereq- 
uisite: Psychology 10 or consent of instruc- 
tor. 

34 PRINCIPLES OF MEASUREMENT 
Psychometric methods and theory, includ- 
ing scale transformation, norms, standardi- 
zation, validation procedures, and estima- 
tion of reliability. Prerequisites: Psychology 
10 and statistics. 

35 HISTORY AND SYSTEMS OF 
PSYCHOLOGY 

The growth of scientific psychology and the 
theories and systems that have accompanied 
its development. Prerequisite: four courses 
in psychology. 

36 PERSONALITY THEORY 

Theories of personality. A comparison of 
different theoretical views on the develop- 
ment and functioning of personality. Ex- 
amined in detail are three general viewpoints 
of personality: psychoanalytic, stimulus-re- 
sponse (behavioristic), and phenomenologi- 
cal. Prerequisite: Psychology 10. 

37 COGNITION 

An investigation of human mental processes 
along the two major dimensions of directed 
and undirected thought. Topic areas include 



recognition, attention, conceptualization, 
problem-solving, fantasy, language, dream- 
ing, and creativity. Prerequisite: Psychology 
10. 

38 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the empirical study of 
the teaching-learning process. Areas consid- 
ered may include educational objectives, 
pupil and teacher characteristics, concept 
learning, problem solving and creativity, at- 
titudes and values, motivation, retention 
and transfer, evaluation and measurement. 
Prerequisite: Psychology 10 or consent of 
instructor. 

39 BEHAVIOR MODIFICATION 

A detailed examination of the applied anal- 
ysis of behavior. Focus will be on the appli- 
cation of experimental method to the indi- 
vidual clinical case. The course will cover 
targeting, behavior, base-rating, interven- 
tion strategies, and outcome evaluation. 
Learning-based modification techniques 
such as contingency management, counter- 
conditioning, extinction, discrimination 
training, aversive conditioning, and nega- 
tive practice will be examined. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 10 or consent of instructor. 

41 PSYCHOLOGY OF WOMEN 

A review of contemporary theory and re- 
search on the psychology of women. Topics 
of discussion include the conflicts of women 
in today's society, psychological sex differ- 
ences, achievement motivation, the behav- 
ioral effect of hormones, and women in 
therapy. Prerequisite: Psychology 10. 

48-49 PRACTICUM IN PSYCHOLOGY 

An off-campus involvement in the applica- 
tion of psychological skills and principles in 
institutional settings. The experience in- 
cludes training in behavior modification 
and traditional counseling techniques as ap- 
plied in prisons, mental health centers, and 
schools for the mentally retarded. Class- 
room training focuses on various therapeut- 
ic techniques and on students' understand- 
ing of themselves in the counselor role. Pre- 
requisite: consent of instructor. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Internships give students an opportunity to 
relate on-campus academic experiences to 
society in general and to their post-bacca- 
laureate objectives in particular. Students 
have, for example, worked in prisons, pub- 
lic and private schools, county government, 
and for the American Red Cross. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Independent study is an opportunity for 
students to pursue special interests in areas 
lor which courses arc not offered. In addi- 
tion, students have an opportunity to study 



52 



a topic in more depth than is possible in the 
regular classroom situation. Studies in the 
past have included child abuse, counseling 
of hospital patients, and research in the psy- 
chology of natural disasters. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 
Honors in psychology requires original con- 
tributions to the literature of psychology 
through independent study. The most recent 
honors project was a study of the relation- 
ship between socio-economic status and 
visual versus auditory learning. 



RELIGION 

Professor: Guerra (Chairman) 
Associate Professor: Hughes 
Assistant Professor: Robinson 

A major consists of 10 courses, includ- 
ing Religion 13, 14, and 20. At least 
seven courses must be taken in the de- 
partment. The following courses may 
be counted toward fulfilling the major 
requirements: Greek 11 and 12, 
Hebrew 11 and 12, History 39 and 41, 
Philosophy 32, and Sociology 33. 

A minor in Religion consists of one 
course from Religion 10, 13, 14 and 
three religion courses numbered 20 or 
above. A minor in Biblical Languages 
consists of Greek 11, 12; Hebrew 11, 12. 

10 INTRODUCTION TO RELIGION 

Designed for the beginning student, this 
course examines what it means to be relig- 
ious. Some of the issues are the definition 
of religion, the meaning of symbolism, con- 
cepts of God, ecstatic phenomena. Specific 
attention will be devoted to the current 
problem of cults and religious liberty. 

13 OLD TESTAMENT FAITH AND 
HISTORY 

A critical examination of the literature 
within its historical setting and in the light 
of archaeological findings to show the faith 
and religious life of the Hebrew-Jewish 
community in the Biblical period, and an 
introduction to the history of interpretation 
with an emphasis on contemporary Old Tes- 
tament criticism and theology. 

14 NEW TESTAMENT FAITH AND 
HISTORY 

A critical examination of the literature 
within its historical setting to show the faith 



and religious life of the Christian communi- 
ty in the Biblical period, and an introduc- 
tion to the history of interpretation with an 
emphasis on contemporary New Testament 
criticism and theology. 

17 INTRODUCTION TO SUPERNATURAL 
PHENOMENA 

An examination of claims for supernatural 
or paranormal phenomena with an empha- 
sis on critical methodology and the evalua- 
tion of evidence. The course is designed to 
teach students the difference between the 
scientific and religious methodologies, the 
proper role of each, and the hazards of mix- 
ing the two. Subjects covered include ESP, 
Spiritualism, the Bermuda Triangle, witch- 
craft, faith healing, Noah's Ark, ghosts, 
monsters, and others. Offered May and 
summer terms only. 

20 DEATH AND DYING 

A study of death from personal, social, and 
universal standpoints with emphasis upon 
what the dying may teach the living. Princi- 
pal issues are the stages of dying, bereave- 
ment, suicide, funeral conduct, and the re- 
ligious doctrines of death and immortality. 
Course includes, as optional, practical pro- 
jects with terminal patients under profes- 
sional supervision. Only one course from 
the combination 20-21 may be used for dis- 
tribution. 

21 AFTER DEATH AND DYING 

An examination of the question of life after 
death in terms of contemporary clinical 
studies, the New Testament resurrection 
narratives, the Asian doctrine of reincarna- 
tion, and the classical theological beliefs of 
providence and predestination. Religion 20 
is recommended but not required. Only one 
course from the combination 20-21 may be 
used for distribution. 

22 PROTESTANTISM IN THE MODERN 
WORLD 

An examination of Protestant thought and 
life from Luther to the present against the 
backdrop of a culture rapidly changing 
from the 17th century scientific revolution 
to Marxism, Darwinism, and depth psy- 
chology. Special attention will be paid to the 
constant interaction between Protestantism 
and the world in which it finds itself. 

23 CHRISTIAN ORIGINS 

A study of the historical, cultural, and relig- 
ious background of the formation of Chris- 
tianity and the antecedents of Christian be- 
lief and practice in post-exilic Judaism and 
in Hellenism. 

24 JUDAISM AND ISLAM 

An examination of the rise, growth, and ex- 
pansion of Judaism and Islam with special 



attention given to the theological contents 
of the literatures of these religions as far as 
they are normative in matters of faith, prac- 
tice, and organization. Also, a review of 
their contributions to the spiritual heritage 
of mankind. 

25 ORIENTAL RELIGION 

A phenomenological study of the basic con- 
tent of Hinduism, Buddhism, and Chinese 
Taoism with special attention to social and 
political relations, mythical and aesthetic 
forms, and the East-West dialogue. 

26 BIBLICAL ARCHAEOLOGY 

A study of the role of archaeology in recon- 
structing the world in which the Biblical lit- 
erature originated with special attention giv- 
en to archaeological results that throw light 
on the clarification of the Biblical text. Al- 
so, an introduction to basic archaeological 
method and a study in depth of several rep- 
resentative excavations along with the arti- 
facts and material culture recovered from 
different historical periods. 

28 HISTORY AND CULTURE OF THE 
ANCIENT NEAR EAST 
A study of the history and culture of Meso- 
potamia, Anatolia, Syria-Palestine, and 
Egypt from the rise of the Sumerian culture 
to Alexander the Great. Careful attention 
will be given to the religious views prevalent 
in the ancient Near East as far as these views 
interacted with the culture and faith of Bib- 
lical man. 

30 PSYCHOLOGY OF RELIGION 

A study into the broad insights of psycholo- 
gy in relation to the phenomena of religion 
and religious behavior. The course concen- 
trates on religious experience or manifesta- 
tions rather than concepts. Tentative solu- 
tions will be sought to questions such as: 
What does it feel like to be religious or to 
have a religious experience? What is the re- 
ligious function in human development? 
How does one think psychologically about 
theological problems? 

31 CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS 

A study of Christian ethics as a normative 
perspective for contemporary moral prob- 
lems with emphasis upon the interaction of 
law and religion, decision making in the field 
of biomedical practice, and the reconstruc- 
tion of society in a planetary civilization. 

32 CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS IN 
CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS 

An examination of the approach of religion 
and other disciplines to an issue of current 
concern; current topics include the theologi- 
cal significance of law, the ethics of love, 
and the Holocaust. The course may be re- 



53 



pealed for credit if the topic is different 
from one previously studied. 

37 BIBLICAL TOPICS 

An in-depth study of Biblical topics related 
to the Old and New Testaments. Topics in- 
clude prophecy, wisdom literature, the Dead 
Sea Scrolls, the teachings of Jesus, Pauline 
theology, Judaism and Christian origins, re- 
action criticism — the way the Synoptic 
Gospels and John give final form to their 
message. Course will vary from year to year 
and may be taken for credit a second time if 
the topic is different from one previously 
studied. 

41 CONTEMPORARY RELIGIOUS ISSUES 
A study of the theological significance of 
some contemporary intellectual develop- 
ments in western culture. The content of 
this course will vary from year to year. Sub- 
jects studied in recent years include the the- 
ological significance of Freud, Marx, and 
Nietzsche; Christianity and existentialism; 
theology and depth psychology, the religious 
dimension of contemporary literature. 

42 THE NATURE AND MISSION OF THE 
CHURCH 

A study of the nature of the Church as 
"The People of God" with reference to the 
Biblical, Protestant, Orthodox, and Roman 
Catholic traditions. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Interns in religion usually work in local 
churches under the supervision of the pastor 
and a member of the faculty. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Current study areas are in the Biblical lan- 
guages, New Testament theology, compara- 
tive religions, and the ethics of technology. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 

A recent project was on the theology of 
hope with reference to the thought of Ernst 
Bloch and Alfred North Whitehead. 



SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 

Professor: McCrary 

Associate Professors: Jo (Chairman), 

Wilk 
Assistant Professor: Strauser 

The Sociology/Anthropology Depart- 
ment offers two tracks in the major. 



Both tracks introduce the students to 
the fundamental concepts of the disci- 
pline, and both tracks prepare the stu- 
dent for graduate school. 

Track I emphasizes the theoretical 
aspects of sociology and anthropology. 
Track II emphasizes the application of 
sociology and anthropology to human 
services. 

Track I — Sociology-Anthropology 
requires the core course sequence 10, 
14, 29, 44, and 47 and three other 
courses within the department with the 
exception of 15, 22, 23, 25, 40, and 43. 
Religion 26 may also be counted to- 
ward the major. 

Track II — Human Services in a So- 
cio-Cultural Perspective requires: So- 
ciology-Anthropology 10, 22, 29, 43, 
44, and 47. In addition, students must 
select two courses from among the fol- 
lowing: Sociology-Anthropology 20, 
21, 27, 28, 30, 34, and 35. Students are 
also required to choose two units from 
the following courses: Psychology 10, 
Psychology 24, Economics 24, Politi- 
cal Science 28-29, and Political Science 
33. Recommended courses: Account- 
ing 10, Accounting 26, Spanish 10, 
Spanish 11, History 13, Political Sci- 
ence 32, and Philosophy 34. 

Majors in both tracks are encour- 
aged to participate in the internship 
program. 

A minor in Sociological and Anthro- 
pological Views of Religion for those 
interested in theology or a ministerial 
career consists of four sociology-an- 
thropology courses from among 26, 
32, 33, 36, and 46. 

10 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGY 

An introduction to the problems, concepts, 
and methods in sociology today, including 
analysis of stratification, organization of 
groups and institutions, social movements, 
and deviants in social structure. 

14 INTRODUCTION TO ANTHROPOLOGY 

An introduction to the subfields of anthro- 
pology; its subject matter, methodology, 
and goals. Examination of biological and 
cultural evolution, the fossil evidence for 
human evolution, and questions raised in 
relation to human evolution. Other topics 
include race, human nature, primate behav- 
ior, and prehistoric cultural development. 



15 INTRODUCTION TO AMERICAN 
CRIMINAL JUSTICE SYSTEM 
An introduction to the role of law enforce- 
ment, courts, and corrections in the admin- 
istration of justice; the historical develop- 
ment of police, courts, and corrections; jur- 
isdiction and procedures of courts; an in- 
troduction to the studies, literature, and re- 
search in criminal justice; careers in crimi- 
nal justice. 

20 MARRIAGE AND THE FAMILY 

The history, structure, and functions of 
modern American family life, emphasizing 
dating, courtship, factors in marital adjust- 
ment, and the changing status of family 
members. Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthro- 
pology 10 or consent of instructor. 

21 JUVENILE DELINQUENCY 

A multidisciplinary approach to the study 
of the constellation of factors that relate to 
juvenile delinquency causation, handling 
the juvenile delinquent in the criminal 
justice system, treatment strategies, preven- 
tion, and community responsibility. Prereq- 
uisite: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

22 INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN 
SERVICES 

The course is designed for students interest- 
ed in learning about, or entering, the human 
services profession. It will review the histo- 
ry, the range, and the goals of human ser- 
vices together with a survey of various stra- 
tegies and approaches to human problems. 
It will include practical discussions of social 
behavioral differences as they relate to stress 
and conflict in people's lives. Prerequisite: 
Sociology- A nthropology 10 and/or Psychol- 
ogy 10 or consent of instructor. 

23 INTRODUCTION TO LAW 
ENFORCEMENT 

Principles, theories, and doctrines of the 
law of crimes, elements in crime, analysis of 
criminal investigation, important case law. 
Prerequisite: Sociology- Anthropology IS or 
consent of instructor. 

24 RURAL AND URBAN COMMUNITIES 
The concept of community is treated as it 
operates and affects individual and group 
behavior in rural, suburban, and urban set- 
tings. Emphasis is placed upon characteris- 
tic institutions and problems of modern city 
life. Prerequisite: Sociology- Anthropology 
10 or consent of instructor. 

25 INTRODUCTION TO CRIMINAL 
INVESTIGATION 

This course is designed for advanced crimi- 
nal justice majors. Emphasis is placed on an 
in-depth study of detection and investiga- 



54 



tion of major crimes. Particular attention is 
placed on the use of criminalistics, legal pa- 
rameters of evidence and interrogation, and 
prosecutory procedures. Prerequisite: Soci- 
ology-Anthropology 23 or consent of in- 
structor. Will not be counted toward the so- 
ciology/anthropology major. 

26 SOCIAL MOVEMENTS 

An analysis of the dynamics, structure, and 
reactions to social movements with focus on 
contemporary social movements. Prerequi- 
site: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or consent 
of instructor. 

27 SOCIAL PROBLEMS 

The course examines the causes, character- 
istics, and consequences of social problems 
in America from diverse socio-cultural per- 
spectives. Topics discussed typically include 
crime, urban crises, family disorganization, 
poverty, race problems, drug abuse, and 
other related issues. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor. 

28 AGING AND SOCIETY 

Analysis of cross-cultural characteristics of 
the aged as individuals and as members of 
groups. Emphasis is placed upon variables: 
health, housing, socio-economic status, per- 
sonal adjustment, retirement, and social 
participation. Sociological, social psycholo- 
gical, and anthropological frames of refer- 
ence utilized in analysis and description of 
aging and its relationship to society, culture, 
and personality. 

29 CULTURAL ANTHROPOLOGY 

An examination of cultural and social an- 
thropology designed to familiarize the stu- 
dent with the analytical approaches to the 
diverse cultures of the world. The relevancy 
of cultural anthropology for an understand- 
ing of the human condition will be stressed. 
Topics to be covered include the nature of 
primitive societies in contrast to civiliza- 
tions, the concept of culture and cultural re- 
lativism, the individual and culture, the so- 
cial patterning of behavior and social con- 
trol, an anthropological perspective on the 
culture of the United States. 

30 CRIMINOLOGY 

Analysis of the sociology of law, conditions 
under which criminal laws develop, etiology 
of crime, epidemiology of crime, including 
explanation of statistical distribution of 
criminal behavior in terms of time, space, 
and social location. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor. 

31 SOCIOLOGY OF WOMEN 

A sociological examination of the role of 
women in American society through an 
analysis of the social institutions which af- 



fect their development. Role-analysis theory 
will be applied to the past, present, and fu- 
ture experience of women as it relates to the 
role options of society as a whole. Students 
will do an original research project on the 
role of women. Prerequisite: Sociology-An- 
thropology 10. Alternate years. 

32 INSTITUTIONS 

Introduces the student to the sociological 
concept of social institution, the types of 
social institutions to be found in all socie- 
ties, and the interrelationships between the 
social institutions within a society. The 
course is divided into two basic parts: 1. 
That aspect which deals with the systematic 
organization of society in general, and 2. 
The concentration on a particular social in- 
stitution: economic, political, educational, 
or social welfare. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor. 

33 SOCIOLOGY OF RELIGION 

An examination of the major theories of the 
relationship of religion to society and a sur- 
vey of sociological studies of religious be- 
havior. Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropol- 
ogy 10 or consent of instructor. 

34 RACIAL AND CULTURAL 
MINORITIES 

Study of racial, cultural, and national 
groups within the framework of American 
cultural values. An analysis will include his- 
torical, cultural, and social factors underly- 
ing ethnic and racial conflict. Field trips and 
individual reports are part of the require- 
ments for the course. Prerequisite: Sociolo- 
gy-Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor. 

35 CULTURE AND PERSONALITY 
Introduction to psychological anthropolo- 
gy, its theories and methodologies. Empha- 
sis will be placed on the relationship between 
individual and culture, national character, 
cognition and culture, culture and mental 
disorders, and cross-cultural considerations 
of the concept of self. Prerequisite: Sociolo- 
gy-Anthropology 29 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Offered at least once every three years. 

36 THE ANTHROPOLOGY OF 
PRIMITIVE RELIGIONS 

The course will familiarize the student with 
the wealth of anthropological data on the 
religions and world views developed by 
primitive peoples. The functions of primi- 
tive religion in regard to the individual, so- 
ciety, and various cultural institutions will 
be examined. Subjects to be surveyed in- 
clude myth, witchcraft, vision quests, spirit 
possession, the cultural use of dreams, and 
revitalization movements. Particular em- 
phasis will be given to shamanism, transcul- 
tural religious experience, and the creation 
of cultural realities through religions. Both 



a social scientific and existentialist perspec- 
tive will be employed. Prerequisite: Sociolo- 
gy-Anthropology 29 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Alternate years. 

37 THE ANTHROPOLOGY OF 
AMERICAN INDIANS 

An ethnographic survey of native North 
American Indian and Eskimo cultures, such 
as the Iroquois, Plains Indians, Pueblos, 
Kwakiutl, and Netsilik. Changes in native 
lifeways due to European contacts and Unit- 
ed States expansion will be considered. Re- 
cent cultural developments among Ameri- 
can Indians will be placed in an anthropolo- 
gical perspective. Offered at least once 
every three years. 

38 LEGAL AND POLITICAL 
ANTHROPOLOGY 

The course is designed to familiarize the 
student with the techniques of conflict reso- 
lution and the utilization of public power in 
primitive society as well as the various theo- 
ries of primitive law and government. The 
rise of the state and an anthropological per- 
spective on modern law and government 
will be included. The concepts of self-regu- 
lation and social control, legitimacy, coer- 
cion, and exploitation will be the organizing 
focus. Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropolo- 
gy 29 or consent of instructor. Alternate 
years. 

39 THE AMERICAN PRISON SYSTEM 
Nature and history of punishment, evolu- 
tion of the prison and prison methods with 
emphasis on prison community, prison ar- 
chitecture, institutional programs, inmate 
rights, and sentences. Review of punish- 
ment versus treatment, detention facilities, 
jails, reformatories, prison organization 
and administration, custody, and discipline. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 15. 

40 PROBATION AND PAROLE 

A course designed for the advanced crimi- 
nal justice major. While the course concerns 
the study of probation and parole as parts 
of the criminal justice system and their im- 
pact on the system as a whole, the primary 
emphasis is the impact on the offender. Par- 
ticular attention is given to diagnostic re- 
port writing on offenders, pre-sentence in- 
vestigation, offender classification, and pa- 
role planning. Prerequisite: Sociology-An- 
thropology 15 and 39. Alternate years. 

41 SOCIAL STRATIFICATION 

An analysis of stratification systems with 
specific reference to American society. The 
course will include an analysis of poverty, 
wealth, and power in the United States. Par- 
ticular attention will be given to factors 
which generate and maintain inequality, 
along with the impacts of inequality on the 



55 



lives of Americans. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor. 

43 HUMAN SERVICES IN HELPING 
INSTITUTIONS 

The course examines the organizational and 
conceptual context within which human ser- 
vices are delivered in contemporary society. 
Subjects to be covered include ethnographic 
study of nursing homes, prisons, therapeut- 
ic communities, mental hospitals and other 
human service institutions. The methodolo- 
gy of fieldwork will be explored so as to 
sensitize the student to the socio-cultural di- 
mensions of helping environments and rela- 
tionships. Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthro- 
pology 10 or Sociology-Anthropology 29 or 
consent of instructor. A Iternate years. 

44 SOCIAL THEORY 

The history of the development of sociolo- 
gical thought from its earliest philosophical 
beginnings is treated through discussions 
and reports. Emphasis is placed upon socio- 
logical thought since the time of Comte. 
Prerequisite: Sociology- Anthropology 10 or 
consent of instructor. 

45 ANTHROPOLOGICAL THEORY 

The history of the development of anthro- 
pological thought from the 18th century to 
the present. Emphasis is placed upon an- 
thropological thought since 1850. Topics in- 
clude evolutionism, historical-particular- 
ism, cultural idealism, cultural materialism, 
functionalism, structuralism, and ethno- 
scence. Prerequisite: Sociology-A nthropol- 
ogy 29 or consent of instructor. Offered at 
least once every three years. 

46 PEOPLE AND CULTURES OF THE 
AMERICAN SOUTHWEST 

Field experience in the analysis of tricultural 
communities of Northern New Mexico, 
Southern Colorado, and Northeastern Ari- 
zona, including the eastern Pueblos of New 
Mexico; Zuni, Navajo, and Apache reserva- 
tions; isolated Spanish-American mountain 
villages of Northern New Mexico; religious 
ashrams and communes; and cities of the 
Southwest and Juarez, Mexico. Emphasis 
upon Taos, Rio Arriba, Santa Fe, and Los 
Alamos counties of New Mexico. Prerequi- 
site: Sociology 10 or consent of instructor. 
May or summer only. 

47 RESEARCH METHODS IN 
SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 
Study of the research process in sociology- 
anthropology. Attention is given to the pro- 
cess of designing and administering re- 
search and the application of research. Dif- 
ferent methodological skills are considered, 
including field work, questionnaire con- 
struction, and other methods of data gath- 
ering and the analysis of data. Prerequisite: 



Sociology- Anthropology 10 and Mathemat- 
ics 13 or consent of instructor. 

48-49 PRACTICUM IN SOCIOLOGY 

Introduces the student to a practical work 
experience involving community agencies in 
order to effect a synthesis of the student's 
academic course work and its practical ap- 
plications in a community agency. Specifics 
of the course to be worked out in conjunc- 
tion with department, student, and agency. 
Prerequisite: Sociology- Anthropology 10 or 
consent of instructor. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Interns in sociology-anthropology typically 
work off campus with social service agen- 
cies under the supervision of administrators. 
However, other internship experiences, such 
as with the Lycoming County Historical 
Museum, are available. Interns in criminal 
justice work off campus in criminal justice 
agencies, such as penal institutions and pro- 
bation and parole departments, under the 
supervision of administrative personnel. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
An opportunity to pursue specific interests 
and topics not usually covered in regular 
courses. Through a program of readings 
and tutorials, the student will have the op- 
portunity to pursue these interests and top- 
ics in greater depth than is usually possible 
in a regular course. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



THEATRE 

Professor: Falk (Chairman) 
Assistant Professor: Carlson 

The major consists of eight courses: 
Theatre 10 and seven others; a concen- 
tration in acting, directing, or design is 
possible. In addition to the course re- 
quirements, majors are expected to 
participate actively in Arena Theatre 
productions. Majors are urged to in- 
clude courses in art, music, psycholo- 
gy, and English, or other areas of spe- 
cial interest. 

Three minors are available in the 
Theatre department. A minor in thea- 
tre history and literature consists of 
Theatre 10, 32, 33, 35, and 40. The fol- 
lowing courses are required to com- 



plete a minor in performance: Theatre 
10, 14, 26, 34, 36, and either 32 or 33. 
To obtain a minor in technical theatre, 
a student must complete Theatre 10, 
18, 28, 38, and 42 or 43. 

The fine arts distribution require- 
ment may be satisfied by selecting any 
two of the following recommended 
courses: Theatre 10, 11, 14, 18, 32, 33 
or other courses with the consent of 
the instructor. 

10 INTRODUCTION TO THEATRE 
Designed as a comprehensive introduction 
to the aesthetics of theatre. From the specta- 
tor's point of view, the nature of theatre will 
be explored, including dramatic literature 
and the integrated functioning of acting, di- 
recting, and all production aspects. 

11 INTRODUCTION TO FILM 

A basic course in understanding the film 
medium. The class will investigate film 
technique through lectures and by viewing 
regular weekly films chosen from classic, 
contemporary, and experimental short films. 

14 INTRODUCTION TO ACTING 

An introductory study of the actor's prepa- 
ration with emphasis on developing the ac- 
tor's creative imagination through improvi- 
sations and scene study. 

18 INTRODUCTION TO PLAY 
PRODUCTION 

Stagecraft and the various other aspects of 
play production are introduced. Through 
material presented in the course and labora- 
tory work on the Arena Theatre stage, the 
student will acquire experience to produce 
theatrical scenery. 

26 INTRODUCTION TO DIRECTING 

An introductory study of the function of 
the director in preparation, rehearsal, and 
performance. Emphasis is placed on devel- 
oping the student's ability to analyze scripts, 
and on the development of the student's im- 
agination. Prerequisite: Theatre 14. 

28 INTRODUCTION TO SCENE DESIGN 
AND STAGECRAFT 

An introduction to the theatre with an em- 
phasis on stagecraft. Productions each se- 
mester serve as the laboratory to provide 
the practical experience necessary to under- 
stand the material presented in the class- 
room. Prerequisite: Theatre 18 or consent 
of instructor. 

31 ADVANCED TECHNIQUES OF PLAY 
PRODUCTION 

A detailed consideration of the interrelated 
problems and techniques of play analysis, 



56 



production styles, and design. Offered sum- 
mer only. 

32 HISTORY OF THEATRE I 

A detailed study of the development of the- 
atre from the Greeks to the Restoration. Al- 
ternate years. 

33 HISTORY OF THEATRE II 

The history of the theatre from 1660. Alter- 
nate years. 

34 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: ACTING 

Instruction and practice in character analy- 
sis and projection with emphasis on vocal 
and body techniques. Prerequisite: Theatre 
14. 

35 THEORIES OF THE MODERN 
THEATRE 

An advanced course exploring the philo- 
sophical roots of the modern theatre from 
the birth of realism to the present and the 
influences on modern theatre practice. Se- 
lected readings from Nietzsche, Marx, Jung, 
Freud, Whitehead, Kierkegaard, Sartre, 
Camus, Antoine, Copeau, Stanislavski, 
Shaw, Meyerhold, Artaud, Brecht, Brook, 
Grotowski. Alternate years. 

36 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: DIRECTING 
Emphasis is placed on the student's ability 
to function in preparation and rehearsal. 
Practical experience involves the directing 
of two one-act plays from the contemporary 
theatre. Prerequisite: Theatre 26. 

37 PLAYWRITING AND DRAMATIC 
CRITICISM 

An investigation of the techniques of play- 
writing with an emphasis on creative writ- 
ing, culminating in a written one-act play, 
plus an historical survey of dramatic criti- 
cism from Aristotle to the present with em- 
phasis upon developing the student's ability 
to write reviews and criticism of theatrical 
productions and films. Alternate years. 

38 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: LIGHTING 
DESIGN 

The theory of stage and lighting design with 
emphasis on their practical application to 
the theatre. Prerequisite: Theatre 18 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

40 MASTERS OF WORLD DRAMA 

An intensive and detailed analysis of the 
plays and related works, including criticism 
of great authors, that have shaped world 
theatre. Authors to be selected on the basis 
of interest of students and faculty. At times, 
more than one author will be treated in a 
term. Ibsen, Brecht, Moliere, Williams, 
Albee. Alternate years. May be accepted to- 
ward English major with consent of English 
Department. 



42 ADVANCED STUDIO: COSTUME 
DESIGN 

The theory of costuming for the stage, ele- 
ments of design, planning, production, and 
construction of costumes for the theatre. 
Students will participate in the design of a 
production. Prerequisite: Theatre 18 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

43 ADVANCED STUDIO: PROPERTIES 
DESIGN 

The theory of properties design for the 
stage, including the production of specific 
properties for staging use. Elements of de- 
sign, fabrication, and the construction of 
properties employing a variety of materials 
and the application of new theatrical tech- 
nology. Prerequisite: Theatre 18 or consent 
of instructor. 

44 ADVANCED STUDIO: ACTING 
Preparation of monologues and two-char- 
acter scenes, contemporary and classical. 
The student will appear in major campus 
productions. Prerequisite: Theatre 34. 

46 ADVANCED STUDIO: DIRECTING 
Emphasis will be placed on the student's 



ability to produce a major three-act play 
from the script to the stage for public per- 
formance. Prerequisite: Theatre 36. 

48 ADVANCED STUDIO: DESIGN 

Independent work in conceptual and prac- 
tical design. The student will design one full 
production as his major project. Prerequi- 
site: Theatre 28 or 38 and consent of in- 
structor. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Interns in theatre work off campus in thea- 
tres such as the Guthrie Theatre, Minneapo- 
lis, and at the New Jersey Shakespeare Festi- 
val. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Some recent independent studies have been 
the roles of women as characters in drama, 
scene design, and lighting design for an 
Arena production. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 

A typical study could be the writing and 

production of an original play. 




57 



Student Services 



ADMINISTRATION 

The program of student services at Ly- 
coming is administered by the Office 
of Student Services. It is designed to 
respond to a diversity of student needs. 
The six staff members, five of whom 
live on campus, are assigned the spe- 
cific responsibilities of: 

— career counseling and placement; 

— residence life; 

— student activities, student union, 
student government, Interfrater- 
nity Council and Panhellenic Ad- 
viser, retention program; 

— religious life, health services, stu- 
dy skills program, reading im- 
provement courses. 

All members of the staff are availa- 
ble to counsel and advise individual 
students. 



PERSONAL COUNSELING 

All members of the staff of the Office 
of Student Services are qualified and 
available to provide non-therapeutic 
assistance to students with adjustment 
problems. A part-time clinical psy- 
chologist provides short-term therapy 
for students needing assistance. Con- 
tinuing therapy is available through 
referral to public agencies and private 
clinicians in the Williamsport commu- 
nity. Financial arrangements for these 
referral services are made directly by 
the student with the agency and/or in- 
dividual clinician involved. 



HEALTH SERVICES 

Normal medical treatment by the health 
service staff at the College is provided 
without cost to the student. During the 
fall and spring semesters, the College 
maintains an out-patient service in 
Rich Hall. It is staffed with a registered 
nurse five days a week from 9 a.m. to 
5 p.m. The College physician is availa- 
ble from 11 a.m. to 12 noon, Monday 
through Friday. At other times, emer- 
gency care is available at the emergen- 
cy rooms of Williamsport and Divine 



Providence Hospitals, located a short 
distance from the campus. 

Medical-service charges paid by the 
student are: emergency room and 
emergency room physician's charges, 
special medications, X-rays, surgery, 
care for major accidents, immuniza- 
tions, examinations for glasses, physi- 
cian's visits other than in the health 
service, referrals for treatment by spe- 
cialists, special nursing services, and 
special services. 

Entering students must provide ba- 
sic health information to the College 
between the time of admission and the 
beginning of classes of the term to 
which they are admitted. This infor- 
mation is secured through participa- 
tion in the computerized health-infor- 
mation service provided by Medical 
Datamation, Inc. New students com- 
plete the DASH Medical Information 
Questionnaire that is mailed to stu- 
dents shortly after they have confirmed 
their admission to Lycoming. The com- 
pleted form is sent by the student to 
Medical Datamation together with a 
check for $11. Both the student and the 
College receive reports based on the 
questionnaire responses. The student 
report consists of a Medical Database 
Report, a Hazards Risk Index, and a 
health information brochure as re- 
quested. Information provided by the 
student is confidential and is available 
only to qualified health service and 
student-services personnel. 

A student accident and health insur- 
ance program is provided through the 
College. Students who do not have 
their own coverage or are not included 
in family coverage are required to pur- 
chase this plan. Information on the 
plan is mailed to every student. 

STUDY IMPROVEMENT 
SERVICES 

Skills Seminars— The seminars con- 
sist of three one-hour sessions on 
scheduling of time, test-taking, and 
study methods. They are scheduled on 
demand for six to 10 students. 

Reading Course— Designed to im- 
prove reading speed and comprehen- 



sion, this three-week course is offered 
at various times during the academic 
year for a fee of $15. 



CAREER DEVELOPMENT 
SERVICES 

The Career Development Center pro- 
vides services which are designed to 
help students identify their abilities 
and interest, set realistic career goals, 
and plan academic programs to meet 
these goals. Counseling for Lycoming 
students begins in the freshman year. 
In addition to individual guidance, 
the center maintains a library on spe- 
cific careers, employment outlooks, 
and career trends. Services offered by 
the center include: 

— individual counseling; 

— career-planning seminars in val- 
ues clarification, skill assessment, 
and decision making; 

— 2500-volume career library; 

— relaxation workshops and asser- 
tiveness training; 

— SHARE (Students Having A 
Real Experience), a program in 
which students observe and work 
with a professional in the field; 

— placement services to aid seniors 
in implementing their career 
plans; 

— assistance to students in securing 
internships, summer employment, 
and part-time employment; 

— speaker's program which brings 
professionals from a variety of 
careers to campus seminars; 

— video-cassette programs relating 
to job skills and career informa- 
tion; 

— microfiche copies of graduate- 
and professional-school catalogs 
for the United States and abroad. 



RESIDENCE AND RESIDENCE 
HALLS 

Single students who do not live at 
home are required to live in residence 
halls and eat in the dining room. All 



58 



new resident students are forwarded a 
room-agreement form to sign after 
confirmation of their admission to Ly- 
coming. This agreement is renewed 
each spring. Exceptions to the resi- 
dence policy may be granted to those 
students who wish to live with rela- 
tives, and students who are 23 years of 
age or older. Requests for such exemp- 
tions must be submitted to the Associ- 
ate Dean of Student Services for Resi- 
dence Life before the first day of the 
term to which the student has been ad- 
mitted. 

Resident students assume responsi- 
bility for their rooms and furnishings. 
The College reserves the right to enter 
and inspect any room for reasons of 
damage, health, or safety, and to 
search any room when there is reason 
to believe a violation of College rules 
or the law is occurring or has occurred. 
Charges are assessed for damage to 
rooms, doors, furniture, and common 
areas. Wherever possible, damage to 
dormitory property will be charged to 
the person or persons directly respon- 
sible. Damage and breakage occurring 
in a room will be the responsibility of 
students occupying the room. Hall and 
bathroom damages will be the respon- 
sibility of all students of the section 
where damage occurs. Actual costs of 
repairs will be charged. 

Residence halls are not available for 
occupancy during the vacation periods. 
Quiet hours for study purposes, which 
are established by residence hall coun- 
cils or the Office of Student Services, 
are published in the student handbook 
and posted on bulletin boards. 

Room visitation by members of the 
opposite sex is permitted in the halls 
under conditions established by the 
College in cooperation with the vari- 
ous residence hall councils, which share 
responsibility for developing and mon- 
itoring regulations, and which are or- 
ganized each fall semester before visi- 
tation schedules are established. 



STANDARDS OF CONDUCT 

Lycoming students are expected to ac- 



cept responsibilities required of adults. 
The rights of every member of the Col- 
lege community are protected by es- 
tablished regulations. Although the 
acceptance of the College's standards 
of behavior is an individual responsi- 
bility, it also calls for group responsi- 
bility. Students should influence their 
peers to conduct themselves responsi- 
bly for the collective good. 

Students who are unable to demon- 
strate that they have accepted these re- 
sponsibilities or who fail to abide by 
established policies may be dismissed 
at any time or denied readmission for 
a subsequent term or semester. Further, 
after the conclusion of any term or se- 
mester, the College may deny a student 
the privilege of attending any subse- 
quent term or semester when the ad- 
ministration deems this to be in the 
best interest of the College. 

Lycoming College does not approve 
of the use or misuse of alcoholic bever- 
ages and encourages students to ab- 
stain from their use and to abide by 
the legal restrictions on alcohol use es- 
tablished by the Commonwealth of 
Pennsylvania. Observance of the law is 
the individual responsibility of each 



student, and failure to obey the law 
may subject the student to prosecution 
by civil authorities, either on or off 
campus. 

Students also are expected to be 
aware of the College's attitude toward 
the use and misuse of alcohol and to 
acknowledge the College's right to its 
position. The College will not tolerate 
any public use of alcohol. Officials of 
the College will prescribe penalties for 
the public use or private misuse of al- 
cohol. These penalties will be applied 
in a consistent manner. 

Lycoming recognizes its responsibil- 
ity, however, for providing students 
with reliable information about the so- 
cial and medical implications of the 
use of alcohol. Lycoming makes every 
effort to create and maintain a com- 
munity in which individual choice is 
coupled with responsible behavior and 
respect for the rights of others. 

Upon enrolling, students are given a 
handbook which contains the College's 
official policies, rules, and regulations. 
These policies, rules, and regulations 
are part of the contractual agreement 
students enter into when they register 
at Lycoming. 




59 



Admission to Lycoming 



POLICY AND STANDARDS 

Lycoming College welcomes applica- 
tions from prospective students re- 
gardless of age, sex, race, religion, fi- 
nancial resources, color, national or 
ethnic origin, or handicap. Admission 
is based on the following standards: 

— graduation from an accredited 
secondary school; 

— completion of a college prepara- 
tory program that includes Eng- 
lish and mathematics plus units 
in foreign language, natural sci- 
ence and social science; 

— satisfactory College Entrance Ex- 
amination Board Scholastic Ap- 
titude Test (SAT) or American 
College Test (ACT) scores. 

A secondary-school student of ex- 
ceptional maturity and with significant 
academic preparation may apply to 
Lycoming as a candidate for early ad- 
mission. If admitted, the student enters 
the College after completing the junior 
year in school. Students who are not 
enrolled in a degree program and who 
wish to enroll in one or more courses 
in any semester are welcome to apply. 

Lycoming is fully approved for the 
educational program for veterans. 



APPLICATION AND SELECTION 
PROCESS 

For students considering a fall semester 
admission, applications should be filed 
by April 1. The application should be 
accompanied by a $20 application fee, 
an official secondary school transcript 
forwarded by the school guidance of- 
fice, and the results of either the Scho- 
lastic Aptitude Test (SAT) or the 
American College Test (ACT). Appli- 
cations are considered after April 1 on 
a space-available basis. 

The completed application is evalu- 
ated individually by identifying each 
applicant's academic achievement, tal- 
ents, qualities, and interests. Lycom- 
ing notifies applicants of their accep- 
tance as soon as possible after all cre- 
dentials have been received and evalu- 
ated. In some instances, additional in- 



formation may be needed to complete 
the evaluation. The review process nor- 
mally begins after January 1. 

Admitted applicants must notify the 
College of their intent to enroll by 
May 1, the national candidates' reply 
date. This notification must be accom- 
panied by a $100 (attendance) deposit 
for commuting students, and a $200 
(attendance and room) deposit for res- 
idence students. After May 1, the de- 
posits are not refundable. 

ADVANCED STANDING BY 
TRANSFER 

The College welcomes transfer stu- 
dents from other accredited colleges 
and universities according to the fol- 
lowing standards and procedures: 

— applicants should be in good 
academic standing and should 
have a cumulative grade point 
average of 2.0 in transferable 
courses at their former institu- 
tion; 

— courses that are reasonably com- 
parable to those offered at Ly- 
coming will be accepted for trans- 
fer, if the grade C or better is 
earned; 

— grades earned at previous institu- 
tions will not be included in the 
computation of the grade point 
average; 

— class standing at Lycoming will 
be based on the number of cred- 
its accepted for transfer; 

— transfer students will be eligible 
to earn appointments to the 
Dean's List, but to be considered 
for honors at commencement at 
least 64 credits must be earned at 
Lycoming; 

— students will be eligible for class 
rank after completing eight 
courses at Lycoming; 

— official copies of transcripts from 
all institutions attended must be 
submitted as a part of the admis- 
sions application. 

— the residency requirement for a 
degree is eight courses or 32 cred- 
its. The final eight courses must 
be taken at Lycoming. 



EARLY DECISION 

Students wishing an early decision to 
Lycoming College must apply by No- 
vember 1 of their senior year in high 
school. Action will be taken on their 
application by December 1, and if ac- 
cepted, students must confirm by Jan- 
uary 1. Confirmed students must agree 
to withdraw all other applications/ac- 
ceptances and not pursue any addi- 
tional applications. 



ADMISSIONS OFFICE 
LOCATION AND HOURS 

Prospective students and their families 
are encouraged to visit the campus for 
a student-conducted tour and an inter- 
view with an admissions officer, who 
will provide additional information 
about the College and answer any 
questions. 

The Admissions Office is located on 
the first floor of Long Hall. For an ap- 
pointment, telephone (717) 326-1951, 
or write Office of Admissions, Lycom- 
ing College, Williamsport, PA 17701. 
Office hours are: 

Weekdays — September through April 
9 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. 
— May through August 
9 a.m. to 4 p.m. 
Saturdays — September through April 
9 a.m. to 12 noon 
— May through August 
No Saturday hours. 



60 



Financial Matters 



EXPENSES FOR 
THE ACADEMIC YEAR 1983-84 



course of study. Special session (May 
term and summer term) charges for 
tuition, room, and board are estab- 

The following expenses are effective lished during the fall semester. 

for the regular fall and spring semes- 
ters. The College reserves the right to 

adjust fees at any time. The fees for 

each semester are payable not later ENTRY FEES AND DEPOSITS 

than the second day of classes for the 

semester. Application Fee — All students for 

admission must submit a $20 applica- 
Per Per t j Qn ^ Tn j s c harge defrays the cost 

Fees Semester Year , ° .. . , . 

Comprehensive Fee $2,790 $5,580 of processing the application and IS 

Board and Room Rent 1,190 2,380 nonrefundable. 

Total $3,980 $7,960 Admissions Deposit— After stu- 
dents have been notified of their ad- 
One-Time Student Fees mission to Lycoming, they are required 

to make a $100 admissions deposit to 

Application Fee $ 20 firm ^ inte ntion to matriculate. 

Admissions Deposit 1UU 

Contingency Deposit 100 Students seeking residence must sub- 
Room Reservation Deposit 100 mit an additional $100 room-reserva- 
tion deposit. All deposits are applied 

Part-Time Student Fees to the S e " eral charges for the first se- 

mester of attendance. After May 1, de- 
Application Fee $ 20 ks are nonrefundab ie. 

Each Unit Course 697.50 r _, _ ... 

Contingency Deposit — A contin- 
gency deposit of $100 is required of all 
Additional Charges full-time students as a guarantee for 

Applied Music Fee (half-hour per week payment of damage to Or loss of Col- 

per semester) 100 lege property, for library and parking 

Cap and Gown Rental prevailing cost fineS) or s i m ilar penalties imposed by 

Laboratory Fee per Unit Course 5 to 50 u h d . . collected 

Reregistration Fee : 25 m ° * • ■ • i 

Parking Permit (for the academic year) . 10 to 15 along With Other charges for the initial 

Parking Permit with Reserved Space semester. The balance of this deposit is 

(for the academic year) 15 to 35 refunded after all debts to the College 

Practice Teaching Fee (Payable in have begn i(j ekher „ gradua . 

Junior Year) 160 . r .' ° ... , 

R.O.T.C. Basic Course Deposit tion or upon written request submitted 

(Payable at Bucknell University) 60 to the Registrar two weeks prior to vol- 

R.O.T.C. Advanced Course Deposit untary permanent termination of en- 

(Payable at Bucknell University) 60 ro llment at Lycoming College. 

Transcript Fee (No charge to 

full-time students) 3 

Medical Questionnaire Fee (Payable 

to Medical Datamation, Inc.) 10 



The comprehensive fee covers the 
regular course load of three to four 
courses each semester. Resident stu- 
dents must board at the College unless, 
for extraordinary reasons, authoriza- 
tion is extended for other eating ar- 
rangements. If a double room is used 
as a single room, there is an additional 
charge of $240 per semester. The esti- 
mated cost for books and supplies is 
up to $200 per year, depending on the 



PARTIAL PAYMENTS 

For the convenience of those who find 
it impossible to follow the regular 
schedule of payments, arrangements 
may be made with the College Treasur- 
er for the monthly payment of College 
fees through various educational plans. 
Additional information concerning 
partial payments may be obtained 
from the Treasurer or Dean of Admis- 
sions. 



REFUNDS FOR STUDENTS 
WHO WITHDRAW 

Refunds of tuition and board are made 
to students who voluntarily and offi- 
cially withdraw from the College while 
in good standing according to the fol- 
lowing schedule for the fall and spring 
semesters and the comparable period 
for the May and summer terms: 

Refund Charge 
Period of Withdrawal % % 

During the first week of the 

semester 80 20 

During second and third 

week 60 40 

During the fourth and fifth 

week 40 60 

During the sixth and seventh 

week 20 80 

After seven weeks 100 

The date on which the Dean of the 
College approves the student's with- 
drawal form is considered the official 
date of withdrawal. Charges are levied 
for services provided after withdrawal. 

Lycoming scholarships and grants 
are applied during the fall and spring 
semesters on the same basis as tuition 
charges. If a withdrawing student is 
charged 60% tuition, he/she will re- 
ceive 60% of the scholarship or grant. 
Government financial aid is adjusted 
according to federal and state guide- 
lines. 

Room charges, which are established 
on a semester basis, and special charg- 
es, such as laboratory fees, are not re- 
fundable if a student leaves the Col- 
lege prior to the end of the semester. 

Full-time students who after reduc- 
ing their loads continue to be enrolled 
for 12 or more semester hours are not 
eligible for a refund of tuition for an 
individual course. Similarly, students 
who register for extra hours in excess 
of 16 hours per semester and who later 
reduce their loads are not eligible after 
the fifth day of the semester for a re- 
fund of the fee charged for overloads. 
Charges will be recalculated for stu- 
dents who enroll full time and subse- 
quently assume part-time status by re- 
ducing their loads below 12 hours dur- 
ing the drop-add period. The assump- 



61 



tion of part-time status normally in- 
volves a substantial reduction of fi- 
nancial aid since most financial aid 
programs do not extend eligibility to 
part-time students. 



NON-PAYMENT OF FEES 
PENALTY 

Students will not be registered for 
courses in a new semester if their ac- 
counts for previous attendance have 
not been settled. Diplomas, transcripts, 
and certifications of withdrawals in 
good standing are issued only when a 
satisfactory settlement of all financial 
obligations has been made in the Busi- 
ness Office. 



FINANCIAL AID 

POLICY AND PROCEDURES 

The dominant factor in determining 
the amount of financial aid awarded 
to individual students is the establish- 
ment of need. Scholarships may be 
awarded on the basis of financial need 
and academic ability, while grants are 
provided on the basis of financial need. 
Long-term, low-cost educational loans 
are available from federal and state 
sources to most students who can dem- 
onstrate need. Part-time employment 
is available to students. 

To apply for financial assistance, 
obtain Lycoming's Financial Aid Ap- 
plication (FAA) from the Financial 
Aid Office and the CSS Financial Aid 
Form (FAF) and your State Grant Ap- 
plication from the secondary school 
Guidance Office or Lycoming's Finan- 
cial Aid Office. Submit the FAA to 
Lycoming and the completed FAF to 
the College Scholarship Service, P.O. 
2700, Princeton, NJ 08541, as early as 
possible after January 1. Renewal ap- 
plications are required annually. 



SCHOLARSHIPS AND GRANTS 

Valedictorian/Salutatorian Scholar- 
ship is a $1500 award honoring gradu- 



ates of private and public secondary 
schools who rank either first or second 
in their graduating class as certified by 
their guidance counselor. These awards 
are based upon academic achievement 
and are not contingent upon demon- 
strated financial need. Renewal cumu- 
lative average is 3.00. 

Lycoming Recognition Scholarships 
for $700 to $1,000 per year are award- 
ed to freshmen who have superior ac- 
ademic qualifications, have filed the 
FAF but did not demonstrate financial 
need as determined by the College 
Scholarship Service and were not eligi- 
ble for another Lycoming scholarship 
program. This scholarship is renewable 
if the recipient maintains a 3.25 cumu- 
lative average. 

Lycoming Directors' Scholarships 
of $400 to full tuition, depending upon 
financial need, are awarded to students 
in the top fifth of their secondary 
school class with CEEB scores totaling 
1100 or more. Renewal cumulative av- 
erage is 3.00. 

President's Fellowships in Music are 
awarded annually to students who are 
skilled in singing or in playing the pi- 
ano and wish to continue performing, 
whether or not they intend to become 
music majors. To be eligible for con- 
sideration, a candidate must apply and 
be accepted by Lycoming College and 
audition with the Music Department. 
The amount of each fellowship is $250 
per semester, renewable to a maximum 
of $2,000 per student. The primary re- 
sponsibility of each Fellow is musical 
performance as assigned by the Music 
Department. Singing in a chamber 
choir, accompanying in a voice studio, 
playing for chapel services, or rehears- 
ing a musical comedy are typical op- 
portunities. 

Lycoming Grant-in- Aid awards of 
$400 to full tuition, depending upon 
financial need, are made to full-time 
students who do not qualify for schol- 
arships and who have demonstrated fi- 
nancial need and the prospect of con- 
tributing positively to the College 
community. Renewal requires contin- 
ued financial need and satisfactory cit- 
izenship standards. 



Ministerial Grants are awarded to 
dependent children of United Metho- 
dist ministers and ordained ministers 
of other denominations. The grants 
amount to one-third of tuition for 
children of United Methodist Ministers 
in the Central Pennsylvania Annual 
Conference and one fourth of tuition 
for all others. If a student completes 
the FAF, this grant will be part of the 
total aid award. 

Pre-Ministerial Student Grants of 
one-fourth of tuition are awarded to 
students preparing for the Christian 
ministry who are enrolled full time and 
demonstrate financial need. Students 
must complete the pre-ministerial ap- 
plication available through the Finan- 
cial Aid Office. 

Women of Lycoming Scholarship is 
an award available to a currently en- 
rolled female member of the junior 
class having completed 80 credit hours 
with at least a 3.0 cumulative average 
and who demonstrates financial need 
of at least the regular tuition rate. Ap- 
plications are available in the Finan- 
cial Aid Office in February and are 
due in March. The award is normally 
$500 and is based on current earnings 
of the scholarship endowment. 

Two-in-Family Grants are awarded 
to each member of a family attending 
Lycoming College at the same time. 
The amount is 10% of tuition, room, 
and/or board paid. Each member must 
be enrolled full time and not eligible 
for any other financial aid program of 
the College. If a student is eligible for 
other Lycoming aid, the student would 
receive whichever is greater. 

United Methodist Scholarships are 
awarded to applicants who are in the 
top one-third of their class, active in 
Christian activities, and have demon- 
strated financial need. The awards are 
normally $500 per year and the funds 
are provided by the United Methodist 
Church. Annual application is re- 
quired. The student must complete 
and file the FAF and the scholarship 
forms which are available in the Fi- 
nancial Aid Office. 

Wyoming Conference Scholarship 
of $500 is granted by Lycoming to a 



62 



student chosen by the Scholarship 
Committee of the Wyoming Confer- 
ence. These scholarships are renewable 
for three additional years. Good aca- 
demic performance and service to the 
church are the criteria for this award. 

C. Luther Culler Scholarship for 
$500 is available based on scholarship. 

Dewitt-Bodine Scholarships are 
awarded to the highest-ranked student 
in the graduating class each year from 
Hughesville High School who attends 
Lycoming College. The recipient is 
designated by the Hughesville guid- 
ance director. The scholarship amount 
is $2200 and is credited at $550 per 
year over four years of attendance at 
Lycoming. If the student is in a three- 
year program (such as Med-Tech), (s)he 
will receive the award divided equally 
over the three-years' attendance at Ly- 
coming. 

Clara Kramer Eaton Scholarships 
are awarded to the highest-ranked stu- 
dent in the graduating class each year 
from Line Mountain High School who 
attends Lycoming College. The recipi- 
ent is designated by the high school's 
guidance office. The scholarship is 
$400 per year for up to four years' at- 
tendance at Lycoming. 

James A. Heether Scholarship for 
$300 is available based on financial 
need. Priority will be given to a chem- 
istry major. 

George W. Huntley, Jr. Scholarship 
for $700 is available to help defray the 
tuition and expenses for the first year 
only of any graduate of Cameron 
County High School (formerly Em- 
porium High School). The selection is 
made by the superintendent of schools. 

Robert F. Rich Scholarship is award- 
ed periodically to an academically out- 
standing student from Central Penn- 
sylvania. The award varies from $200 
to $1200 depending upon the available 
scholarship endowment income. Pref- 
erence is given to a resident of the 
Woolrich area and children of the em- 
ployees of the Woolrich Company. 

Leonard H. Rothermel Fund pro- 
vides $1200 in grant to financially 
needy student(s) who are in satisfacto- 
ry academic standing. 



Samuel Willard Memorial Scholar- 
ships are awarded to a junior or senior 
student at Lycoming who is in need of 
financial assistance to complete his/her 
degree. Preference is given to a relig- 
ion major. The award varies between 
$300 and $600 depending upon availa- 
ble scholarship endowment income. 



FEDERAL AID 

Pell Grant— This federal grant pro- 
vides up to $1,800 per year for full- 
time students who can demonstrate fi- 
nancial need. Application can be made 
when submitting the Financial Aid 
Form (FAF), the PHEAA State Grant 
Application, or by separate federal ap- 
plication on forms which are available 
in secondary school guidance offices 
or the Financial Aid Office at Lycom- 
ing. All students are urged to apply for 
this program. 

Supplemental Educational Oppor- 
tunity Grants (SEOG)— This federal 
government program provides addi- 
tional assistance to those students with 
financial need. Awards can be made in 
amounts ranging from $200 to $2,000 
and are usually based entirely on ex- 
ceptional financial need. Renewal is 
possible if the applicant has no reduc- 
tion in financial need in succeeding 
years. 

National Direct Student Loan 
(NDSL)— This federal five percent in- 
terest loan permits a total of $6,000 to 
be borrowed by the undergraduate 
student at a rate not to exceed $3,000 
the first two years. Repayment does 
not begin until after graduation or 
withdrawal from college. Loans are 
normally renewed annually if the ap- 
plicant files a renewal application by 
May 1 and continues to demonstrate 
financial need. 

Federal College Work Study Grants 
(CWSP) — An opportunity is provided 
through this program for students to 
earn part of their college expenses and 
to gain some practical experience by 
working on campus. Federal govern- 
ment financial need guidelines must be 
met to be eligible for this program. 



Students who do not meet these guide- 
lines should consult with the Career 
Development Center or Financial Aid 
Office for other employment oppor- 
tunities. 



STATE GRANTS 

State Grants — All applicants for fi- 
nancial aid are urged to investigate 
programs sponsored by their home 
states and to learn about and heed ap- 
plication deadlines. Pennsylvania stu- 
dents should apply for a PHEAA State 
Grant before April 30. The PHEAA 
State Grant provides up to $1500 to el- 
igible Pennsylvania residents who are 
in need of financial aid to attend as a 
full-time undergraduate student. Resi- 
dents of other states may be eligible 
for grant assistance through their 
states. A few such states are Delaware, 
Maryland, Ohio, Rhode Island, West 
Virginia. Applications should be avail- 
able through your high school guid- 
ance office. 



LOANS 

State Guaranteed Loans — Most 
states, including Pennsylvania, New 
Jersey, and New York, provide state 
guaranteed loans through local banks 
and lending institutions. This program 
provides 7-9 percent interest loans of 
up to $2,500 per year for educational 
expenses with repayment extended 
over a long-term schedule. Applicants 
should consult local banks early in 
their senior year. 

Plus Loans — PLUS Loans are 
meant to provide additional funds for 
educational expenses. The interest rate 
is 12 percent. Parents of dependent 
undergraduate students may borrow 
up to $3,000 per year. Independent 
undergraduates may borrow up to 
$2,500 per year; however, for indepen- 
dent students, the PLUS loan, com- 
bined with any GSL the undergraduate 
may have for that level, cannot exceed 



63 



$2,500. Applications and information 
are available from your bank or other 
lending institution. 



OTHER SOURCES OF AID 

Community Scholarships — In many 
communities, foundations and organi- 
zations, and in some cases high schools, 
provide funds for worthy students. 
Applicants should consult with their 
guidance counselor or principal. 

Education Financing Plans— The 
Business Office at Lycoming provides 
information about plans which enable 
parents to pay college expenses on a 
monthly basis through selected com- 



panies. 

Pennsylvania National Guard — 

Students participating in this program 
may be eligible for scholarship, credit 
programs, educational bonus, or loan 
repayment. Contact a Guard unit in 
your area for more information. 

Reserve Officers Training Corps 
(ROTC) Scholarships — Students who 
participate in Army ROTC are eligible 
for three-, two-, and one-year ROTC 
scholarships to finance tuition, books, 
laboratory fees, and other charges 
with the exception of room and board. 
ROTC Scholarship students also re- 
ceive $100 per month during the aca- 
demic year. 

Reserve Officers Training Corps 



(ROTC) Stipends — Students who par- 
ticipate in the Army ROTC program 
receive $100 per academic month of 
their junior and senior years. They 
also receive half of a second lieute- 
nant's pay plus travel expenses for a 
six-week advanced summer camp be- 
tween junior and senior years. 

Tuition Exchange Grants — Lycom- 
ing College is a member of both the 
Tuition Exchange Program and the 
CIC Tuition Exchange Program. 
These programs are for dependent stu- 
dents of employees at participating in- 
stitutions of higher education. You 
should contact the Tuition Exchange 
Officer at your host institution for in- 
formation regarding sponsorship. 




64 



The Campus 



Eighteen buildings sit on Lycoming's 
20-acre main campus. Most buildings 
have been constructed since 1950, even 
though Lycoming — one of America's 
50 oldest colleges and universities — 
dates back to 1812. All buildings are 
easy to reach from anywhere on cam- 
pus. A 12-acre athletic field and foot- 
ball stadium lie a few blocks north of 
the main campus. 

Modern buildings include the eight 
residence halls, which contain clean 
and comfortable single and double 
rooms; the library; the theatre; the 
planetarium; student union; computer 
center; electronic-music studio; pho- 
tography laboratory; art gallery, and 
physical education/recreation center. 
The computer center opened in 1979; 
the art gallery and physical education 
center opened in 1980. An arts center 
opens in 1983. 



RESIDENTIAL 

Asbury Hall (1962) — Sleeps 154 stu- 
dents. Named in honor of Bishop 
Francis Asbury, the father of The 
United Methodist Church in America, 
who made the circuit through the up- 
per Susquehanna District in 1812, the 
year Lycoming (then the Williamsport 
Academy) opened its doors. 
Crever Hall (1962) — Sleeps 126 stu- 
dents in two-room suites with bath. 
Honors Lycoming's founder and first 
financial agent, the Rev. Benjamin H. 
Crever, who helped persuade the Bal- 
timore Conference to purchase the 
school from the Williamsport Town 
Council in 1848. 

East Hall (1962) — Houses most of 
the chapters of Lycoming's national 
fraternities and other students. The 
self-contained fraternity units each 
contain rooms, a lounge, and a chap- 
ter room. All students share a large so- 
cial area. 

Forrest Hall (1968) — Sleeps 92 stu- 
dents in two-room suites with bath. 
Honors Dr. and Mrs. Fletcher Bliss 
Forrest and Anna Forrest Burfiendt 
'30, the parents and sister of Katherine 



Forrest Mathers '28, whose generosity 
established the memorial. 
Rich Hall (1948) — Sleeps 105 students 
in two-room suites with bath. Honors 
the Rich family of Woolrich, Pennsyl- 
vania. Houses the health service and 
the Sara J. Walter Lounge for com- 
muting students. 

Skeath Hall (1965) —The largest resi- 
dence hall, it sleeps 212 students. Hon- 
ors the late J. Milton Skeath, professor 
of psychology and four-time Dean of 
the College from 1921 to 1967. 
Wesley Hall (1956) — Sleeps 144 stu- 
dents. Honors John Wesley, the found- 
er of Methodism. 

Williams Hall (1965) — Sleeps 146 stu- 
dents in two-room suites with bath. 
Honors Mary Ellen Whitehead Wil- 
liams, mother of Joseph A. Williams, 
of St. Marys, Pennsylvania, whose be- 
quest established the memorial. 



ACADEMIC 

Academic Center (1968) — Probably 
the most architecturally impressive 
building on campus, the center actual- 
ly is composed of four buildings: the 
library, Wendle Hall, the Arena Thea- 
tre and laboratories, and the faculty 
office building. 

Library: Contains 145,000 volumes 
and 972 periodical titles, the Art 
Gallery, the computer center, a 
comfortable lounge that is utilized 
for study and special events, and 
the photographic laboratory. It can 
accommodate 700 students, and 
serves as a federal repository. 
Art Gallery (1980): Located in the 
northwest corner of the first floor 
of the library, the gallery contains 
exhibits year-round, including 
shows of student work. 
Computer Center (1979): Located 
in the basement of the library, the 
center houses a DEC PDP11/70 pri- 
mary unit and Commodore, Radio 
Shack and APPLE micro-compu- 
ters. The primary unit is equipped 
with the RSTS-E operating system, 
1.25 Mega-bytes of main memory, 



134 Mega-bytes disk storage, and 14 
remote terminals for student use. 
The center has computer graphics 
capability. 

Photographic Laboratory (1978): 
Located in the lower level of the li- 
brary, it contains all the materials 
and equipment of any commercial 
laboratory. 

Wendle Hall: Contains 20 class- 
rooms, the psychology laborato- 
ries, and spacious Pennington 
Lounge, an informal meeting place 
for students and faculty. 
Arena Theatre and Laboratories: 
The 204 seat thrust-stage theatre is 
one of the finest in the region; it in- 
cludes projection facilities, scene 
and costume shops, a make-up 
room, and a multiple-use area 
known as the Down Stage, where 
one-act experimental plays are per- 
formed. The language, business, 
mathematics, and physics laborato- 
ries are situated on the upper 
floors. The Detwiler Planetarium is 
located on the ground floor. 
Faculty Office Building: Contains 
faculty offices, seminar rooms, and 
a 735-seat lecture hall. 
Arts Center (1923, renovated 1983) — 
Contains studios, sculpture foundry, 
woodshop, printmaking shop, class- 
rooms, lecture hall, offices. 
Science Building (1957) — Includes 
the biology and chemistry laborato- 
ries, classrooms, faculty offices, a lec- 
ture hall, and a greenhouse. 



ADMINISTRATION 

John W. Long Hall (1951) — Opened 
originally as the library, it now houses 
the administrative offices, including 
those for the president, dean, treasur- 
er, registrar, admissions, alumni af- 
fairs, public relations, institutional ad- 
vancement, career development, pub- 
lications, and financial aid. It includes 
a reception area, central communica- 
tions, and the printing and bulk mail 
office. 



65 



RECREATION 

Physical Education and Recreation 
Center (1980) — Includes the George 
R. Lamade Gymnasium, which con- 
tains basketball and other courts; a 
six-lane swimming pool; all-purpose 
room; sauna and steam room; offices; 
classrooms, and Alumni Lounge. 
Wertz Student Center (1959) — Con- 
tains the main and private dining 
rooms, Burchfield Lounge, a recrea- 
tion area, game rooms, music room, 
theatre, bookstore, post office, stu- 
dent organization offices, and FM ra- 
dio station. Honors Bishop D. Frede- 
rick Wertz, president of Lycoming 
from 1955 to 1968. 



RELIGIOUS 

Clarke Building (1939) — Lycoming's 
landmark, the building contains 
Clarke Chapel, St. John Neumann 
Chapel, the United Campus Ministry 
Center, music classrooms and studios, 
offices, and the electronic-music stu- 
dio with Moog synthesizer. 




66 



Academic Calendar: 1983-84 



Fall semester 

Bills are due August 25 

Orientation of new faculty August 26 

Residence halls open August 28 

Faculty available for advising August 29 

Classes begin first period August 30 

Processing of drop/add begins August 30 

Re-registration fee of $25 applies after this date September 5 

Last day for drop/add September 5 

Last day to elect audit and satisfactory/unsatisfactory grades September 5 

Last day for submission of final grades for courses for which Incomplete grades were recorded 

in spring, May, and summer terms October 1 1 

Mid-semester deficiency reports for freshmen due in Registrar's Office at noon October 19 

Last day for submission of final grades for courses for which Incomplete grades were recorded 

in fall semester 

Preregistration for students who have completed at least one semester November 1-3 

Preregistration for sophomores and juniors 

Preregistration for freshmen November 11-12 

Last day to withdraw from courses with W, WP, WF grades November 22 

Residence halls close at 10 a.m. for Thanksgiving recess November 23 

Residence halls open at noon after Thanksgiving recess November 27 

Classes resume first period after Thanksgiving November 28 

Residence halls close at 9 p.m. for spring recess 

Residence halls open at noon after spring recess 

Classes resume first period after spring recess 

Semester ends at 5 p.m December 16 

Residence halls close at 9 p.m December 16 

May term 

Residence halls open May 6 

Classes begin May 7 

Last day for drop/add May 8 

Last day to elect audit and satisfactory/unsatisfactory grades May 8 

Last day to withdraw from courses with W, WP, WF grades May 25 

Term ends June 1 

Residence halls close at 4 p.m June 1 



Spring semester 

January 5 

January 8 

January 9 
January 9 
January 13 
January 13 
January 13 



February 27 
February 17 



April 2-3 
April 5-6 
April 9 



March 2 
March 11 
March 12 
April 27 
April 27 

Summer term 

June 3 
June 4 
June 6 
June 6 
June 29 
July 13 
July 13 



Special dates to remember: 

Freshman convocation August 30 

All-College picnic September 3 

Labor Day (classes in session) September 5 

Homecoming Weekend September 23-25 

Parents Weekend October 7-9 

Long weekend (classes suspended) October 14 

Thanksgiving recess November 22-27 

Spring recess March 2-11 

Honors Day April 10 

Good Friday (afternoon classes suspended) April 20 

Baccalaureate May 6 

Commencement May 6 

Memorial Day (no classes) May 28 

Independence Day (no classes) July 4 



67 



Directory 






BOARD OF TRUSTEES 




1983 Dr. Mary R. Schweikle, M.D Montoursville 

(Alumni Representative) 


Officers 




1972 Donald E. Shearer, M.D Montoursville 


W. Gibbs McKenney, LL.D 


Chairman 


1983 Hon. Clinton W Smith Williamsport 


Nathan W. Stuart, J.D 


. . . Vice Chairman 


1961 Nathan W. Stuart, J.D Williamsport 


Paul G. Gilmore 


Secretary 


1971 Willis W Willard, III, M.D Hershey 


William L. Baker 


Treasurer 




Fred A. Pennington, LL.D Chairman Emeritus 




Honorary Trustees 




ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF 


Bishop Hermann W. Kaebnick, 






D.D.,L.H.D.,LL.D 


Hershey 


FREDERICK E. BLUMER (1976) 


Ralph E. Kelchner 


Jersey Shore 


President 


Arnold A. Phipps, II 


Williamsport 


B.A., Millsaps College; B.D., Ph.D., Emory University 


Mrs. Donald G. Remley 


Williamsport 


SHIRLEY A. VAN MARTER (1979) 


George L. Stearns, II 


Williamsport 


Dean of the College 


W. Russell Zacharias 


Allentown 


B.A., Mundelein College; M.A., Northwestern 
University; M.A., Ph.D., University of Chicago 


Trustees 




WILLIAM L. BAKER (1965) 


Term expires 1984 




Treasurer 


Elected 




B.S., Lycoming College 


1981 John B. Ernst 


Doylestown 


JACK C. BUCKLE (1957) 


(Alumni Representative) 




Dean of Student Services 


1969 Samuel H. Evert 


Bloomsburg 


A.B., Juniata College; M.S., Syracuse University 


1972 The Rev. Brian A. Fetterman . . 


Harrisburg 


PAUL C. HASSENPLUG (1981) 


1978 Harold D. Hershberger, Jr. 


Williamsport 


Executive Director of Institutional Advancement 


1969 Kenneth E. Himes 


Williamsport 


B.S., Rochester Institute of Technology 


1978 John C. Lundy 


Williamsport 


MARSHALL RAUCCI, JR. (1982) 


1981 William Pickelner 


Williamsport 


Dean of Admissions & Financial Aid 


1978 John Y. Schreyer 


. . . Little Falls, NJ 


B.A., Marist College; M.S. Ed., SUNY College at 


1978 M. L. Sharrah, Ph.D 


. New Canaan, CT 


Buffalo 


1972 Harold H. Shreckengast, Jr. ... 


Jenkintown 


CHRISTINE D. BARTH (1982) 
Admissions Counselor 


Term expires 1985 




B.A., Lycoming College 


Elected 




BETTY S. BECK (1965) 


1979 David Y. Brouse 


Williamsport 


Bookstore Manager 


1951 Paul G. Gilmore 


Williamsport 


DALE V. BOWER (1968) 


1982 Mrs. Margaret D. L'Heureux . . 


Williamsport 


Director of Planned Giving 


1973 Robert G. Little, M.D 


Harrisburg 


B.S., Lycoming College; B.D., United Theological 


1979 David J. Loomis, Ph.D 


Troy 


Seminary 


(Alumni Representative) 




GEORGE W. BRELSFORD (1982) 


1964 W. Gibbs McKenney, LL.D. . . . 


. . . Baltimore, MD 


Residence Area Coordinator 


1973 G. Jackson Miller 


Altoona 


B.S., Davis & Elk ins College 


1958 Fred A. Pennington, LL.D 


. . . Mechanicsburg 


CLARENCE W BURCH (1962) 


1982 Mrs. Marguerite G. Rich 


Woolrich 


Director of Athletics 


1961 The Rev. Wallace F. Stettler, HH.D Kingston 


B.S., M.Ed., University of Pittsburgh 


1982 The Rev. Stratford C. Taylor . . . 


. . . .Montoursville 


LOUISE A. CALIGIURI (1978) 
Associate Dean of Student Services 


Term expires 1986 




B.S., M.S., Duquesne University 


Elected 




ROBERT L. CURRY, JR. (1969) 


1983 John T Detwiler 


Williamsport 


Administrative Assistant in Athletics 


1980 Richard W. DeWald 


. . . .Montoursville 


A.B. Lycoming College 


1974 Daniel G. Fultz 


Pittsford, NY 


JOANNE B. DAY (1981) 


1965 James G. Law, D. Text. Sci. . . . 


Bloomsburg 


Assistant Dean of Student Services 


1970 John E. Person, Jr. 


Williamsport 


B.A., M.Ed., Western Maryland College 



68 



ROBERT L. EDDINGER (1967) 

Director of Buildings & Grounds 
JERRY L. EISCHEID (1981) 

Campus Minister 

B.S., Mansfield State College; M.Div., United 

Theological Seminary at Dayton 
FRED L. GROGAN (1977) 

Assistant Dean of the College 

A.B., Bates College; M.A., Arizona State University; 

Ph.D., University of Missouri 
THOMAS J. HENNINGER (1966) 

Director of Computer Services 

B.S., Wake Forest College; M. A., University of Kansas 
MARY E. HERRING (1978) 

Assistant Director of Admissions 

B.A., Albright College 
RICHARD A. HUGHES (1970) 

Chaplain of the College 

B.A., Indiana Central College; S.T.B., Ph.D., Boston 

University 
BRUCE M. HURLBERT (1982) 

Director of Library Services 

B.A., The Citadel; M.S.L.S., Florida State University 
HAROLD H. HUTSON (1969) 

President Emeritus 

B.A., LL.D., Wofford College; B.D., Duke University; 

Ph.D., University of Chicago; L.H.D., Ohio Wesleyan 

University 
JOHN G. LAMADE (1983) 

Admissions Counselor 

B.A., Susquehanha University 
BETTY J. PARIS (1963) 

Registrar 

A.B., Lycoming College 
JULIANN T. PAWLAK (1979) 

Director of Financial Aid 

B.A., Lycoming College; M.A., Bucknell University 
MARLENE D. PETTER (1982) 

Assistant Director of Public Relations 

B.A., The Pennsylvania State University 
JEFFREY L. RICHARDS (1982) 

Controller and Assistant Treasurer 

B.A., Lycoming College 
WILLIAM H. RUPP (1979) 

Director of Public Relations 

B.A., M.A., The Pennsylvania State University 
GORDON S. STEARNS (1982) 

Residence Area Coordinator 

B.A., Bowdoin College 
THOMAS P. WOZNIAK (1979) 

Associate Dean of Student Services 

B.A., Merrimack College; M.Ed., Worcester State 

College 



RALPH E. ZEIGLER, JR. (1980) 
Director of Alumni Relations 

A.B., Lycoming College; M.A., The Pennsylvania State 
University 



FACULTY 

EMERITI 

MABEL K. BAUER 

Professor Emeritus of Chemistry 

B.S., Cornell University; M.S., University of 

Pennsylvania 
LEROY F. DERR 

Professor Emeritus of Education 

A.B., Ursinus College; M.A., Bucknell University; 

Ed.D., University of Pittsburgh 
ROBERT H. EWING 

Professor Emeritus of History 

A.B., College of Wooster; M.A., University of 

Michigan; HH.D., Lycoming College 
JOHN P. GRAHAM 

Professor Emeritus of English 

Ph.B., Dickinson College; M.Ed., The Pennsylvania 

State University 
HAROLD W. HAYDEN 

Librarian Emeritus and Professor Emeritus of Library 

Services 

A.B., Nebraska State Teachers College; B.S., University 

of Illinois; M.A. in L.S., University of Michigan 
GEORGE W. HOWE 

Professor Emeritus of Geology 

A.B., M.S., Syracuse University; Ph.D., Cornell 

University 
M. RAYMOND JAMISON 

Assistant Professor Emeritus of Physics 

B.S., Ursinus College; M.S., Bucknell University 
WALTER G. McIVER 

Professor Emeritus of Music 

Mus.B., Westminster Choir College; A.B., Bucknell 

University; M.A., New York University 
LORING B. PRIEST 

Professor Emeritus of History 

Litt.B., Rutgers University; M.A., Ph.D., Harvard 

University 
DONALD G. REMLEY 

Assistant Professor Emeritus of Mathematics and 

Physics 

A.B., Dickinson College; M.A., Columbia University 
MARY LANDON RUSSELL 

Associate Professor Emeritus of Music 

Mus.B., Susquehanna University Conservatory of 

Music; M.A., The Pennsylvania State University 



69 



LOUISE R. SCHAEFFER 


ROGER W. OPDAHL (1963) 


Associate Professor Emeritus of Education 


Economics 


A.B., Lycoming College; M.A., Bucknell University; 


A.B., Hofstra University; M.A., Columbia University; 


D.Ed., The Pennsylvania Stale University 


D.Ed., The Pennsylvania State University 


JAMES W. SHEAFFER 


ROBERT W. RABOLD (1955) 


Associate Professor Emeritus of Music 


Economics 


B.S., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; M.S., 


B.A., The Pennsylvania State University; M.A., Ph.D., 


University of Pennsylvania 


University of Pittsburgh 


FRANCES K. SKEATH 


JOHN A. RADSPINNER (1957) 


Professor Emeritus of Mathematics 


Chemistry 


A.B., M.A., Bucknell University; D.Ed., The 


B.S., University of Richmond; M.S., Virginia 


Pennsylvania State University 


Polytechnic Institute; D.Sc, Carnegie-Mellon 


JOHN A. STUART 


University 


Professor Emeritus of English 


LOGAN A. RICHMOND (1954) 


B.A., William Jewell College; M.A., Ph.D., 


Accounting 


Northwestern University 


B.S., Lycoming College; M.B.A., New York University; 


HELEN B. WEIDMAN 


C.P.A. (Pennsylvania) 


Professor Emeritus of Political Science 


JANET A. RODGERS (1981) 


A.B., M.A., Bucknell University; Ph.D., Syracuse 


Nursing 


University 


B.S., Wagner College; M. A., Ph.D., New York 




University 


PROFESSORS 


SHIRLEY A. VAN MARTER (1979) 




Dean of the College 


ROBERT F. FALK (1970) 


English 


Theatre 


B.A., Mundelein College; M.A., Northwestern 


Marshal of the College 


University; M. A., Ph.D., University of Chicago 


B.A., B.D., Drew University; M.A., Ph.D., Wayne 




State University 




MORTON A. FINEMAN (1966) 


ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS 


Physics 


ROBERT B. ANGSTADT (1967) 


A.B., Indiana University; Ph.D., University of 


Biology 


Pittsburgh 


B.S., Ursinus College; M.S., Ph.D., Cornell University 


ERNEST D. GIGLIO (1972) 


HOWARD C. BERTHOLD, JR. (1976)*** 


Political Science 


Psychology 


B.A., Queens College; M.A., SUNY at Albany; Ph.D., 


B.A., Franklin and Marshall College; M.A., University 


Syracuse University 


of Iowa; Ph.D., The University of Massachusetts 


EDUARDO GUERRA (1960) 


CLARENCE W. BURCH (1962) 


Religion 


Physical Education 


B.D., Southern Methodist University; S.T.M., Ph.D., 


B.S., M.Ed., University of Pittsburgh 


Union Theological Seminary 


JACK D. DIEHL, JR. (1971) 


JOHN G. HANCOCK (1967) 


Biology 


Psychology 


B.S., M.A., Sam Houston State University; M.S., 


B.S., M.S., Bucknell University; Ph.D., The 


Ph.D., University of Connecticut 


Pennsylvania State University 


RICHARD R. ERICKSON (1973)* 


JOHN G. HOLLENBACK (1952) 


Astronomy and Physics 


Business Administration 


B.A., University of Minnesota; M.S., Ph.D., University 


B.S., M.B.A., University of Pennsylvania 


of Chicago 


JAMES K. HUMMER (1962) 


BERNARD P. FLAM (1963) 


Chemistry 


Spanish 


B.N.S., Tufts University; M.S., Middlebury College; 


A.B., New York University; M.A., Harvard University; 


Ph.D., University of North Carolina 


Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 


JACK S. McCRARY (1969) 


WILLIAM D. FORD (1972)**** 


Sociology 


English 


B.A., M.A., Southern Methodist University; Ph.D., 


B.A., Occidental College; M.A., M.F.A., Ph.D., 


Washington University 


University of Iowa 



70 



DAVID A. FRANZ (1970) 
Chemistry 

A.B., Princeton University; M.A.T., The Johns 
Hopkins University; Ph.D., University of Virginia 

CHARLES L. GETCHELL (1967) 
Mathematics 

B.S., University of Massachusetts; M.A., Ph.D., 
Harvard University 

STEPHEN R. GRIFFITH (1970) 
Philosophy 

A.B., Cornell University; M.A., Ph.D., University of 
Pittsburgh 

DAVID K. HALEY (1980) 
Mathematics 

B.A., Acadia University; M.S., Ph.D., Queen's 
University; Habii, Universitat Mannheim 

RICHARD A. HUGHES (1970) 
Religion 

B.A., Indiana Central College; S.T.B., Ph.D., Boston 
University 

BRUCE M. HURLBERT (1982) 
Director of Library Services 
B.A., The Citadel; M.S.L.S., Florida State University 

EMILY R. JENSEN (1969) 
English 

B.A., Jamestown College; M.A., University of Denver; 
Ph.D., The Pennsylvania State University 

MOON H. JO (1975) 

Sociology 

B.A., Valparaiso University; M.A., Howard University; 

Ph.D., New York University 
FORREST E. KEESBURY (1970) 

Education 

B.S., Defiance College; M.A., Bowling Green State 

University; Ed.D., Lehigh University 
ROBERT H. LARSON (1969) 

History 

B.A., The Citadel; M. A., Ph.D., University of Virginia 
PAUL A. MacKENZIE (1970) 

German 

A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Boston University 
GERTRUDE B. MADDEN (1958) 

English 

A.B., University of Pennsylvania; M.A., Bucknell 

University 
ROBERT J. B. MAPLES (1969) 

French 

A.B., University of Rochester; Ph.D., Yale University 
JOHN F PIPER, JR. (1969)** 

History 

A.B., Lafayette College; B.D., Yale University; Ph.D., 

Duke University 



DAVID J. RIFE (1970) 

English 

B.A., University of Florida; M. A., Ph.D., Southern 

Illinois University 
MICHAEL G ROSKIN (1972) 

Political Science 

A.B., University of California at Berkeley; M.A., 

University of California at Los Angeles; Ph.D., The 

American University 
ROGER D. SHIPLEY (1967) 

Art 

B.A., Otterbein College; M.F.A., Cranbrook Academy 

of Art 
JOHN M. WHELAN, JR. (1971) 

Philosophy 

B.A., University of Notre Dame; Ph.D., The University 

of Texas at Austin 
STANLEY T. WILK (1973) 

Anthropology 

B.A., Hunter College; Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 
ROBERT A. ZACCARIA (1973) 

Biology 

B.A., Bridgewater College; Ph.D., University of 

Virginia 

*On Sabbatical Fall Semester 1983-84 
**On Sabbatical Spring Semester 1983-84 
***On Sabbatical Academic Year 1983-84 
****On Leave of absence 1983-84 



ASSISTANT PROFESSORS 

RICHARD J. BARKER (1982) 

Spanish 

B.A., Hamilton College; M.A., University of Iowa; 

Ph.D., University of Oregon 
SUSAN K. BEIDLER (1975) 

Collection Management Services Librarian 

B.A., University of Delaware; M.L.S., University of 

Pittsburgh 
GARY M. BOERCKEL (1979) 

Music 

B.A., B.M., Oberlin College; M.M., Ohio University; 

D.M.A., University of Iowa 
JON R. BOGLE (1976) 

Art 

B.F.A., B.S., M.F.A., Tyler School of Art, Temple 

University 
ROLF T CARLSON (1981) 

Theatre 

B.S., Kearney State College; M.F.A., University of 

Montana 



71 



JOHN H. CONRAD (1959) 
Education 

B.S., Mansfield State College; M.A., New York 
University 

SRILAL S. DeSILVA 

Mathematics 

B.Sc, University of Sri Lanka; M.A., Ph.D., 

University of Pittsburgh 

MARY ANN DOYLE (1982) 
Education 

B.A., University College of New York at Oswego; 
Ed.M., Ph.D., State University of New York at Buffalo 

EDWARD G. GABRIEL (1977) 
Biology 

B.A., M.S., Alfred University; Ph.D., The Ohio State 
University 

FRED L. GROGAN (1977) 
Political Science 
Assistant Dean of the College 
A.B., Bates College; M.A., Arizona State University; 
Ph.D., University of Missouri 

THOMAS J. HENNINGER (1966) 

Director of Computer Services; Mathematics 

B.S., Wake Forest College; M.A., University of Kansas 

OWEN F. HERRING (1965) 
Philosophy 
B.A., Wake Forest College 

MARTIN JAMISON (1982) 
Instructional Services Librarian 
B.A., University of Akron; M.L.S., Kent State 
University 

WILLIAM E. KEIG (1980) 
Astronomy and Physics 

A.B., University of California at Santa Cruz; M.S., 
Ph.D., University of Chicago 

DAN O KING (1977) 
Biology 

B.A., University of South Florida; M.A., Ph.D., 
Indiana University 

ELDON F. KUHNS, II (1979) 
Accounting 

B.A., Lycoming College; M. Accounting, University of 
Oklahoma; C.P.A. (Pennsylvania) 

TRACY LEWIS 
Spanish 
B.A., Dartmouth College; M.A., Brown University 

DIANE M. LESKO (1978) 
Art History 
B.A., M.A., Ph.D., SUNYat Binghamton 



ANDREW LIEBMAN 

Business Administration 

B.A., City College of New York; M.B.A., The Bernard 

Baruch College 
RICHARD J. MORRIS (1976) 

History 

B.A., Boston State College; M.A., Ohio University; 

Ph.D., New York University 
CAROLE MOSES (1982) 

English 

B.A., Adelphi University; M.A., The Pennsylvania 

State University; Ph.D., SUNYat Binghamton 
CHERYL NEWBURG (1983) 

Psychology 

B.S., Duke University; M.A., Ph.D, University of 

Kansas 

STEPHEN E. ROBINSON (1979) 

Religion 

B.A., M.A., Brigham Young University; Ph.D., Duke 

University 
KATHRYN M. RYAN (1981) 

Psychology 

B.S., University of Illinois; M.S., Ph.D., University of 

Pittsburgh 

GENE D. SPRECHINI (1981) 
Mathematics 

B.S., Wilkes College; M.A., Ph.D., SUNYat 
Binghamton 

LARRY R. STRAUSER (1973) 

Sociology 

A.B., Lycoming College; M.P.A., University of 

Arizona 
FRED M. THAYER, JR. (1976)*** 

Music 

A.B., Syracuse University; B.M., Ithaca College; 

M.M., SUNY at Binghamton; D.M.A., Cornell 

University 
H. BRUCE WEAVER (1974) 

Business Administration 

B.B.A., Stetson University; J.D., Vanderbilt University; 

M.B.A., Florida Technological University 
BUDD F. WHITEHILL (1957) 

Physical Education 

B.S., Lock Haven State College; M.Ed., The 

Pennsylvania State University 
RICHARD E. WIENECKE (1982) 

Accounting 

B.A., Lycoming College; M.S., Bucknell University; 

M.B.A., Long Island University 
FREDRIC M. WILD, JR. (1978) 

English 

B.A., Emory University; M.A., Ph.D., Ohio State 

University; M.Div., Yale Divinity School 



72 



MELVIN C. ZIMMERMAN (1979) 
Biology 

B.S., SUNYat Cortland; M.S., Ph.D., Miami 
University 



"*On Sabbatical Academic Year 1983-84 



INSTRUCTORS 

SALLY ANN ATKINSON (1983) 

Nursing 

B.S.N., Texas Woman's University; M.S.N., University 

of Texas 
GEOFFREY L. GORDON (1981) 

Business Administration 

B.S., Lehigh University; M.B.A., Duke University; 

C.P.I.M. 
DAVID B. HAIR (1979) 

Physical Education 

B.S., East Stroudsburg State College 
DANIEL HARTSOCK (1982) 

Visiting Instructor in English 

B.A., The Pennsylvania State University; M.A., 

Indiana University of Pennsylvania 
DEBORAH J. HOLMES (1976) 

Physical Education 

B.S., M.S., The Pennsylvania State University 
BRADLEY NASON 

Mass Communication 

B.A., Lycoming College; M.A. in Communications, 

The American University 
KATHLEEN D. PAGANA (1982) 

Nursing 

B.S.N., University of Maryland; M.S.N., University of 

Pennsylvania 
RICHARD D. TROXEL (1978) 

Mathematics 

B.A., Oberlin College; M.A., Indiana University 



LECTURERS & SPECIAL APPOINTMENTS 



PART-TIME FACULTY 

MARY P. BAGGETT (1977) 

Chemistry 

B.A., Regis College; M.A., Wellesley College 
ADELLE DOTZEL (1981) 

Mathematics 

B.S., Kings College; M.A., The Pennsylvania State 

University 
ROME A. HANKS (1982) 

Art 

B.A., M.F.A., The Pennsylvania State University 
CATHERINE PAYN 

Music 

B.M. and B.Church M., Westminster Choir College; 

M.M. in Voice, West Virginia University 
MARY J. VESTERMARK (1977) 

Psychology 

A.B., Oberlin; M.A., Stetson University; Ph.D., 

University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill 



APPLIED MUSIC TEACHERS 

DONALD FREED (1983) 

Violin 

B.S., West Chester State College; M. Ed., D. Ed., The 

Pennsylvania State University 
THOMAS GALLUP (1982) 

Flute and Voice 

B.S., Mansfield State College 
RICHARD J. LAKEY (1979) 

Organ and Piano 

A.B., Westminster Choir College; M.A., Indiana 

University of Pennsylvania 
ALBERT NACINOVICH (1972) 

Brass 

B.A . in Music Education, Mansfield State College; 

M.S. in Music Education, Ithaca College 
MARY L. RUSSELL (1936) 

Piano 

M.B., Susquehanna University; M.A., The 

Pennsylvania State University 



NANCY C. COOLEY (1981) 

Worksite Health Program Coordinator — CHIP 

A.B., Lycoming College 
DON M. LARRABEE II (1972) 

Lecturer in Law 

A.B., Franklin and Marshall; LL.B.; Fordham 

University 
JOHN J. TAMALIS (1976) 

Chaplain to Roman Catholic Students 

B.S., University of Scran ton; M.S., Mary wood College 



ADJUNCT FACULTY & STAFF 

JOHN L. DAMASKA (1981) 

Medical Technology 

School of Medical Technology, The Williamsport 

Hospital 
MICHAEL R. J. FELIX (1980) 

Director, County Health Improvement Program 

B.S., Cortland University 



73 



P. LYNN KRAMER, R.D. (1983) 

Adjunct Instructor Nursing 

B.S., The Pennsylvania State University; M.S., Virginia 

Polytechnic Institute and State University 
ALBERT J. STUNKARD (1980) 

Director of Institute of Community Health 

B.S., Yale University; M.D., Columbia University 
DON K. WEAVER (1981) 

Medical Technology 

School of Medical Technology, The Williamsport 

Hospital 



MEDICAL STAFF 

FREDERIC C. LECHNER, M.D. 

College Physician 

B.S., Franklin and Marshall College; M.D., Jefferson 

Medical College 
ROBERT S. YASUI, M.D. 

College Surgeon 

M.D., Temple University 
EVELYN L. SEAMAN, R.N. 

College Nurse 

Williamsport Hospital School of Nursing 



ADMINISTRATIVE ASSISTANTS 



Randy J. Baker Athletics Trainer 

(B.S., Lock Haven Slate College; M.S., University of Illinois) 

Louise S. Banks Periodicals Assistant in Library 

Rebecca Bastian Data Entry Clerk 

Robert E. Bay Grounds Foreman 

Emily C. Biichle Coordinator Facilities Scheduling/Purchasing 

Barbara J. Bodner . Secretary to the Dean of Admissions & Financial Aid 

Helen J. Boe Typist/Clerk Admissions 

Barbara Bowes Bookstore Assistant 

Pauline Brungard Student Loan Coordinator 

(B.S., Lycoming College) 

Kathy A. Confair Cashier/Bookkeeper 

Richard L. Cowher Press Operator 

Elizabeth G. Cowles Career Development Secretary 

Patricia Cundiff Systems Analyst 

Mary Dahlgren Admissions Data Entry Assistant 

June L. Evans Secretary, Education Office 

Irene Everdale Secretary to the Director of Buildings and Grounds 

Mary M. Fleming Data Analyst, CHIP 

S. Jean Gair Secretary, Music and Art Departments 

Anne S. Gibbon Secretary, Biology and Chemistry Departments 

Irene V. Gohrig Secretary to Dean of Student Services 

Diane Hassinger 

Secretary to Executive Director of Institutional Advancement 

Ralph W. Hellan Computer Operations Programmer 

(A.B., Lycoming College) 

Helen C. Heller Secretary to the Registrar 

Mary C. Hendricks Supervisor of Housekeeping 

Esther L. Henninger Administrative Assistant for Admissions 

Diane C. Hess Secretary, Residence Life Office 



Cheri L. Hessert Secretary, CHIP 

Bernadine G. Hileman Office Services Coordinator 

Phyllis M. Holmes Secretary to the President 

Ronald W. Hoover Equipment Manager, Athletics 

Barbara E. Horn Secretary to the Athletics Director 

Janet M. Hurlbert Assoc. Instructional Services Librarian 

Sherrie Landon Administrative Assistant in Student Financial Aid 

Shirley D. Lloyd Assistant PBX Operator 

Christine A. Mackenzie .Administrative Assistant, Student Union (SUB) 

Judy F. McConnell AV/lnterlibrary Loan Assistant 

D. Maxine McCormick Records Clerk 

Christine McCracken Computer Programmer 

Nancy Morrett Faculty Secretary 

Marilyn Mullings Faculty Secretary 

Phyllis B. Myers Secretary to the Director of Alumni Relations 

Vicki L. Naugle Secretary/Generalist, CHIP 

Marion R. Nyman Secretary to the Treasurer 

Kimberly A. Owen Library Assistant 

David W. Poeth Assistant to Director of Buildings and Grounds 

Rosalie Pfaff Switchboard Operator 

Terry Ann Raup Secretary, Athletics Office 

Pearl Ringler Bookstore Assistant 

Sheran L. Swank Faculty Secretary 

Patricia J. Triaca Library Assistant 

Helen J. Vincent Library Assistant 

Deborah E. Weaver Damage Assessment Clerk 

Vickie L. Weaver Secretary to Director of Financial Aid 

Loretta M. Whipkey Secretary to the Director of Public Relations 

Madlyn Wonderlich Secretary to the Dean of the College 

Cheryl A. Yearick Library Assistant 



74 



The Alumni Association 



The Alumni Association of Lycoming College has a 
membership of more than 10,000 men and women. It is 
governed by an executive board consisting of four officers 
and 21 members-at-large, elected through mail ballot by 
the membership of the association. The board also has 
members representing specific geographic areas, the senior 
class president, the student body president, and a represen- 
tative of the last graduating class. The association annually 
designates one alumni representative as a nominee for a 
three-year term on the college board of trustees. The Di- 
rector of Alumni Relations directs the activities of the 
alumni office. The alumni association has the following 
purpose as stated in its constitution: "As an off-campus 
constituency, the association's purpose is to seek ways of 
maintaining an active and mutually beneficial relationship 
between the college and its alumni, utilizing their talents, 
resources and counsel to further the objective and program 
of Lycoming College." 

All former students of Williamsport Dickinson Seminary 
and all former students who have successfully completed 
one year of study at Williamsport Dickinson Junior Col- 
lege or Lycoming College are considered members of the 
association. 

Acting as the representative of alumni on the campus and 
working also with undergraduates, the alumni office is re- 
sponsible for keeping alumni informed and interested in the 
programs, growth, and activities of the college through reg- 
ular publications mailed to all alumni on record. Arrange- 
ments for Homecoming, class reunions, club meetings, 
and similar activities are coordinated through this office. 
Through The Lycoming College Annual Giving Fund, the 
alumni office is closely associated with the development pro- 
gram of the college. Communications to the alumni associa- 
tion should be addressed to the Office of Alumni Relations. 



Robert V. Haas '58 - Montoursville, PA 
Larry H. Sanders '64 - Williamsport, PA 
Barnard C. Taylor II '65 - Lewisburg, PA 
Raymond A. Thompson '62 - Williamsport, 



PA 



Term Expires June 1985 

Miss Nancy L. Beecher '76 - West Chester, PA 

Patrick J. Cerillo '77 - Lawrenceville, NJ 

Mrs. Marilyn Phillippy Failor '70 - Camp Hill, PA 

Seth D. Keller '65 - Williamsport, PA 

The Rev. David L. Phillips '63 - Williamsport, PA 

Mrs. Mary Johnson Smith '59 - Williamsport, PA 

Barry G. Yerger '59 - Harrisburg, PA 

Term Expires June 1986 

David G. Argall '80 - Nesquehoning, PA 

Dr. David E. Detwiler '75 - Philadelphia, PA 

Robert J. Glunk '59 - Jersey Shore, PA 

Mrs. Donna Michael Heiney '62 - Hughesville, PA 

Mrs. Patricia MacBride Krauser '68 - Landisville, PA 

Mrs. Mary Landon Russell '33 - Williamsport, PA 

Mrs. Doris Heller Teufel '54 - Williamsport, PA 

Members Serving a One-Year Term 

Student Association of Lycoming College (SALC), 

President - Deanna Cappo '84 
Senior Class President - Linda Reph '84 
Class of 1983 Representative - James J. Maurer '83 - 

Princeton Junction, NJ 

Alumni Representatives to the Board of Trustees 

1984 - John B. Ernst '58 - Doylestown, PA 

1985 - Dr. David J. Loomis '61 - Troy, PA 

1986 - Dr. Mary R. Schweikle '63 - Montoursville, PA 



ALUMNI ASSOCIATION OFFICERS 
AND EXECUTIVE BOARD 

President - Kent T. Baldwin '64 - Williamsport, PA 
Vice-President for Campus Affairs - Mrs. Nancy Flory 

Spannuth '64 - State College, PA 
Vice-President for Regional Affairs - Mrs. Judith Fry 

Calistri '56 - Fayetteville, NY 
Secretary - Mrs. Nancy Snyder Boyer '64 

Montoursville, PA 
Last Retiring President - John B. Ernst '58 

Doylestown, PA 

Representatives-at-Large - 

Term Expires June 1984 

Mrs. Gail Gleason Beamer '75 - Harrisburg, PA 
Mrs. Carolyn Moday Edwards '61 - Williamsport, PA 
Miss Nellie F. Gorgas '38 & '55 - Jersey Shore, PA 




75 



Index 



Academic Advisement 8 

Academic Calendar 67 

Academic Honesty 11 

Academic Honors 11 

Academic Program 5 

Academic Standing 11 

Accounting Curriculum 20 

Accounting-Mathematics (EIM) 21 

Accreditation 4 

Administrative Assistants 74 

Administrative Staff 68 

Admission 60 

Admissions Deposit 61 

Admissions Office 60 

Admission Policy 60 

Admission Standards 60 

Advanced Placement 11 

Advanced Standing by Transfer 60 

Advisory Committees 8 

Health Professions 8 

Legal Professions 9 

Medical Technology 8 

Theological Professions 9 

Allopathic Medicine, Advisement for 8 

American Studies (EIM) 21 

Anthropology Curriculum 54 

Application Fee and Deposits 61 

Application Process 60 

Applied Music Requirements 45 

Art Curriculum 22 

Astronomy and Physics Curriculum 24 

Athletics Training 49 

Attendance, Class 10 

Audit 15 

Awards 12 

BFA Degree 5 

Biology Curriculum 26 

Board of Trustees 68 

Books and Supplies 61 

BSN Degree 5 

Business Administration Curriculum 28 

Calendar, Academic 67 

Campus Facilities 65 

Career Development Services 58 

Chemistry Curriculum 29 

Christian Ministry, Advisement for 9 

Class Attendance 10 

College and the Church 4 

College Directory 68 

College Level Examination Program (CLEP) . 1 1 

Community Scholarships 64 

Computer Science Curriculum 42 

Conduct, Standards of 59 

Contents 2 

Contingency Deposits 61 

Cooperative Programs 15 

Engineering 15 

Environmental Studies 15 

Forestry 15 

Medical Technology 16 

Military Science 17 

Optometry 16 

Podiatric Medicine 16 

Sculpture 17 

Counseling, Academic 8 

Counseling, Personal 58 

Course Credit by Examination 11 

Course Descriptions 20 

Criminal Justice (EIM) 30 

Curriculum 20 

Damage Charges 59 

Degree Programs 5 

Degree Requirements 5 

Dental School, Advisement for 8 

Departmental Honors 13 

Departmental Majors 7 



Deposits 61 

Deposit Refunds 61 

Distribution Requirements 6 

English 6 

Fine Arts 6 

Foreign Language 6 

History and Social Science 7 

Mathematics •. 6 

Natural Science 6 

Philosophy 6 

Religion 6 

Early Admission Procedure 60 

Economics Curriculum 31 

Education Curriculum 32 

Education Financing Plans 64 

Educational Opportunity Grants 63 

Engineering, Cooperative Program 15 

English Curriculum 34 

English Requirement 6 

Entrance Examinations (CEEB) 11 

Entry Fees and Deposits 61 

Environmental Studies 15 

Established Interdisciplinary Major (EIM) . . 7 

Expenses 61 

Faculty 69 

Federal Grants and Loans 63 

Fees 61 

Financial Aid 62 

Financial Assistance 62 

Financial Information 62 

Fine Arts Requirements 6 

Foreign Language Requirement 6 

Foreign Languages and Literatures 

Curriculum 35 

Forestry, Cooperative Program 15 

French Curriculum 36 

General Expenses 61 

German Curriculum 37 

Grading System 10 

Graduation Requirements 5 

Grants-in-Aid 62 

Greek Curriculum 37 

Health Professions Careers 8 

Health Services 58 

Hebrew Curriculum 37 

History Curriculum 38 

History of the College 4 

History Requirements 7 

Honor Societies 11 

Honors, Academic 11 

Honors, Departmental 13 

Independent Study 14 

Interdisciplinary Majors 7 

Established Majors (EIM) 7 

Individual Majors (IIM) 7 

International Studies 40 

Internship Programs 14 

Interviews 60 

Johnson Atelier 22 

Legal Professions, Advisement for 9 

Literature (EIM) 40 

Loans 63 

Location 3 

London Semester 17 

Lycoming Scholar Program 18 

Major 7 

Admission to 7 

Departmental 7 

Interdisciplinary (EIM, IIM) 7 

Mass Communication (EIM) 41 

Mathematical Sciences 42 

Mathematics Requirements 6 

May Term 14 

Medical School, Advisement for 8 

Medical History 58 

Medical Staff 74 



Medical Technology 16 

Military Science 17 

Ministerial Grants-in-Aid 62 

Minor 8 

Music Curriculum 44 

National Direct Student Loans (NDSL) 63 

Natural Science Requirement 6 

Near East Culture and Archaeology (EIM) . . 46 

Non-Payment of Fees Penalty 62 

Nursing 46 

Optometry 16 

Optometry School, Advisement for 8 

Osteopathy School, Advisement for 8 

Overseas Studies Opportunities 15 

Part-time Student Opportunities 15 

Payment of Fees 61 

Payments, Partial 61 

Penalty for Non-Payment of Fees 62 

Personal Counseling 58 

Philosophy Curriculum 48 

Philosophy Requirement 6 

Physical Education Curriculum 49 

Physics Curriculum 24 

Placement Services 58 

Podiatric Medicine, Cooperative Program ... 16 

Political Science Curriculum 50 

Psychology Curriculum 51 

Purpose and Objectives 3 

Reading Improvement Course 58 

Refunds 61 

Registration 9 

Regulations (Standards of Conduct) 59 

Religion Curriculum 53 

Religion Requirement 6 

Repeated Courses 10 

Requirements, Distribution 6 

Requirements for Admission 60 

Requirements for Graduation 5 

Reserve Officer Training Corps Program 

(ROTC) 17 

Residence 58 

Residence Halls 58 

Scholarships 62 

Scholarships (ROTC) 64 

Sculpture 22 

Selection Process 60 

Social Science Requirement 7 

Sociology-Anthropology Curriculum 54 

Spanish Curriculum 37 

Special Features 14 

Independent Study 14 

Internship Program 14 

May Term 14 

Overseas Studies Opportunities 15 

Standards of Admission 60 

Standards of Conduct 59 

State Grants and Loans 63 

Student Enrichment Semester (SES) 17 

Student Records 11 

Student Services 58 

Study Abroad 15 

Summer Session Calendar 67 

Supplemental Educational Opportunity 

Grant (SEOG) 63 

Theatre Curriculum 56 

The Harrisburg Urban Semester (THUS). . . . 17 

Theological Professions, Advisement 8 

Transfer 60 

Trustees 68 

Unit Course System 9 

United Nations Semester 17 

Veterans, Approval 60 

Veterinary School, Advisement for 8 

Washington Semester 17 

Withdrawal from College 61 

Work-Study Grants 63 



76 



The general regulations and policies stated in 
this catalog are in effect for the 1983-84 academ- 
ic year. Students beginning their first term at Ly- 
coming College in the fall of 1983 or the spring 
of 1984 are thereafter governed by the policies 
stated in this catalog. Requirements governing a 
student's major are those in effect at the time a 
major is formally declared and officially accept- 
ed by the major department. 

If changes are made in subsequent editions of 
the catalog to either general requirements or ma- 
jor requirements, students may be permitted the 
option of following their original program or a 
subsequent catalog version, but the College al- 
ways reserves the right to determine which re- 
quirements apply. 

If a student interrupts his or her education 
without a leave of absence, the catalog require- 
ments in effect at the time of readmission will 
apply. Students on an approved leave of absence 
retain the same requirements they had when they 
entered, if their leave does not extend beyond 
one year. 

Lycoming College reserves the right to amend 
or change the policies and procedures stated in 
this catalog without prior notice to those who 
may be affected by them. 












■ 



LYCOMING COLLEGE 

Williamsport, PA 17701 
(717) 326-1951